HomeMy WebLinkAbout2516FAX TRANSMISSION COVER SHEET
To Plan holders for the JP Complex project
Company
Telephone Number
Fax Number
From Jeff Lednicky
Date November 22, 2005
Number of pages
to follow: -43
if you do not receive all of the pages,
please call back as soon as possible
.5
r
PATtERSON
ARCHITE�CTS
701 South Texas Ave
Bryan, Texas 77803
voice 979 775-6036
fax 979779-0727
web www.patarch.com
Notes:
Addendum No.1
2104
L'd LZLO.6LL-6L6 SP8P4WV uosJeAed d6Z:LO 90 ZZ ^oN
ADDENDUM NO. 1
to the
Drawings and Specifications
for
A new court facility for Brazos County
JP Complex — Precinct 3
100 Anderson Street
CoIlege Station, Texas
Project Number: 2516
PATTERSON * ARCHITECTS
701 South Texas Avenue
Bryan, Texas 77803
22 November 2005
1.0I GENERAL
A. This addendum, consisting of pages, supersedes the Drawings and
Specifications dated OCTOBER 2005.
B. The following changes, corrections, or additions are part of the Bid
Documents.
2.01 REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 00 THRU DIVISION 14
A. Section 00010 — Advertisement for Bids
1. Insert attached page 2.
B. Section 00100 —Instructions to Bidders/ Request for Proposal
1. Change section title to "Request for Proposal."
2. Insert attached pages 3 through 23.
C. Section 00300 — Bid Proposal Forms
1. Delete this section in its entirety.
AD 1
1 of 23
Z'd LZLO-6LL-6L6 SPGP40Jd uOSJeABd d6Z:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Nov 22 05 07:29p Patterson Architects 979-779-0727 p.3 .
EZ 30 Z
iciv
414003 sozsag
4°j8`' 2gngwnd
PJVAAGFII Std
OW "a n sBt '�"; 2ultado gtsodoud MU 10 ai*tp lse43t
�1 P 0£ ulg3jm lssodoud 114 ,utlp1131M Bsco 101atawoo ONE
" ydmaza zt;
sl ,yuno�7 caaaug Pass; luml pus MIS Its 15044du3za If Patoud aq.L
*f anoa aq; o; suoAgffVAPt 3"M P3J*Muoa "auo aq; ;dart o; pas
;s*obaj plot al sapWslnau,il pus capllsewo3ol ns Poo Saar ao s[ssodoad
ON Pus Bus pa(aa .ro a,ysAL as ;qSN *q3 s*&sasa;r ,4aoo, sozwg
•,c;aeoa
sOMg of a19uXed g3Sg3 agtW •algsl,sAW aq ;oo IQAlL saopsaljlaadS
pnt s8ul,ataQ ,lo pas ls!�.=sa 4*Aogs ss `pnit;go aq som sra;as";uoa
salsodaid Bq paMobai MOPWU132ds pow s2ulmtap lsuoglpps
"o'ualsap lsl"a;sw pas Sj0rusa3ao3gns,Qq pppnbat s8ulAs"O •twoou
asld snaasw of paagd sq MA 6noNs3W3*dS pat stalmt"Q -Iwwdoud
aql jo s;dp3au "aVa s,Cap (01) a*; aq;l,L sooq�iwljlaadg s9nu�uQ
on 10 a"e a ajst aq; 63 so aa;asrsus ss gas* (00'801s) ulgloP Paapunq
one jo Hsrdap nodo agitga ino4gw► "opgulsoa ls"aoa0 8utsodwd gala
o; Pay+gwoj aq IRA saopw3W3adS pus s9ulmsuQ jo Igor, (Z) OA%jL '£0lLL
tsYaZ 'utAUg 'anuawd sna,L q;nos 10L `=3lg3jd uosuaIgsd surouj
Pasl�go aq ,isRs sluaanO(I losodwa pos 'suopt gpedS `s8ulwwaQ
'ustJg `L L i arms 6atnog3jnoa .4Qno sozW 'E06LL Vulay
4unoa soziag a of i 8 Iva Sulsrquad
IN PONPalAwmlas poi pausdo Blallgnd aq RIA slued d P1sS •paoadonn
pawn;*" aq Illm ami; ;fg; "aq<s pawlaaa" slssodoud 11V
'' a 136n 99=1 'ur,CJg 6L11 asinS
'aswoqunoa 4uwo0 sozwg OW of suanwidaQ aulstgaand ,4uno0
sozs"g ay; &q PaMa3w aq Rim WOO?t.LHaoa -
GNV X31TdW03
3aL 0 £ :Lad `J"EV.LSN00 GKV £ 'JLJJ `'laVXd 1H.Z 30
3OLLS/lP 90 NOIJ-311H LSNOD — 600-90K dM aoj FoSodo id PaIpS
SM013q'tiUM) lVW3 i30 0133110N
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 1 of 19 pages
REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
CONSTRUCTION OF JUSTICE OF THE PEACE PCT. 3 OFFICE COMPLEX AND
COURTROOM AND CONSTABLE PCT. 3 OFFICE COMPLEX
BRAZOS COUNTY PURCHASING OFFICE
Brazos County Courthouse, Suite 117 Proposal Request No.2006-009
Bryan, Texas 77803 Page I of 19 pages
Telephone (979) 361-4290
Proposals will be received at the Brazos County Purchasing Department until 1:30 P.M.CDT,
Wednesday, December 14. 2005, and publicly opened and acknowledged at 2:00 P. M.CDT.
Wednesday, December 14. 2005 in the Brazos County Purchasing Department, Suite 117, Brazos
County Courthouse, Bryan, Texas.
I"
B.
SCOPE OF PROPOSAL
Proposals are solicited for the construction of a Brazos County Justice of the Peace , Pct.
3 Office Complex and Courtroom and Constable, Pct. 3 Office Complex. This property
is located at 100 Anderson, College Station, TX 77840. Said property is to be built in
such a fashion as indicated on enclosed Drawings, Specifications, and Proposal
Documents.
1. Each Proposer, by making his proposal, represents that he has read and
understands the proposal documents.
2. Each Proposer, by making his proposal, represents that he has visited the site and
familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the work is to be
performed-
CONDITIONS OF PROPOSAL
The following instructions apply to all proposals and become a part of terms and
conditions of any proposal submitted to the Brazos County Purchasing Department,
unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this Request for Proposal. All Contractors are
required to be informed of these Terms and Conditions and will be held responsible for
having done so:
1. Definitions: In order to simplify the language throughout this proposal, the
following definitions shall apply:
a. BRAZOS COUNTY - Same as County.
b. COMMISSIONERS' COURT - The elected officials of Brazos County,
Texas given the authority to exercise such powers and jurisdiction of all
county business as conferred by the State Constitution and Laws.
C. CONTRACT - An agreement between the County and a Supplier to
furnish supplies ,and/or services over a designated period of time during
which repeated purchases are trade of the commodity specified.
AD1
3 of 23
-o'd LZLO-6LL-6L6 SP8V4WV aosjeA% d6Z:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request.No. 2006-009
Page 2 of 19 pages
d. CONTRACTOR - The successful Contractor(s) of this proposal request.
C. COUNTY - The government of Brazos County, Texas and its authorized
representatives.
f. SUB -CONTRACTOR - Any contractor hired by the Contractor or
Supplier to furnish materials and services specified in this proposal
request.
g. SUPPLIER - Same as Contractor.
h. PROPOSER — Contractor submitting a proposal.
2. Upon acceptance and approval by the Commissioners' Court, this proposal effects
a working contract between Brazos County and the successful Contractor for the
period designated.
3. Proposals must be received by the Purchasing Department prior to the time and
date specified-
4- The County reserves the right to accept or reject in part or in whole, any proposals
submitted, and to waive any technicalities for the best interest of the County.
S. Brazos County shall not be responsible for any verbal communication between
any employee of the County and any potential Proposer. Only written
specifications and written price quotations will be considered.
6. Brazos County reserves the right to reject any proposals that do not fully respond
to each specified item.
7. The Contractor must include Employer Identification Number or Social Security
Number for the proposal to be valid.
8. Should there be a change in ownership or management, the contract shall be
canceled unless a mutual agreement is reached with the new owner to continue
the contract with its present provisions and prices. This contract is
nontransferable by either party.
9. The County may cancel this contract at any time for any reason, provided a thirty
day written notice is given.
10. The project award shall be based on, but not necessarily limited to, the following
factors:
a. Proposed Contract Amount
b. Special needs and requirements of Brazos County
c. References of the Proposer
d. Contractor's past performance record with Brazos County
Although the cost is an essential part of the proposal, Brazos County is not
obligated to award a contract on the sole basis of cost
AD1
4 of 23
9,d LZLO-6LL-6L6 SPOW01y uosJeued d6Z:LO 90 ZZ AoN
Proposal Continuation Sheet Proposal Request No. 2006-OD9
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS Page 3 of 19 pages
11. Acceptance of merchandise, work, and/or equipment provided shall be made by
the County at the sole discretion of the Commissioners Court when all terms and
conditions of the contract and specifications have been met to its satisfaction.
including the submission to the County of any and all documentation as may be
required.
12. Title and Risk of Loss of the goods shall not pass to Brazos County until the
County actually accepts and takes possession of the goods at the point or points of
delivery.
13. This agreement shall be governed by the Uniform Commercial Code as adopted in
the State of Texas as effective and in force on the date of this agreement.
14. Proposals must specify the number of consecutive calendar days required to
complete the project.
15. Proposals cannot be altered after receiving time. No proposal may be withdrawn
after opening time without acceptable reason and with the approval of
Commissioners Court.
16. Proposals will not be considered if submitted by telephone, fax or any other
means of rapid dispatch, nor will a proposal be considered if submitted to any
other person or department other than specifically instructed.
17. If the recipient of this form is unable to send in a proposal, the drawings and
specifications should be returned to Patterson Architects. 701 S. Texas Ave.,
Bryan, Texas.
18. Proposals must show full firm name, mailing address and telephone number and
be manually signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. Firm name
and authorized signature shall appear in each space provided.
19. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the
contract which modify or interpret the bidding documents, including drawings
and specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections, they will
become part of the contract document when the construction contract is executed.
20. It is our policy not to furnish proposal results over the phone. Proposal results
and tabulation sheets will be mailed to each vendor after it is awarded by
Commissioners Court.
21. This Proposal will be made part of any resulting contract.
22. All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the contract for construction
A.I.A- Document A-201, are applicable to these Instruction to Proposers.
AD1
5 of 23
9-d LZLO-6LL-U6 sloel!4ojd uosieWd d6Z:L0 90 ZZ AoN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
C. SPECLAL PROVISIONS
Proposal Request No. 2006-W9
Page 4 of 19 pages
Qualified Contractors with questions regarding the proposal should contact
Architect, Fred Patterson 979/775-6036, or Purchasing Agent, Pat Howard
979/361-4291.
2. Fill out the proposal completely and return it to the Brazos County Purchasing
Office, Brazos County Courthouse, 300 East 2.6e Street, Suite 117, Bryan, Texas
77803-5327 by 1:30 P.M..CDT December 14 2005. The Proposal is invalid if it
is not deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date advertised, or
prior extension issued to the Proposers.
All proposals shall be prepared on the forms provided by Patterson Architects
and Brazos County and submitted in accordance with the Instructions to Proposer.
Patterson Architects will furnish Proposers with proposal forms upon which the
following Proposal items shall be submitted.
a. A Single contract price for General Construction as detailed and described in
the Proposal as the Base Amount
b. Alternates
c. Acknowledgement of addenda
d. Number of calendar days to complete the project
4. Contractors Qualification Statement (AIA Document A-305)
Submit a list of five relevant construction projects that have been completed in the
past five years AND a list of projects completed for Brazos County. Please
include the following:
a. Description of the project
b. Project Deliver Method
c. Final Construction Cost
d. Commencement date and contractual and actual substantial completion dates
e. Owner's representative for construction with telephone/fax number
£ Project Architect with telephone/fax number
g. Personnel to be assigned to the project and their qualifications (Project
Manager and Superintendent as a minimum)
5. Prior to the receipt of the Proposal, Addenda will be mailed or delivered to each
person of firm recorded by Patterson Architects as having received the proposal
documents and will be available for inspection wherever the bidding documents
are kept available for that purpose. Addenda issued after receipt of Proposals will
be mailed or delivered only to the selected Proposer.
6. There is no expressed or implied obligation for Brazos County to reimburse
responding Proposer for any expenses incurred in preparing proposals in response
to this request. Brazos County will not reimburse responding Proposers for these
expenses.
ADI
6 of 23
L'd LZ/-MU-6L6 SPGV40Jd cOGJeAed d6Z:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet Proposal Request No. 2006-009
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS Page S.of 19 pages
7. During the evaluation process, Brazos County reserves the right, in the best
interest of the County, to request additional information or clarification from
Contractors.
8. At the public opening, there will be no disclosure of contents to competing
Contractors, and proposals will be kept secret during the negotiation process.
Except for trade secrets and confidential information which the Contractor
identifies as proprietary, all proposals will be open for public inspection after the
contract has been awarded and executed.
9. The contract shall be awarded to the responsible Contractor whose proposal is
determined to be the best evaluated offer resulting from negotiations, considering
the relative importance of price and other factors set forth in the request for
proposal.
10. All proposals reasonably susceptible to being selected will be given fair and equal
consideration, and discussions may be conducted with these Contractors. For the
purpose of obtaining best & final offers, the proposals may be revised before
awarding the contract. Oral negotiations must be confirmed in writing prior to
contract award. However, a contract may be awarded without any negotiation of
proposals.
11. Your response to this proposal should be clear and concise addressing all
requirements listed above and any other factors not specifically mentioned which
would be advantageous to Brazos County.
12. Performance Standards:
1. All services contracted herein shall be done in a courteous and orderly
manner. All Contractors personnel shall be appropriately and neatly
dressed at all times while on the property.
2. The Contractor shall provide a qualified supervisor or foreman on the
site at all times during the remodeling to be responsible for the
progress of the work and the conduct of the Contractors personnel.
I The personnel performing the services contracted herein shall be under
the sole responsibility and the employ of the Contractor and shall be
constantly supervised and shall be competent, experienced and skilled.
4. All materials and equipment brought to the site are the full
responsibility and liability of the Contractor until removed from the site
as required.
5. Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and
pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and other
AD1
7 of 23
ffd LZLO-6LL-6L6 2PGP401V uoWeged d6Z:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 6 of 19 pages
facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the work herein contracted.
6. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order
among its representative(s). The Contractor shall only utilize personnel
who are, in the opinion of the County, satisfactorily and sufficiently
skilled for the efficient performance of all work herein contracted to be
done.
7. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations, and order of any public authority in
connection with the performance of the work herein to be done.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and
supervising appropriate safety precautions and programs in connection
with the work herein contracted to be done. The Contractor shall take
all reasonable precautions for safety of and shall provide all reasonable
protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (1) all employees on the
project and other persons who may be affected thereby, (2) the project
and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, and (3)
other property at the site or adjacent thereto.
9. Contractor will be responsible for immediate notification of all damage
to the property by the Contractor or its representative(s).
10. The Contractor shall pay Prevailing Wage Rates: See Specifications
under Supplies and Conditions.
D. DISCREPANCIES AND AMBIGUITIES
Each Proposer shall examine the proposal documents carefully and, not later than seven
days prior to the date for receipt of proposal, shall make written request to the Architect
for interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein which he
may discover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an addendum by the
Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by addendum shall be binding. No
Proposer shall rely upon any interpretation or correction given by any other method.
E. SUBSTITUTIONS
1. Each Proposer represents that his proposal is based upon the materials and
equipment described in the proposal documents.
2. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted to
Patterson Architects for approval at least seven days prior to the date for receipt
of proposal. Refer to Section 01640.
F QUALIFICATION OF PROPOSERS
AD1
8 of 23
6'd LZLO-6LL-6L6 SPG3!40JV cOSJe4ed d0£:LO 90 ZZ AON
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 7 of 19 pages
A Construction contract will be made only with a responsible Contractor and
Subcontractor who posses the ability to perform successfully under the terms and
conditions of this project. In addition to apparent low proposal, the County may
give consideration to such matters as Contractor integrity, demonstrated ability to
execute the work required by the contract documents, record of past performance,
financial and technical resources, and accessibility to other necessary resources.
If requested, General Contractor will be required to furnish the Architect a
Contractor's Qualification Statement similar to MA Document A-305.
2. Proposed may be disqualified and their proposal not considered for any of the
following specific reasons:
a. Reason for believing collusion exists among Proposers
b. The Proposer being interested in any litigation against the County
c. The Proposer being in arrears on any existing contract or having defaulted
on a previous contract.
d. Lack of competency as revealed by financial statement, experience and
equipment, questionnaires, or qualification statement
e. Incomplete work which in the judgment of the County will prevent or
hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded
f. Poor performance on other projects as evidenced by references or other
means
G. TAXES
H.
Brazos County is tax exempt. Tax exemption certificates will be executed by the County
upon request.
INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and maintain at its sole cost and expense for the duration of
this Agreement insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property
that may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the
Contractor, its agents, representatives, volunteers, employees or subcontractors. The
Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance with respect to the County,
its officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by
the County, its officials, employees or volunteers shall be considered in excess of the
Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute to it. Further, the Contractor shall include
all subcontractors as additional insured under its policies or shall furnish separate
certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverage for subcontractors
shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. All Certificates of Insurance
and endorsements shall be furnished to the County's Representative and approved
by the County before work commences.
1. Standard Insurance Policies Required:
a. Commercial General Liability Policy
b. Automobile Liability Policy
C. Worker's Compensation Policy
AD1
9 of 23
Ol'd LZLO-6LL-6L6 SPSN01V uosJsued d0£:LO 90 ZZ AoN
Proposal Continuation Sheet Proposal Request No. 2006-009
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS Page 8 of 19 pages
2. General Requirements applicable to all policies:
a. Only insurance carriers licensed and admitted to do business in the State
of Texas will be accepted.
b. Deductibles shall be listed on the Certificate of Insurance and are
acceptable only on a per occurrence basis for property damage only.
C. "Claims Made" policies will not be accepted.
d. Each insurance policy shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be
suspended, voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after
thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt
requested, has been given to Brazos County.
C. Upon request, certified copies of all insurance policies shall be furnished
to Brazos County.
3. Commercial General Liability
a. General Liability insurance shall be written by carrier with an A:VIII or
better rating in accordance with the current Best Key Rating guide.
b. Brazos County, its officials, employees and volunteers, are to be added as
"Additional named Insured" to the General Liability policy. The coverage
shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to
the County, its officials, employees or volunteers.
C. Minimum Combined Single Limit of $1,000,000.00 per occurrence for
bodily injury and property damage.
d. No coverage shall be deleted from the standard policy without
notification of individual exclusions being attached for review and
acceptance.
e. Waiver of Subrogation shall be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
4. Automobile Liability
a. General Liability Insurance shall be written by a carrier with an A: VIII or
better rating in accordance with the current Best Key Rating Guide.
b. Minimum Combined Single Limit of $600,000.00 per occurrence for
bodily injury and property damage.
5. Worker's Compensation Insurance
Pursuant to the requirements set forth in Title 28, Section 110.11.0 of the Texas
compensation insurance policy; either directly through their employer's policy
(the Contractor's or subcontractor's policy) or through an executed coverage
agreement on an approved TWCC form. Accordingly, if a subcontractor does not
have his or her own policy and a coverage agreement is used, Contractors and
subcontractors must use that portion of the form whereby the hiring contractor
agrees to provide coverage to the employees of the subcontractor. The portion of
AD1
10 of 23
L L'd LZLO-6LL-6L6 %')GI!40JV uosreUsd d0e:LO 90 ZZ ^oN
Nov 22 05 07:30p Patterson Architects
979-779-0727 p.12
EZ jo IT
LCI`d
1ov4uoo ayr paprn,,w 8uraq
or aoud dinua imuawuraAo8 ay; o; a9vaanoo fo a;v-llr!uao n aptno rd 1snw .torauquoj ate
•;oafoad ay; fo uolrvanp ayj aof ';oafoad ail; uo saoruas 8urprnoad aorova;uo,7 ayr
fo saa(oldwa llv aof (pk) 110'I0p, uorjoas 'apoJ aogv7 svxa,L fo s;uawaxnbaa dio;n;vis
arp sjaaw rvyi 'sruawaaa8v aSvaaloo duv fo 8url f pun s;unowv Ilaudvd pun sapoo
uopvo fzssvja fo 8urmod u iadoad ay; uo pasvq 'a8vaanoo apudoad jlvys aorava;uoJ ayl W
s;alrol ajgvrlod fo eCravjap pun 'sauanrjap ,<jddns aa!ffo siopuan a8n ranaq/poof
sv yons 'roafold ayj of pa;vlaaun sap Agov apnlour jou saop „saolnaag„ ;aafoad
v of pajvlaa aouuas jay;o ao uozmraods-uv4 ';Ogvl 8urprnoad ao `sjvraajvw ao maurdrnba
8uuanrlap ao ` igjnvy '8urpraoad 'uor;vpwrj ;noillpR 'apnpiq „ saopjag, roafold
ay; uo saauuas aprnoad o; suosaad saysluanf rprym diuua dun fo m,<oldwa ao eQpua yons
d[un fo saae(ojdwa 'sao;vaado-aauxo 'saauavo ao;ow smuvdwoo 8ursval 'saopv4uoOgns
'saorovajuoJ ;uapuadapul 'uormmrwrj mog7pti 'sapnjour s yL -saadoldwa svy uosaad jvyr
aayjageK fo ssa1pm8aa 'Oafoad ay; uo waofaad o; uayvraapun svy ao;ovajuoJ ayr saorruas
ay; fo ;avd to ljv 8uruuofcad sar;rjua ao suosaad ljv sapnjour - apoJ aogv7 svxa,L
atl) o 960.903 U0110as ur „ a ;ava;uoogns„ pa•iZvuf ay; uo saornaas Mqpmoid su saad
•nrrjua jmuawurano8 ay;
Xq pajdaoav puv pajajdwoo uaaq svy roafold ayr uo 4.rom s, uosaad/s aorova;uo3 aq; jrrun
jaafoad ay; uo Yaom ay; fo 8uluur8aq aye ruoaf awp ayj sapnpoul - ;oa• oa y; o uopvrnQ
,;aafo cd ay; fo uormanp ay; aof ;aafoad v uo saapuas
8viprnoad saae oldwa s, djpua ao s uosaad ail; aof a8vaaaoo aouvansur uor;vsuadwoo
S aalaoeK'GolmVIr BurMOys '(l g-DJAL ao `pg 03ACL '(18 �� ( ivaruaaa D a8vaanoo
v ao `uorsslwwoJ uor;vsuadwoJ s aa:poAj svxa,L ay; �(q panssr aansur flas o; �(jraoyjnv fo
ajvouaa v 'aouvansur fo ama fr;aao v fo �fdoa d - „ a;nar u1a „ a vaaAoa o a;»a rxja3
suor;ru fa ff
MORMuamnoop 90 spiepueIs sappis
osodui of io paupnuoo are AzED goignn ut juawnoop ogloads aqj a;Epouim000s
o; paiinboi asoq} jdaoxa 'szSuugo ao sp.Tonn Isuomppe Cur ;norll!m 'oOL'auel
Suinnolloj aq; r T suo►jipuoo pum suuai Sumollo3 oqj apnlout isnui ;oofmid sup uo
sior.Tiuoogns llu puE `luawaa&V sit} 'saoprogpods plq atj apoJ antjraisrutuzpy
sExa.L ayi 30 (L) ( o ) 01 l •Q 11 uot;oaS '8Z olijZ jo suua; ipijdxo at; o; juensmd
(uoijaolgnS jo lanisA4,) -Xx od sn
p m papnlout aq
Ims Kluamasiopug siogjp uioi3 ianooa-a o; jq8� mp to saeteAA, sexas„ q
•pasTnboi si woppoE qma toj 00.00o`OOSS,3o si!Tml 4TItgETZ s,iaColdmg T
:sumo 2umollo3 aqi apnjout IlBgs aousinsm uot;esuadmoo s,aa)lio.,a aq,l,
•posn aq jou Arm so;ov.4wo juopuadopui ue 3o szo4oldma
aqj IOJ 38e12n00 apinoid o; lou =19 emogle aspwatjo pinom iugi uuo3 aq;
T
sagrd 6Z J0 6•3Svd swa.I.'AaNf10J sozvuu
600-900Z 'obi 4sanbag lrsodoid ;aauS uogrnuijuo, irsodoid
Nov 22 05 07:31 p Patterson Architects
979-779-0727 p.13
£Z ;o ZT
IQd
:jOl3v-tTuO j
ay; o; aprnoad pun s7ov4uoo ;t utoyna yxw uosrad aag;o Bova zuaSf ujvzgo (p)
wafoad ay; fo uojlvanp ay; Suunp spua a8vaanoo. jo aivo uaao
;uaaano arp uo unlogs pouad a2manoo ay; f 'aovaaAm fo uorsua;xa Sul.Koys aSvaanoo fo
a;vorfztaao Mau a 'pouad aSnaanoo aq; Jo pua ay; o; loud 'aoiova;uoD ag; aprnoad (�)
' aload ayi fo uormunp aq; aof yoaload ay; uo saor,.uas Surprnoad uosaad
agl fo saaAojdrua jIv aof papjnoad Suiaq sj aSvaanoo ;vy; Surtitoys aSvaanoo fo a;vorfrytao
v 2oafoad aq; uo �raont 8uruujSaq uosaad;vy; o; loud :tolova;ugq aq; o; aprnoad (Z)
;oa bad aqg Jo uor;n.4np arj; aoJ `toaford
ay; uo saornaas Surpjnold saafoldrua sir fo Ilv aof (yl,) f10.101, uoj;oas 'apo.3 aogv7 svxal
fo s;uautaarnbaa eCio;n;v;s ay; s;aaru ivy; `juatuaaa�v a8vaanoo n"uv Jo Surlrf pun siunoutL
110-ldvd puv sapoo uoz;vorfrssvjo fo 8uruodaa aadwd uo pasvq 'aSvaaloo apjnoad (1)
: o; 'ioafoad v uo saarruas apuoad
o; s;'v-Ouoo;r U1011m ypm. uosaad Bova aarnbaa e(jjvmovquoa jlags aolovquOD agl I
'aSvaanoo fo -lonj;aodar puv aSvaanoo gyan dvur uosaad
v ntoy Bur;v;s pun 'paaanoo aq o; pa gnbaa aav days;vg; ;oafoad ay; uo sa.?I uas Surprnoad
suosaad 11v Surutaofur 'uorsstruruoo uor;vsuadruoj , saaxpog svxa,L ay; dq paquosaad
aauuvut puv uuoJ 1xa; ay; uj aor;ou v airs ;oa!oad yova uo ;sod Ilags iolava;uoD arm H
laafoad aq; uo saopuas Surpjnoad
uosaad duv fo aSvaanoo fo uoznAoad am siaaf u rCllmaa;vuc rnq; a8uvya Cun ao `untouy
anvy pinoys ao mauy amova;uoD arp aao mvp Ivpualva of urg;r: t 'efaanrjap Ivuosaad
ao Ijnut parfrpao dq Supurot ur -,CuTua lv;uautuaanoS ay; d[Jz;ou Ilnys aolova;uor aqd rJ
lavaaay; ava [ auo aof pun ;aafoad
aq; Jo uoj;vamp ay; aof a8naanoo fo sa;vo i;aao pagnbaa llv urv;aa llvys ao;ova;uoa aU
wafoad ay; Jo uopvanp ay; Suunp spua affv ranoo fo a;vor, jr�raa ;ua una aqI
uo untogs pouad a2wanoo ay; f `a2vaanoo fo uorsua;xa Sur.►togs a8vaanoa fo a;va i;lao
Mau v 'dmovaiuoD ayp dq 1dra3aa ia�(v s-dvp Ivpuz7vo uanas unq; as;vl ou 0
d puv'uouad jjv aof a2v.4anoo 2uruoys aSvaanoo Jo saMoyuaao
puv 'oafoaguas 8up.fAwd ajy' uo aAny ljrnIuuua IvjuauuaanoB all;
os Wafwd
ayl uo :raont Suruur8aq uosjad ivy; o; ioud aSvaanoo fo a;aorfrlaao v (I)
puv yoafoad v uo saarnaas Su(?prnoad uosaad yava
;vg; 8urntogS 4JIMa jmuaauuaanoS ay; ylyk aFvcano
aSvaanoo ay; fo pua aq; of aoud `;snot ao;ova;uoj ay;
spua aSvaanoo fo a;voffimmo ;uaaano s ao;avquoj aq
:Aflua jvluaun"anoS ag; o; apraoad
utoaJ urv;go jlvys ao;".,Iuoj aqd
•papualxa uaaq svy a8vaanoo
a fo alvo�ruao Mau v alf 'pouad
7oafoad aq; Jo uopvanp aq1 8uzrnp
uo uxogs poraad aSvaanoa aq; ;l
J
H
it7
sailed 6I;o 0z aged sVX3JL) ,NnoD SOZV2Ia
600-900Z 'oN Isanbag Irsodozd 4aa4S uO'4enuj4uo, Iesodoza
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 11 of 19 pages
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end
of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter,•
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 calendar days after the person know or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the
project; and
(7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required
by paragraphs (a)-(g), with the ceni flwates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
J. By signing this contract, or providing, or causing to be provided a certificate of
coverage, the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by
workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be
based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier, or, in the case
of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance regulation Providing
false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties,
criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
6. Certificates of insurance shall be prepared and executed by the insurance company or its
authorized agent, and shall contain the following provisions and warranties:
a. The company is licensed and admitted to do business in the State of Texas.
b. The insurance policies provided by the insurance company are underwritten on
forms that have been provided by the Texas State Board of Insurance or ISO.
C. All endorsements and insurance coverage according to requirements and
instructions contained herein_
d. The form of the notice of cancellation, termination, or change in coverage
provisions to Brazos County.
e. Original endorsements affecting coverage required by the section shall be
furnished with the certificates of insurance.
7. Compliance with Law
The Contractor's work and materials shall comply with all state and federal laws,
municipal ordinances, regulations, and directions of inspectors appointed by proper
authorities having jurisdiction.
ADl
13 of 23
t, l'd LZL(MLL-6L6 Spet!40Jd uosJeWd d ML0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 12 of 19 pages
The Contractor shall perform and require all subcontractors to perform the work in
accordance with applicable laves, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the State of Texas
and the United States and in compliance with OSHA and other laws as they apply to its
employees. In the event any of the conditions of the specifications violate the code for
any industry, then such code conditions shall prevail.
The Contractor shall follow all applicable state and federal laws, municipal ordinances,
and guidelines concerning soil erosion and sediment control throughout the Project and
warranty term.
Safety Precaution
Safety precautions at the site are a part of the construction techniques and processes for
which the Contractor shall be solely responsible. The Contractor is solely responsible
for handling and use of hazardous materials or waste, and informing employees of any
such hazardous materials or waste. The Contractor shall provide copies of all hazardous
materials and waste data sheets to the Bryan Fire Department marked "Attn.: Assistant
Chief'.
The Contractor has the sole obligation to protect or warn any individual of potential
hazards created by the performance of the work set forth herein. The Contractor shall, at
its own expense, take such precautionary measures for the protection of persons,
property, and the work as may be necessary.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damages to property, personal injuries
and/or death due to failure of safety devices of any type or nature that may be required to
protect or warn any individual of potential hazards created by the performance of the
work set forth herein; and when any property damage is incurred, the damaged portion
shall immediately be replaced or compensated for by the Contractor at its own cost and
expense.
9. Indemnity
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor agrees to and shalt indemnify, hold
harmless, and defend the County, its officers, agents, and employees form and against
any and all claims, losses, damages, causes of action, suits, and liability of every kind,
including all expenses of litigation, court costs, and attorney's fees for injury to or death
of any person, for damage to any property, or for any breach of contract, arising out of or
in connection with the work done by the Contractor under this Contract, pro,.zded that
any such claim, loss, damage, cause of action, suit or liability is caused in whole or in
part by an act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, or any person,
organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish work
on the Project. This indemnity shall apply regardless of whether such injuries, death,
damages, or breach are caused in part by the negligence or omission of the County, any
other party indemnified hereunder, the Contractor, or a third party.
AD1
14 of 23
9l'd LZLMLL-6L6 SPGP40JV uosJer;ed d l£:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 13 of 19 pages
The indemnification shall include but not be limited to the following specific instances:
a. In the event the County is damaged due to the act, omission, mistake; fault or
default of the Contractor, then the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless
and defend the County for such damage.
b. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless and defend the County from
any claims for payment for goods or services brought by any material suppliers,
mechanics, laborers, or other subcontractors.
C. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless and defend the County from
any an all injuries to or claims to adjacent property owners caused by the
Contractor, its agents, employees and representatives.
d. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to the floor, walls, etc.,
caused by the Contractor's personnel or equipment.
e. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal of all related debris.
f. The Contractor shall also be responsible for subcontractors hired.
g. The Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless, and defend the County from any
liability caused by the Contractor's failure to comply with applicable federal,
state, or local regulations, that touch upon or concern the maintenance of a safe
and protected working environment and the safe use and operation of machinery
and equipment in that working environment, no matter where fault or
responsibility lies.
The indemnification obligations of the Contractor under this section shall riot
extend to include the liability of .any professional engineer, the architect, their
consultants, and agents or employees of any of them arising out of (1) the
preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change
orders, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give
directions or instructions by the professional engineer, the architect, their
consultants, and agents and employees of any of them, provided such giving or
failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage.
10. Release
The Contractor assumes full responsibility for the work to be performed hereunder, and
hereby releases, relinquishes, and discharges the County, its officers, agents, and
employees from all claims, demands, and causes of action of every kind and character,
including the cost of defense thereof, for any injury to or death.of any person (whether
employees of either party or other third parties) and any loss of or damage to any
property (whether property of either of the parties hereto, their employees, or of third
parties) that is caused by or alleged to be caused by, arising out of, or in connection with
the Contractor's work to be performed hereunder. This release shall apply regardless of
whether said claims, demands, and causes of action are covered in whole or in part by
AD1
15 of 23
9l'd LZL0-6LL-6L6 syoe}iyo.iy uosAusd dZ£:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 14 of 19 pages
insurance, and in the event of injury, death, property damage, or loss suffered by the
Contractor, any subcontractor, or any person or organization directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish work on the project, this release shall
apply regardless of whether such injury, death, loss, or damage was caused in whole or in
part by the negligence of the County.
I. BONDING REQUIREMENTS
The County will, prior to signing the contract, require the General Contractor to furnish
bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract. The following bonds may be
required:
a. A satisfactory performance bond is required if the contract price exceeds
$100,000. This Bond shall be issued by a bonding company approved by the
County for the amount of 100% of the total price of the Bid. This must be issued
to the County within ten (10) days of the award of the Contract.
b. A satisfactory payment bond, is required if the contract price exceeds S25,000.
This Bond shall be issued by a bonding company approved by the County for
100% of the total price of the Bid. This bond must be issued to the County within
ten (10) days of the award of the Contract.
c. A bid bond is required in the amount of five percent of the total contract price. A
bid bond must be executed with a surety company authorized to do business with
the state. This bond must be issued to the County within ten (10) days of the
award of the Contract.
J. PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL
1. Proposer shall submit his proposal on the forms enclosed by Brazos County. All
blank spaces in forms shall be correctly filled in by typewriter or manually in ink
and the bidder shall state the prices; written in words and in figures. Where there
is discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures,
the price written in words shall govern.
2. If proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his
duly authorized agent. If the proposal is submitted by a fum, association, or
partnership, the name and address of each member must be given, and proposal
must be signed by an official or duly authorized agent. If the proposal is
submitted by a corporation, the proposal must be signed by an officer or duly
authorized agent, and sealed with the corporate seal. Powers of attorney
authorizing agents or other to sign the proposal must be properly certified and
must be in writing and submitted with the proposal.
K. SPECMCATIONS
The work covered by these specifications consist of furnishing all materials,
machinery, equipment superintendence and labor necessary to construct the
facility listed below to be handicapped accessible.
JP & Constable Complex, Pct 3
AD1
16 of 23
L l'd LZLO-61-L-6L6 SioeNON uosJeged dZ6:L0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 15 of 19 pages
100 Anderson
College Station, Texas 77840
2. Upon request by Patterson Architects, the selected Proposer shall, within seven
days thereafter, submit the following:
a. A statement of cost for each major item or work included in the bid
b. A designation of work to be performed by the bidder with his own forces.
A list of names of the Subcontractors or other persons or organizations
(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a
special design) proposed for such portions of the work as may be
designated, the names of documents or, if no portions are so designated,
the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the
work, The Proposer will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the
Architect and Brazos County, the reliability and responsibility of the
proposed Subcontractors to furnish and perform the work described in the
Sections of the Specifications pertaining to such proposed Subcontractors'
respective trades. Prior to the award of the Contract, Patterson Architects
will notify the Proposer in writing if either Brazos County or Patterson
Architects, after due investigation, has reasonable and substantial
objection to any person or organization on such lists. if Brazos County or
Patterson Architects has a reasonable and substantial objection to any
person or organization on such list, and refuses in writing to accept such
person or organization, the Proposer may, at his option, withdraw his bid
without forfeiture of bid security, notwithstanding anything to the contrary
contained in this section. If the Proposer submits an acceptable substitute
with an increase in his bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned
by such substitution, Brazos County may, or may not accept the increased
bid price or may disqualify the Proposer .Subcontractors and other persons
and organizations proposed by the Proposer and accepted by Brazos
County and Patterson Architects must be used on the work for which they
were proposed and accepted and shall not be changed except with the
written approval of Brazos County and Patterson Architects.
The Proposer shall state in the space provided on the Request for Proposal, the
time required for the completion of the entire work. The time for completion
stated by Proposer will be one of the conditions determining award of contract.
4. The contract will call for a completion date based on the number of calendar days
quoted by the successful Proposer and liquidated damages will be charged against
the Contractor at the rate of $300.00 per day for each calendar day beyond the
contract completion date.
If there is an extended unforeseen delay, over which the Contractor has no
control, such as severe or unseasonable weather, it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to request any extension in time within one week after the delay
occurs; and his failure to make such request within the above time Iimit shall void
ADZ
17 of 23
8l'd LZLQ-6LL-6L6 SPell40JV uosJeAed dWL0 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 16 of 19 pages
any possible extension of the Contract time of completion. Patterson Architects
will be the judge as to whether a time extension is to be granted and so notify the
Contractor. No credit will be allowed for partial days lost.
6. The failure of the Proposer to execute the required bonds or to sign the required
Contract within ten (10) days after the Contract is awarded, shall be considered by
Brazos County as abandonment of his proposal, and may annul the award. By
reason of the uncertainty of the market prices of materials and labor, and the
impracticality and difficulty of determining accurately the amount of damages
accruing to Brazos County by reason of said Proposer's failure to execute said
Bonds and Contract within ten days, the proposal guaranty accompanying the
proposal shall be the agreed amount of damages which Brazos County will suffer
by reason of such failure to execute the Contract. The filing of a proposal will be
considered as an acceptance of this provision.
L. EVALUATION FACTORS
After receipt of proposals, Brazos County will use the following criteria in the selection
process:
20 POINTS — Proposed Contract amount
10 POINTS — Ability to Perform Contract
15 POINTS — On -time Completion
15 POINTS — Proposer's Reputation
15 POINTS — Quality of Previous Contracts and experience
15 POINTS — Sufficiency of financial resources, bonding and insurance
15 POINTS — Future Maintenance Repair parts and service
&L GENERAL CONDITIONS
Having examined Drawings and Specifications, including acknowledged Addenda,
prepared by Patterson Architects and their Consultants, and having visited the site and
examined the conditions affecting work, the undersigned proposed to furnish labor,
material and ser%ices called for by said documents and as otherwise required to
complete construction of the Justice of the Peace, Pct. 3 Office Complex and Courtroom,
and Constable, Pct. 3 Office Complex. -This property is located at I00 Anderson,
College Station, TX 77840.
N. BASE PROPOSAL
The amount for the complete construction of the Brazos County Justice of the Peace and
Constable Office Complex and J. P. Courtroom. 100 Anderson, College Station, Texas,
including all site, general plumbing, mechanical, electrical, landscaping, and utility
construction work indicated on the Drawings and Specifications.
The sum of
AD1
18 of 23
6l'd LZLO-6LL-6L6 spe;iywy uosJeUsd d£UO 90 ZZ ^oN
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
ALTERNATE BIDS
Alternate No. I Permanent Project Sign
Add to the bas bid the sum of
Alternate No. 2 Limestone
Add to the base bid the sum
Alternate No. 3 Shingles
Deduct from the base bid the sum of
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 17 of 19 pages
Dollars $
Dollars$
Dollard
Dollars$
SUBCONTRACTORS
The undersigned proposes to use the following listed subcontractors for the work:
Roofing
Plumbing
HVAC
Electrical
CONTRACT TIME
The undersigned agrees to SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION on all work within
by specifications. consecutive calendar days subject to such extensions of time allowed
ALLOWANCES
The undersigned acknowledges that all cash allowances identified in Section 01020 and any
Addenda are included in the Base Proposal amount
AD1
19 of 23
OZ,d LZLO-6LL-6L6 sire)'4wV uosieUsd d££:LO 90 ZZ ^ON
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
BUILDING PERMITS
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 18 of 19 pages
Proposers Name
It is understood that the undersigned will acquire and pay all building permit fees, city inspection
fees (if required) for this project and such fees are included in proposal amount.
Proposers Name
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda issued during the time of
proposing and includes the several changes therein in this Proposal.
IM
Dated
ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
No. No
Dated,
Dated
The undersigned Proposer further agrees to the following conditions:
I. An incomplete Proposal or one having additional information or other modifications
or qualifications inscribed thereon, may be cause for rejection of the entire Proposal.
2. That, if accepted by Brazos County, this Proposal becomes a part to the Contract
Documents upon the signing of the Contract Agreement, and failing to comply with
any part of this Proposal will be taken as failure of the Proposer to comply with the
Contract Document, and will be just cause for rejection of the work
3. That Brazos County reserves the right to reject any or all proposals and waive any or
all informalities and irregularities or to accept any proposal considered advantageous
to him.
4. If your Proposal is awarded for this job, all required insurance forms must be
presented to Brazos County before the contract is signed.
AD1
20 of 23
LZ'd LZLO-6LL-6L6
SMV40JV uosJe4ed d££:LO 90 ZZ ^oN
3
Proposal Continuation Sheet
BRAZOS COUNTY, TEXAS
O. CERTIFICATION OF PROPOSAL
Proposal Request No. 2006-009
Page 19 of 19 pages
The undersigned affirms that they are duly authorized to execute this contract, that this proposal
has not been prepared in collusion with any other Contractor, and that the contents of this
proposal have not been communicated to any other Contractor prior to the official opening of
this proposal.
Signed By:
Title:
Typed Name:
Company Name: Phone No.
Mailing Address:
P. O. Box or Street City State
Employer Identification Number:
Social Security Number:
CORPORATE SEAL IF SUBMITTED BY A CORPORATION
END OF REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL NO. 2006-009
ADl
21 of 23
Zip
ZZ'd LZLO-6LL-6L6
sPetiyay u09J84ed d£CIO 90 ZZ AoN
Ivov zz ua ui;,ssp Hatterson Architects 979-779-0727 p•23
EZ JW
Jo 00"I a dgau•ag AM'yAM as P-P-OW -P1K egl ROW Ales Aga �lJlaJed sg/�Aw+poo R wee eeeNn swodalg IR JaJ aypsl sal Alelq W pl•� Apy e N e•le Jim w Irga�
�•1e119• AJg N ua4s/a1w a P•alRse ag IrgS ParJOa s4 4 A7gy w NIP •II NOLLY'J313Q 1r6nJe($sy at
p1yJIDrgN!r4AledrVNW-WWS1w@W_V S,N•egPe4eeupNs+Mrda Mfu�oddre41P�ua+Dgall•paas1rsPW�APewUKPl+ayelltea
a4uesulellurgeredo!a,gelaeeup4W"PLOW agP'na'wiplminrlwpPWMX"MOO alP41Pu'AWnWVasluv J4A{aVAuJgRrap•,1u,"ARJguoe911Nr'ruYJgPaes:gP;sp
lupAdowtIgaaeNpJepugatpnRe'Ae1JRRVowAgegePAya'agPPQq•ai441aARIaJO<7•JPuswMJe4eAsReRAaRPM1fiAwalu!eurpyeaa/eseuq'wrppy'eyNrMswP
I!b '•lbid pus 1•eerA�dl N 14UIM tll - �e t;gpee VM J_* Ina" lull 'AWft_ 'IUaR 's q JIelta 'R� 'ael3 WAW ' j, ,, AAl11rJ A ,uu Aee a �L
R am rR w rRr6 RIM 8114110 Wau.AOSP pRl tea p saPin wplwe Rj11dP Pa 'seoergagep RP•JPI.! Jaye o 1Me4R'+uFN'PKJ N spa ueew g•JR tuegl RloM A n eJrjo ,m 4 j u•a all
4s aueoano a 44"N- q JelaaleUO IPR AUsd qm pia 'crud Akmg w Jq 1'Iq Wglsad rJ4gu, so *30 '"*v eNN — IR q&AWJ u.
AgPPaUt "oos1u=elv'apoa4Jas I APrdalsPWRlsq•a4pan todnppJraegJo1�+a4N:aruaw l p ea',` Nw � I_ �K , q+ sg P•a ao IeY JJAl/.legr ARM yma uy liaaaa�y re• Japan suoggalga tl ro AJIe a Pr• ul Jc Ajppr JJlglell PaaWaJ JN IAR gaJrg ANd Jager 'rnrlrygaaad N arrau 4ll • 9�1311eg 3:1gi '9L
R N uaaaa;,rrl P aAv.J IP•S 'a41�•Ile sal+raNuogeuRW 4T• W!IJ• undo alel ryl Pae paleJgsuaJ sl.rpo rls J410 guar P---VA qJg &" PAW •4liMloeda.uryeeu+al P GPN. e p �1e5� 4r q
A-WamAgPopp agpip -p-MW_10_4_LLal-W4XJf&kIFA eP4afroasA0WunapWt4Po1_gMrqAwriaoasyreMelksrpaov.+iopM=II-AOIIVNN1U31 'Lt
6*4 AIL JaAng L-3." So paws, AW Am jo nal w IOU pus J>t ugype w � lwlslaaJJp p Nl!J �$ 'w W A4 p Slur t�WC* IOU "Melba JO 71, U
buap' ' j°�'4 SIIIJr1 p Aug Sa4aw9 J41 PS y jague s41 P uogad X-Pp'r an to lied Aug A p ITJ' M Jai Nara 01 IOU ap avtq rP �S NpLLYn3DNYj� g
tJ.a411641413eOR WO aq kBAPP P SMd 4tP PXkul q l46P a41 ass4 P42 j" - NDU03dSNl d0 .LON 'S 1
Aug ua,J SM111501 uaps p am.- 1e6q Aug to AWoO SMWB pu•1•P al sssJ6s AIRS 'SNI6J aJayl lWan" al•• awl q glgplldd• sW6PAdm A `Aarr�l 'xuaN10 6uySaa q a+opgo s
q P• NP• aJJ•4 uodn p19 SaJ4 uo lssua Aew 4aY+ sla?u{dyJ plot quolsd IRCI dds P W �l-3reSNWM NIVJV IEW9 AS AAlMRI>:VA1 OM put
1uaJa ay1 Naagubn ',AIMS •11 A lusurasldaJ Jo uopsJJoo Sys R aq fK AaAI� Ag apgw u,opsJJdo'augl oR>rud•ga, a r141r valpauas alsudoJfds ayl JU o f Qq ,gp'a 041
4)an o'O aA iepuo XWI P PAU4•td J P plgold ,d wnpl Asa' Jaklg t pJeptgp teiSD a wxkF m lou =P P"W sill lens• :4l ul *OL61 P PV tq*H pu+e
•O'S71 JA4l A9 P•RIMJsIad spJsPlJsl' WI al uuavoo saP Jafng q PPS p'WW sup 1g41 gusuau AIRS- ALNVLWVM A13jVS 'U
d •AI!aS Aq Paz AWA S11 lFJJM• as 'suc!*—P Put s6ysueJp seolRlolldsds sin usaslaq l*Woo a la
A1NS �I•A•�8 N P waplo wA la QFPP (k PLgA' ap q pus . IP49 t PA 1 i ul ile A ar pm 184 j jan 's6u!nleq 'stJopenl�osds aJ q Win
INs PJJg 3LL �6 a41 l•41 sNnrJJu M Iq•P!a Pe+Woo sy1 AP'+� Ilals atop q ldwne Aue Pu•'ap�eJJeM pa4AJJl AM aprlpea Jo Ewl IOU P4S ni•S S3uNVlJlAYN110nC108d 'ZL
AFWI a•1 wJJ6wsJao Jo a6uuxpsq 6gpaoAsd'uoRsauwao Wns P Muwwe Pl aR ••I asisua po Jo mud lae,luop a1P ugyj 3snPID q Due
PJ• {7gJm S'41 pxJaa q %4Eu Ja NOR nt#o Aug q URIPP• 410J IJIP •w4 PW •QkM GM Aimma �41 P udlPpN A tpnJq joj •t04=Jq 6uuraas to
•41 xt W PS 14 Ag Pau!114ew =PAk &qln to lopawuwa pa43WWO 909 suog p saskidwe ay µoluryoo J01GR s
oes L u m 14 52PMMPUD A ivawmjft us uodn pequoa 941 auras A IP!P• of P•uJ!•Nr JO paAgdlss �Aaq sell AsusAt °mad
640" Jo uosgd Ou U LI S1WIWA J:INS •41 q
1 ACAS q All!q•!I Dw4N1 puluod siyl NdUg7 Aeu, AAnq avlewalls BJ4 w A 's.'B410 Aq sJSPAO Iw sassd luaus s �suad'01fW a CAIISS A 4d••Jq
a41 'ARJrJ,eJK alp ssupueap AIP�S i ass sup ul •aselpad p'Poupau Pug guOW o ER Jd Jgws ,spun sagmb sue RS alll q 'INM , nq P4s sung+ •41 p sasud
Poi n p Simpo+d Joj slab Aq wq w uO alolJd I AJ= S,"03 W41 n Jel. x* MR)MOR sen AQ PaJaAao JroI1J�J(aads DJ+e
M au aq q'IIgJJeM J•IaS 4?uW Dq sAPS u! P'PJMW- WA sq pIP J0kQ 24114 Pled ac q scud a41 e
3OWd AIM kIVAA 'I I
aq p4S ? gsal lugea •41 q Pug A""P APadaJd acl auwsaq 9946 ga,aq PQRW S►aeis ssaooJd Aus pug IUM10sbe JPJn Be Jr1•S Jai Aq papusp
Joj JalaS AQ Damb•J Jo pq?Jgq 1uauJdlnba 1Sa1 I:oads Ja Bupq NrJlds Aut p 1su� e41 saprg=41�n4 ma •41 uo paNr>E a7cd aq 1N3rldl isJ L Y &M lVIa3rS Ol
u JairS Aq P-1 lsoo xs P lumwn sy PI�IU•►Jo JOAO= dl •salpaaAJ pug' A410 Aw O: I.oQ9Pe w' s a e saprga6 u 7fl' 6ulpunaJd
PrJ,tub paquooa A� � a� q xJsdsa, 41a suals4uuaNp Aw p BuPRw a<A :o •puage n 6 glee a41 W padp�i y ansxW AAn9 A4 P•RaAd s
ca i P a:AopuA w Ao" Aue ol'ja pS a ajo :Ay@U,2q JdaJ JO NA6g Aug A'Ja NnJIQ WA11i .Q6wA4) E4a>17as
lu:uaJelJaNq p uJwl ap u s?gs4p6:W ,ak% Aq PsAuJgW $I U APS q AllIP lf1Q4U^ IWj11= sap laaup ,alas •41 q sous uslQlw Awe re a41 s3uuuva0 e
16011 J uodn aleal W uildRAXB 1:g Win Ce4T A11mo0 Jall1 '21 S•FS AIO �'A1LL�'alel5 '•SFg3 Ra•P•j aPnPui lOII oD
Nx 00 spue4 luato A# 0l FIDA Put Om PIANwo Rq' J4IXWJ p4s'pwg Jo IlM 'asaW dsrN F aasodi! aa4i Jol sggalM•'P�1 E pps po AM aAm PUB
d'l Boos !qo s,•An8 q
aougls,aJ JW' un So6WJP Aua to P894S=J0 $AWrly sup do" Wto4s Le nS 'A+•"9aP AIR Pa11NWn' am slua 14 a^oq• JNp I.JNn arp •q ids le4s�i �
SJreal ueAJB 's1E al!nS '1••gS 4{9i 1e•3 OW 'osuJ10 sal AlunwJ soze 9 .Ol !•IY t30gJ'q alp q PJAW11e aq Ppo4S al tw ery u•4K 1!J; s N A9d
Pon JoQ''aw aeapJ a4110 Ado* •=1*IM Jo � �'allaSW QLp alOMpu IFIs SOOW *A IJ4IELodasgg pug panwal aq nd 90A!Wul 'applddg ! 'JaquJ,rJ 11JaugWiie puts a41
w sPP 4 Ja1le suasapu sseu oJ1ud Jo Jap o ase4o+rd JAe• uo sae" vPtjgdaa Nlagrs IleW JalaS a
S1N3 UVd OW S3OIOAM .9
Aq PWAB1a aq P4S 0101a41 DbA43 AW o R►u p assWil�tunMd luau calk �10 Swal au .P2"4 ,VAP*W.% V—qo 4 nl poppaJd se uols TPosJ
1 AHAO. Pg1Sua asw , ap P "Ja41 4 4 M RS 114a aq P4a AAyISP p amid •4L - A113An3O j0 30VId '1
,q awpD ail any�s� p�Puyda� um al rN;M APM, 6wwJopwo a am= uap Aew on OM q uaguqul IN to JSAae Alga) ANews>fss Agw
N14 W asnl6qu SweJologAuoo s!41 P Suo!$"ard I 4L� ANpLoo P4S GINS Pwc 4q s AIPSWAGUad
pop s•dP 4o!4Aws cpew104 aa Japuaj g
A T5111 M A Pus Algft',Ca A1,41sruu spool pea p S O, IR4S S!W UM
PM JaPw1 AJa3 -113ON313ALL03j3Q jO 1N31N30V1d3H ON 'S
a NW, In
a41�le mgd :TRI • Pus NI!aoaJ lgui A)w1o0 soteJg q xed 7ou PV'spZ6 a4i P SSM to >fsu put" au l 7�Auoo ?II IA!g6s Daxp Aw0
•sl•0 4 uo w al Jo sl ,Jloup sunJppe au11 >e'udDeugsap l�J'J q weDB u0 au j apslu rq pays !aequoo Isptn "0A P P AAJaAO -1MOd 9W S
'AJIM W p Sluad A mod an in sp•o6 s4l sid@= ApnW laAnB fell JaAne q s:ad 1Ou p4s I WI W SSq jo gr!J Dug sill a4i • SSOI j0 )ISIa Y 37111 'Y
So Aq 9� aj A!!Apads Ja41Wa lemur n� P4 SMJO � e' o � pl, daps p 1pl' maw P4S.1Ln.lduw 060Z A•aA. a1-idwoa 000Z Jeq� low We pu po l9gl= aF
ssG osl 6ulJaplJg 1e011 sDwaa PLO RUDIsAS 'sNAlwduwd IR uql sluw.M Pee 'sgg"W 's:ugfwm APu•A Z
aSauaFo SSalan 6unl pie AN pus ssrue uowwoo p sluauAunbgr 4ws uu%= q Put slam uO.Wpodsueq Isw of aJnsas c1 P94nd AIgvM aQepW lag Sp�S papw+MWx d
Jaueluo0 (a) 'algeogdda B jowm lummiu a oAN10AS"Pug Jaquao assq�so Jai all p Aqurw ag (P) PAg :Ssxoq ► p 1 X3q •6•a 'DWMW o P Jaq WRU FM pug Jaganu
se ps4Jsw APuruusu,ad pug APoap sq IN4s JsueNJW Euudr NS 4303 twps�J PDAL Poo6��aouffF,= aPut P a sp-b eGgaW Imo& mpSS . 900000 30VN Vd 01 V3ras
:srgpj se aalQe:aAng pas JalaS
Svel.'kinnoo S02VLs
ON ISVHOWW.401N3N111Md3O
SNOUION00 CINV SM313SVH3Wd OHVOW.LS
C1
•
•
•
No
•
•
r
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
A New Court Facility for
Brazos County
JP Complex — PCT. 3
100 Anderson Street
College Station, Texas
Brazos County Commissioners
300 E. 26`h Street
Bryan, Texas 77803
PROJECT NUMBER: 2516
PATTERSON * ARCHITECTS
701 South Texas Avenue
Bryan, Texas 77803
979 775-6036
LAND DESIGN GROUP
Landscape Architect
106 E. North Avenue
Bryan, Texas 77801
BRAZOS VALLEY ENGINEERING, INC.
MEP Engineer
3209 Earl Rudder Freeway South, Suite 200
College Station, Texas 77845-6011
PLEDGER KALKOMEY
Utilities
7020 Coyote Run
Bryan, Texas 77808
October 2005
0
r
r
a
•
•
•
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Project No. 2516
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGES
DIVISION 00
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
00010
Advertisement for Bids
00100
Instructions to Bidders
00300
Bid Proposal Forms
00500
Agreement Form
1
00700
General Conditions of Contract (AIA
Doc. A201, preprinted)
1
00800
Supplementary Conditions
11
DIVISION 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
Summary of Work
2
01011
Notification of Architectural Requirements
1
01015
Drawings and Specifications
2
01020
Allowances
3
01050
Job Requirements
3
01080
Building Codes
1
01100
Alternates
1
01300
Submittals
5
01410
Testing Laboratory Services
4
01500
Temporary Facilities
6
01640
Substitutions
2
01700
Project Closeout
4
DIVISION 02
SITEWORK
02010
Subsurface Exploration
4
02100
Site Clearing
3
02110
Demolition
3
02200
Earthwork
9
02219
Structure Excavation
4
02280
Termite Control
4
02520
Site Concrete Work and Paving
10
02600
Site Utilities
7
02810
Underground Irrigation System
6
02900
Landscape Work
5
DIVISION 03
CONCRETE
03100.
Concrete Formwork
5
03200
Reinforcing Steel
4
r
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2516
r
Page 2
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
PAGES
DIVISION 03 (Cont'd)
r
03300
Cast -in -Place Concrete
14
DIVISION 04
MASONRY
04100
Masonry Mortar
3
04150
Masonry Accessories
2
04200
Unit Masonry
6
04430
Stone Masonry
5
DIVISION 05
METALS
05500
Metal Fabrications
7
DIVISION 06
WOOD AND PLASTIC
06100
Rough Carpentry
6
06192
Fabricated Wood Trusses
4
06200
Finish Carpentry & Millwork
11
DIVISION 07
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07150
Damproofing and Waterproofing
5
07200
Thermal Insulation
3
07310
Shingles
5
07420
Composite Building Panels
4
07600
Flashing and Sheet Metal
5
07610
Metal Roofing
8
07900
Sealants
4
DIVISION 08
DOOR AND WINDOWS
08110
Metal Doors and Frames
5
08213
Plastic Faced Doors
4
08410
Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
4
08520
Aluminum Windows
3
08700
Finish Hardware
5
#
08800
Glazing
5
DIVISION 09
FINISHES
09250
Gypsum Wallboard
5
09310
Ceramic Tile
4
09510
Acoustical Ceilings
4
09650
Resilient Flooring
6
i
2516
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 3
PAGES
09680
Carpeting
5
09900
Painting
10
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
.
10100
Markerboards
4
10200
Metal Louvers
2
10400
Identifying Devices and Graphics
3
10522
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and
3
Fire Extinguishers
10800
Toilet accessories
4
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT
(Not Used)
DIVISION 12
FURNISHINGS
12502
Horizontal Blinds
3
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
(Not Used)
DIVISION 14
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
(Not Used)
L7
4)
Is
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL !
15072
VIBRATION ISOLATION .................................
3
15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ............................
1
15082
PIPING INSULATION ....................................
4
15083
PIPING SAFETY COVERS ...............................
2
'
15086
DUCT INSULATION .....................................
3
15145
PLUMBING PIPING .....................................
7
15146
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ................................
4
15415
RESTROOM PLUMBING FIXTURES .........................
3
15430
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT .................................
2
15737
UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS ........... • .. • ....... • • • • • •
3
15765
AIR COILS ............................................
2
15810
DUCTS ..............................................
4
15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES ..................................
3
15835
POWER VENTILATORS .................................
2
15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ...............................
3
15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ....................
4
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING .............................
2
16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ...............................
2
16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
............................
2
16123
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE .............................
3
16131
CONDUIT ............................................
4
16138
BOXES ..............................................
3
16140
WIRING DEVICES .....................................
3
16412
ENCLOSED SWITCHES .................................
2
16426
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS ...............................
2
16443
PANELBOARDS.......................................
2
16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES .................................
3
r
16520
EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES .................................
2
JP Court
e'�� /4/s
Page 1
10/4/2005
110
•
6
SECTION 00500 - AGREEMENT FORM
0 1.01 TYPE
2516
A. The Form of Agreement will be A.I.A. Document A 101 - "Standard Form of
Agreement Between Owner and Contractor", latest edition. Reference copies of the
contract form are available at the office of the Architect.
B. This agreement shall be modified to contain the statement "performable and
enforceable in Brazos County, Texas".
1.02 BOND AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
to A. Performance bond and labor and materials payment bond required. Refer to Article
11 of Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions.
B. Certificates of Insurance required. Refer to Article 11 of Section 00800 -
Supplementary Conditions.
END OF SECTION
i
•
11
•
0
C]
SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
2516
The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition,
will be included in the contract for construction. Where any part of that Document is modified
by the Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of the General Conditions shall
remain in effect. Refer to Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions.
. Copies of AIA Document A201 are available from the architect's office upon request.
Contractor, subcontractors, materials and equipment suppliers shall assume responsibility for
knowledge and conformance to the General Conditions.
r]
tj
13
0
4
END OF SECTION
0
r
SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2516
` The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201,1997 Edition. Where any Article, Paragraph,
Subparagraph or Clause of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these
Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in
effect.
0
1%,
•
•
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1. The drawings and specifications referred to in Subparagraph 1.1.1 and throughout the
General Conditions are further defined as those entitled A New Court Facility for Brazos
County, JP Complex, Precinct 3, College Station, Texas, and include the following:
DRAWINGS
Architectural
Civil
Landscape
Structural
Mechanical
Electrical
Plumbing
SPECIFICATIONS:
General Requirements
Special Requirements
Technical Specifications
A 0.1
- A 0.3
A 1.1
- A 1.2
A 2.1
- A 2.2
A 3.1
A 4.1
- A 4.3
A 5.1
- A 5.3
A 6.1
CI—C2
L1
S1
MEP 1 — MEP 3
MI—M3
El — E5
P1 — P3
Division 00
Division 01
Division 02 thru 16
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2516 •
00800.2
2. Add the following subparagraph:
1.1.8 - DESCRIPTION OF PARTIES
The following definitions apply to parties named in the Contract Documents:
.1 Owner:
.2 Architect:
3 Consulting Engineers:
(Utilities)
Brazos County Commissioners
300 East 261h Street
Bryan, Texas 77803
(979) 361-4353 Phone
(979)361-4347 Fax
Patterson * Architects
701 South Texas Avenue
Bryan, Texas 77803
(979)775-6036 Phone
(979) 779-0727 Fax
Pledger Kalkomey
7020 Coyote Run
Bryan, Texas 77808
(979) 731-8000 Phone
(979) 731-1500 Fax
.4 Consulting Engineers: Brazos Valley Engineering, Inc.
(Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing) 3209 Earl Rudder Freeway South, Suite 200
College Station, TX 77845-6011
(979)693-2835 Phone
(979)693-6946 Fax
.5 Landscape Architect:
3. Add the following subparagraph:
Land Design Group
106 E. North Avenue
Bryan, Texas 77801
(979) 846-2775 Phone
(979) 260-0626 Fax
1.2.4. Extra compensation will not be authorized for work which, though not specifically
detailed or specified, is reasonably inferable and/or obviously necessary to maintain the
quality of construction and finish established by the drawings and specifications. The
Contractor is expected to examine the drawings and specifications carefully before
submitting his proposal and to obtain from the Architect, in writing, any necessary
additional information that might affect his bid.
ARTICLE 2 - OWNER
1. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and insert the following:
r
U
0
C
r�
u
Li
W
2516 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800.3
2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished at no cost, twenty (20) sets of Construction
s Documents as hereinafter specified. These shall include: Drawings, Specifications, and
Addenda. Revised Specifications and Supplementary Drawings issued after the
execution of the Contract will be furnished as necessary for proper performance of the
work up to the number of sets of Documents initially furnished. Additional sets of prints,
if required by the Contractor, shall be paid for by the Contractor.
•
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
•
1. Add the following Subparagraph:
3.3.4 The Contractor shall keep a daily log of all construction activities and progress and
shall submit copies to the Architect with the Contractors Initial Application for Payment
at each monthly progress meeting.
2. Delete 3.6.1 in its entirety and substitute the following Subparagraph:
3.6.1 The Owner is exempt from the Texas Sales Tax on any purchase, lease or rental of
tangible personal property and will issue Certificates of Exemption from the Texas State
Sales Tax on materials furnished by Contractors on County construction projects. The
Suppliers shall obtain Certificates of Resale from the General Contractor in order to
avoid payment of the State Sales Tax on materials incorporated in County construction
Projects. Failure of the Suppliers to obtain Certificates of Resale from the General
Contractor shall make the Suppliers responsible for absorbing the Tax.
3. Add the following Subparagraph:
3.7.5. Accomplishment of building permit or permits, and utility connection permits as
required by state, county, or city laws, ordinances and regulations is the responsibility of
the Contractor. Give all notices necessary in connection herewith. Utility tap fees and/or
connection and permit fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
4. Add the following Subparagraph:
3.7.6. All work shall comply with local and other governing ordinances, codes, and
regulations, but this requirement does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for
complying with specifications if the requirements of the specifications exceed those
governing codes and regulations.
5. Add the following Subparagraph:
3.7.7. No claims for additional payment will be approved for changes required to comply
40 with codes, ordinances and regulation governing building code requirements and
electrical and mechanical services and installations, since it is the Contractor's
responsibility to familiarize himself with such requirements before executing the
contract.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2516
00800.4
6. Delete sub -Subparagraph 3.8.2.3 and insert the following in lieu thereof:
3.8.2.3 Whenever the approved cost is more than the allowance, the excess cost shall be
paid by the Owner or charged to the remaining balance of one or more of the other
allowances. Whenever the approved cost is less than the allowance, other items of
additional subcontractor work may be charged to the allowance at the Owner's option
without further mark-up for overhead and profit. Additional work done by the
Contractor's own forces may receive a reasonable mark-up in accordance with paragraph
7.2 of the Supplementary Conditions. Any balances remaining in allowance at project
completion shall be credited to the Owner by Change Order.
7. Add the following to Subparagraph 3.12.5:
If, in the opinion of the Architect, the Shop Drawings are incomplete, indicate an
inadequate understanding of the work covered by the Shop Drawings, or indicate a lack
of study and review by the General Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect, the
Shop Drawings will be returned, unchecked, to the Contractor for correction of these
deficiencies and subsequent re -submittal.
8. Add the following paragraphs:
3.19 WAGE RATES PREVAILING
3.19.1 No employee used in this construction may be paid less than the minimum wage
rate provided in Article 5159d, Vernon's Civil Statutes, the Texas Minimum Wage Act of
1970.
3.19.2 The following are the rates of pay for some classifications that prevail in the
locality of this project. Contractors shall identify, briefly describe, and request a pre-
determination of rates for crafts (or apprentice programs) not included in the following
Wage Pre -Determination. Such request shall be made within 15 days after contract
award.
C
I
Li
0
40
E
,
Concrete Finisher
12.86
Bricklayer
17.21
Carpenter
13.73
Plasterer
15.25
Waterproofer, Exterior
12.82
Laborer
8.00
Pipefitter
18.80
Plumber
19.73
Sheetmetal Worker
18.55
Electrician
17.75
Painter
12.60
Paperhanger
12.60
Flooring Layer, Resilient.
12.10
Tile & Marble Setter
15.00
u
2516 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800.5
r]
I
10
0
0
Glazier
Carpet Layer
Caulker
Drywall System Installer
Equipment Operator
Lather
Millwright
Sprinkler Fitter
Steelworker, Reinforcing
Steelworker, Structural
Stonemason
Electrician
Roofer
12.60
12.10
12.82
12.60
10.50
15.88
15.26
17.75
12.07
14.60
17.21
17.75
11.53
3.19.3 Multiplier for overtime rate: for over 40 hours per week - multiply the Base
Rate times 1.5.
ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.6 ARBITRATION
Delete this paragraph in its entirety and all references to arbitration in other paragraphs of
the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
1. Add the following to the end of subparagraph 5.1.1:
"...or otherwise furnish labor or materials."
2. Add the following to the end of subparagraph 5.1.2:
"...or otherwise furnish labor or materials."
3. Add the following to 5.2.1.:
Prior to awarding a contract to any Subcontractor the General Contractor shall submit a
list of all Subcontractors proposed for any part of the work in the project, to the
Architect/Owner for his approval.
4. Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 5.2.4:
10
Acceptance of the substitute Subcontractor after previous acceptance of a Subcontractor
for any portion of the work shall not constitute reason for an increase in contract amount.
4)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2516
00800.6
5. Add the following Subparagraph:
5.2.5 The Contractor shall submit the list of proposed Subcontractors and any charges
thereto on AIA Document G805.
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
1. Add the following Subparagraph:
7.2.3 Change Orders will be executed on AIA Document G701, Change Order.
2. Revise Subparagraph 7.3.6 as follows:
7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and
profit" and substitute "an allowance for overhead and profit and in accordance with
Clauses 7.3.10.1 through 7.3.10.6 below".
3. Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10 to 7.3:
7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit
included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule:
1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10 percent
(10%) of the cost.
.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 10 percent
(10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor.
.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that
Subcontractor's or Sub -subcontractor's own forces, 10 percent (10%) of the cost.
.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub -
subcontractors, 10 percent (10%) of the amount due the Sub -subcontractor.
.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance
with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except
those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by .
a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor
and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost
items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change be
approved without such itemization.
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
1. Delete Subparagraph 8.3.1 and substitute the following in lieu thereof:
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the work by any act or
neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by labor disputes, fire,
unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, unanticipated rain days or other
0
to
2516 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800.7
adverse weather conditions, or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by other
causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be
` extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
Extensions of time for delays occasioned by unanticipated rain days or other adverse
weather conditions will be granted on the basis of one regular working day extension for
each regular working day lost. Thus for each five regular working days thus lost, seven
calendar days will be added to the contract time. No increase in the Contract Sum will be
allowed for extensions of time granted for unanticipated rain days or other adverse
weather conditions.
2. Add the following Subparagraph:
8.3.4 Time extensions may be requested for rain days (where rainfall exceeds 0.10 inch
it in 24 hours) only to the extent they are in excess of the number of days listed in the
following table:
Average Number of Anticipated Rain Days(0.10 inch or more) to be Included
in Bid Completion Time
L
January
-5
July - 3
February
- 6
August - 4
March
- 5
September - 6
April
- 6
October - 4
IN May
- 4
November - 5
June
- 5
December - 5
3. Add the following Paragraph:
v 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE WORK ON TIME
8.4.1 The following is a requirement of the Contract and will be included in the
Agreement Between Owner and Contractor under Time of Completion and the blank
spaces will be completed in accordance with the number of calendar days that the
Contractor proposed in his Bid Form.
"The work to be performed under this Contract shall be completed within _ calendar
days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed which shall be the date inserted on
page 1 of the agreement, or by such dates thereafter as may be established in any written
extensions granted under Article 8 of the General Conditions. As a part of the
consideration inducing the Owner to execute this contract, the Owner may deduct from
the final payment made to the Contractor a sum equal to 300.00 per day for each and
every calendar day beyond the agreed date that the Contractor shall require for
Substantial Completion of the work included in this contract. Said sum shall be
considered as liquidated damages only and in no sense shall be considered a penalty, said
M damage being caused by additional compensation to personnel, for loss of interest on
money and other miscellaneous increased costs, all of which are difficult to exact
ascertainment."
Ui
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2516 r
00800.8
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
1. Add the following Subparagraph:
9.2.2 In order to facilitate the review of Applications for Payment, the Schedule of
Values shall be submitted on AIA Document G702 and G703 and shall include the
following:
.1 General Contractor's cost for Contractor's fee, bonds and insurance, mobilization, etc.,
M
shall be listed as individual line items.
.2 Contractor's costs for various construction items shall be detailed. For example,
concrete work shall be sub -divided into footings, grade beams, floor slabs, paving,
etc. These subdivisions shall appear as individual line items.
.3 On major subcontracts, such as mechanical, electrical and plumbing, the schedule
shall indicate line items and amounts in detail (for example; underground, major
equipment, fixtures, installation of fixtures, start up, etc.). A separate line item for
trench safety systems shall be included on both the schedule of values and application
for payment.
.4 Costs for subcontract work shall be listed without any addition of General
Contractor's costs for overhead, profit or supervision.
AID
.5 Where payment for stored materials may be requested prior to installation, material
and labor shall be listed as separate line items.
.6 Where work occurs at more than one building, for the Owner's accounting purposes
and to facilitate the checking of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, costs shall
be scheduled separately for each building on the G703 Continuation Sheet.
2. Add the following Subparagraph:
9.3.4 The Contractor will submit to the Architect for approval three (3) copies of
applications for payment using AIA Documents G702 and G703, Application and V
Certificate for Payment, 1992 Edition. All blanks in the form must be completed and
signature of Contractor and notary public must be original on each form.
3. Add the following Subparagraph:
9.3.5 Partial payments, verified and approved by the Architect, amounting to 95% of the
cost of work completed and material suitably stored at the site as of the last day of each
month will be paid to the Contractor on or about the 21st day of the month following the
period for which payment is requested.
4. Add the following Subparagraph:
L7
9.3.6 Submittal of a request for payment shall constitute an affidavit by the Contractor
that the payment certificate represents the true cost of the work performed and that of all
indebtedness for the previous payment periods have been paid by the Contractor.
A
0
2516 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800.9
5. Add the following Subparagraph:
9.3.7 Upon substantial completion of the work, 95% of the total cost of the work will be
payable to the Contractor. The remaining 5% of the total cost will be payable within 30
days after final acceptance of the project by the Owner, upon presentation to the Owner
of a request for final application for payment, written release from all liens and an
affidavit that all indebtedness incurred as a result of the construction of this project has
been paid by the Contractor, and consent of surety, if any.
6. Add the following at the end of Subparagraph 9.8.1:
In order for the project or a major portion thereof to be considered Substantially
Complete, the following conditions must be met:
1 All inspections by governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the project must
have been finalized, any remedial work required by them must have been completed,
and Certificates of Occupancy and similar governmental approval forms must have
been issued and copies delivered to the Owner and Architect.
.2 All work, both interior and exterior, shall have been completed and cleaned except
minor items which, if completed after occupancy, will not, in the Owner's opinion,
cause interference to the Owner's use of the building or any portion thereof. A
significantly large number of items to be completed or corrected will preclude the
Architect from issuing a Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Owner and
Architect will be the sole judge of what constitutes a significantly large number of
,• items. It is anticipated that the detailed list of items of work to be completed or
corrected at the Date of Substantial Completion will be no longer than one or two
typed pages.
7. Add the following at the end of Subparagraph 9.8.2:
•
Should the Architect determine that the Contractor's list of items to be completed or
corrected lacks sufficient detail or requires extensive supplementation, the list will be
returned to the Contractor for revision and the inspection for determining the Date of
Substantial Completion will be delayed until the list submitted is a reasonable
= representation of the work to be done.
8. Add the following at the end of the Subparagraph 9.8.4:
After the date of Substantial Completion of the Project as evidenced by the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, the Contractor will be allowed a period of 30 days (unless
extended by mutual agreement or provision of the Contract) within which to correct all
deficiencies attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Failure of the
Contractor to complete such corrections within the stipulated time will be reported to the
Contractor's surety. In the report of deficiency, the Contractor and surety will be
informed that, should correction remain incomplete for 15 additional days, the Owner
will initiate action to complete corrective work out of the remaining contract funds in
accordance with Article 14.2. Additional costs of the Owner, Architect, and other
consultants incurred because of the Contractor's failure to complete the correction of
deficiencies within 30 days after the date of Substantial Completion (unless extended by
46
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2516
00800. 10
mutual agreement or provision of the Contract) will be deducted from the funds
remaining to be paid to the Contractor. Should corrective work following Substantial
Completion require more than one reinspection after notification by the contractor that 10
corrections are complete, the cost of subsequent inspections shall also be deducted from
funds remaining unpaid to the Contractor.
9. Add the following at the end of Subparagraph 9.10.2:
Prior to final payment and in addition to other final close-out items specified, the
Contractor shall submit in duplicate to the Architect the following completed forms:
.l Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706.
.2 Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A (with Contractor's,
Subcontractor's, and Supplier's separate releases).
.3 Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707.
Also specified elsewhere are the following items required prior to final payment:
.1 General Contractor's warranty.
.2 Subcontractor's warranties.
.3 Maintenance and instruction manuals.
.4 Record drawings.
.5 Final list of Subcontractors (AIA Document G805).
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
1. Delete all of Article 11, as written, and substitute insurance requirements in item "D.
Insurance" included in the Request for Proposal Packet.
ARTICLE 14 — TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
1. Delete Subparagraph 14.1.2 and 14.1.3.
2. Delete paragraph 14.2 entirely
ADD THE FOLLOWING NEW ARTICLES
ARTICLE 15 - ACCESS TO THE WORK
15.1 Access to the work.
15.1.1 The Architect, the Owner, and their authorized representative shall have access at
all times to the work for inspection wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the
Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection.
C7m
is
to
4
2516 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800. 11
ARTICLE 16 - STANDARDS
A 16.1 Standards
16.1.1 Any material specified by reference number, symbol or title of a specific standard,
such as a Commercial Standard, a Federal Specification, a trade association standard, or
other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof
and any amendment or supplement thereto in effect on the date of these Specifications,
except to type, class or grade, or modified in such reference.
16.1.2 It is not the intent of these Specifications to limit materials to the product of any
particular manufacturer. Where definite materials, equipment and/or fixtures have been
specified by name, manufacturer or catalog number, it has been done to set a definite
standard and a reference for comparison of quality, application, physical conformity, and
other characteristics. It is not the intention to discriminate against or prevent any dealer,
jobber, or manufacturer from furnishing materials, equipment, and/or fixtures that, in the
judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, meet or exceed the characteristics of the
specified items. Substitution of materials shall not be made without prior written
approval from the Architect. Refer to Section 0 1640- Substitutions, for conditions
governing substitutions.
END OF SECTION
a
•
0
41
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK 2516
o, PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Project Identification
04 1. Name: A New Court Facility for Brazos County
JP COMPLEX PRECINCT 3
2. Location: 100 Anderson Street, College Station, Texas
3. Architects Project Number: 2516
4. Owner: Brazos County Commissioners
• B. Scope of Work — Contract Documents indicate the work of the contract and related
project considerations which include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Site improvements include modifications of existing walks and paving, new
concrete paving, landscaping and irrigation system.
2. New construction includes: concrete slab system, roof framing, roofing, masonry
! facade and column wraps.
3. The work also includes certain items of equipment including: plumbing, heating -
ventilation -air conditioning; electrical systems; sound and lighting systems.
L
1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Confine construction office, workmen's parking, storage of materials and construction
operations to limits indicated on drawings and required by law, ordinances, permits
and directions of the Owner, do not unreasonably encumber the premises with
materials.
•
B. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure. Assume full
responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. Move
and store products which interfere with operations of Owner or other Contractors.
* C. Enforce and abide by Owner's instructions regarding signs and advertisements.
D. Existing building will be used by the county during the entire construction phase of
the project. Access to the parking areas and the existing building for the Owner and
the public will be maintained at all times. Coordinate all conflicting activities with
the Owner.
,Of
1.03 LINES AND LEVELS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the building lines, levels and areas
49 of work. Contractor shall employ a registered, licensed surveyor who shall establish
and maintain all lines, grades and levels necessary for the proper location and conduct
of the work. Contractor shall compare carefully the levels and grades shown on the
a
SUMMARY OF WORK 2516
01010.2
drawings with existing levels and grades and shall call the Architect's attention to any
and all discrepancies found before proceeding with the work.
1.04 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. After the contract has been awarded and prior to start of work, the Contractor and his
job superintendent, together with the Mechanical and Electrical Sub -Contractors and
their job foremen, will meet with the Architect or his representatives to review the
drawings and specifications and discuss a satisfactory schedule and working method.
This meeting will be held at the job site and at a time convenient for those requested
to attend.
END OF SECTION
4
0
•
0
0
SECTION 01011 - NOTIFICATION OF ARCHITECT REQUIREMENTS 2516
` PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTIFICATIONS
A. In general, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at any time there is need of
clarification or interpretation of the contract documents prior to proceeding with the
affected portions of the work.
B. Specifically, the Contractor shall notify the Architect 48 hours in advance of the
following stages of construction:
1.
Work areas staked out and batter boards set.
2.
Clearing of work areas.
3.
Stripping of top soil.
4.
Placement of each lift of select fill material.
5.
Drilling of footings.
6.
Excavating.
S
7.
Placing of any concrete.
8.
Placing of paving materials.
9.
City or county inspections.
10.
Covering of any underground services.
11.
Completion of roughing -in of plumbing, heating, and electrical work (prior to
concealment).
12.
Laying of masonry.
13.
Roofing and sheet metal work.
14.
Covering of insulation.
15.
Installation of glazing.
16.
Installation of sealants.
17.
Installation of wood doors.
18.
Installation of millwork.
19.
Installation of carpet and resilient flooring.
20.
Completion of fine grading of site.
21.
Painting and staining (each coat).
22.
Installation of electrical fixtures.
23.
Installation of any equipment specified in Division 11.
24.
Installation of any furnishing specified in Division 12.
25.
Installation of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.
26.
Installation of plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION
46
SECTION 01015 - DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division I Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 SCOPE
0 A. Indications on the drawings or in any section of the specifications or article or
material, operation or method, requires that the Contractor shall provide each item or
service of quality or subject to qualifications noted; and, the Contractor shall perform
each operation prescribed according to conditions stated, providing therefore all
necessary labor, equipment and incidentals to complete the work.
•
B. Drawings and specifications do not indicate or describe all the work required to
complete the project. Additional details required for the correct installation of
selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the
Architect.
•
C. Under no circumstances shall bids be submitted or work be performed with
uncertainty. Questions pertaining to work that does not appear to be sufficiently
detailed or explained, or pertaining to the true meaning of any part of the Drawings or
Specifications shall be referred to the Architect for clarifications. After execution of
the contract, no allowances will be made in favor of the Contractor for failing to
check dimensions and methods of construction on the drawings and at the site and
reporting any discrepancies to the Architect.
41 1.03 ORGANIZATION
•
A. The drawings and specifications have been organized by the use of cross references.
Where references are shown on either the drawings or these specifications, they shall
not be construed as complete. Also, the specifications are organized in sections as
indicated, but such separations shall not be considered as the limits of the work
required of any separate trade. The terms and conditions of such limitations are
wholly between the Contractor and his Subcontractors.
1.04 WORDING OF SPECIFICATIONS
A. In order to emphasize the technical provisions and to obtain brevity, the phrases "The
Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials, etc.", have at times been omitted from
these specifications. Where the word "provide" appears, interpret it to mean "furnish
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 2516
01015.2
all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a completed installation". Where
"you" is inferred, as for example, "set in place this item", the inferred "you" means
"the Contractor (or Subcontractor) shall". A
B. All references to standard specifications or manufacturer's installation specifications
or recommendations shall mean the latest edition or revision thereof. The words
"approved", or "as approved", "for approval", "in an approved manner",
"satisfactory", and like words and phrases shall be interpreted to mean the Architect's
approval in writing.
1.05 CORRELATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Generally, the drawings indicate dimensions, positions, and kinds of materials and
methods of construction while the Specifications indicate quality and application of
materials. Work indicated on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications,
or vice versa, shall be furnished as though fully set forth in both. Work not
particularly detailed, marked or specified shall be the same as similar work that is
detailed marked or specified; refer Article 1.2 of the General Conditions.
1.06 ERRORS
A. Should an error appear in the Drawings or Specifications,or in the work done by
others affecting this work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at once and the
Architect will issue instructions as to procedure. If the Contractor proceeds with the
work so affected without instructions from the Architect, he (the Contractor) shall
make good any resulting damage or defects. This includes typographical errors in the
specifications and notational errors in the Drawings where doubtful of interpretation.
1.07 CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor is fully obligated to the Owner for all work performed by
Subcontractors and also for the validity and performance by Subcontractors and also
for the validity and performance of each guarantee and each warranty required by
these specifications.
1.08 WORK PERFORMED BY OTHERS
A. The General Contractor is responsible for coordination of all work performed by
others in connection with this project.
END OF SECTION
of
•
1
SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES
0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
0 A. Include in Contract Sum, Allowances to be used in bidding and for construction.
B. Designate in Progress Schedule required delivery dates for products supplied under
allowances.
C. Designate in Schedule of Values required quantities of materials supplied under unit
cost allowances.
D. Coordinate allowance work with related work so that all work is properly integrated
and interfaced.
E. Subsequent to contract award, submit separate proposals for allowance work as
directed by Architect. Indicate quantities, unit costs, total purchase amounts, delivery
charges and trades discounts. Furnish detailed breakdown of quantity takeoff and
invoices to the Architect.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00700 - General Conditions, Paragraph 3.8, Allowances.
B. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions
C. Specification Sections listed.
10 1.04 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. These allowances shall be neat cash allowances and will carry no compensation or
other percentages for the General Contractor. The Contractor shall in his proposal
include such sums for expenses and profit as he deems advisable, thus leaving the full
or allowance amounts for the purpose for which they are stated.
B. Expenditure of cash allowance funds shall be only upon the written order of the
Architect and/or owner and expenditures shall be kept within the amounts set forth,
ALLOWANCES 2516
01020.2
unless, specifically authorized otherwise. Invoices will be required to verify the cost
of allowance items.
C. Upon the Contractor's request, the Architect will furnish such instructions as are
necessary to secure proposals from qualified suppliers or subcontractors for each
allowance item of work.
1.05 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. Architect's responsibilities:
1. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products and suppliers or installers.
2. Make selection in consultation with Owner. Obtain Owner's decision,
designating:
a. Product, model and finish.
b. Accessories and attachments.
c. Supplier and installer.
d. Cost to Contractor, delivered to site or installed as applicable.
e. Manufacturer's warranties.
3. Transmit Owner's decision to Contractor.
4. Prepare Change Orders.
B. Contractor's responsibilities:
1. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified suppliers and installers.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect.
3. Notify Architect promptly of:
a. Contractor's reasonable objection to supplier or installer considered.
b. Anticipated adverse effect on construction schedule by selections under
consideration.
•
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES FOR PURCHASE AND INSTALLATION
A. On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier or
installer.
B. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and samples required.
C. Make arrangements for delivery.
D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage and defects and submit claims «
for damage.
E. Unload, store and protect products at site.
F. Install products in compliance with requirements of referenced specifications 10
sections, product manufacturer's current published installation instructions and
approved shop drawings.
2516 ALLOWANCES
01020.3
G. Deliver to Owner or dispose of excess materials as directed by Architect.
1.07 PRODUCT ALLOWANCES
A. The following allowances do NOT include installation cost. They are for the
purchase of goods or services indicated.
B. Allow sums listed for purchase of:
1. Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services.
Allow a sum of $4,000.00 for the testing of materials for entire project.
2. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities
Allow a sum of $800.00 for one (1) job sign.
3. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
Allow the sum of $340.00 per thousand for purchase and delivery, f.o.b. jobsite,
for modular Face Brick. Brick shall be selected by the Architect.
4. Section 09680 — Carpet
Allow a sum of $26.00 per square yeard for the purchase and delivery, f.o.b.
jobsite, of carpet for the project.
1.08 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE
at A. Allow sum of $10,000.00 for contingency allowance to be used as directed by
Architect.
B. Charges to this contingency allowance will be made only by Change Orders which
will not include any amounts for Contractor's overhead and profit. Include in base
proposal overhead and profit to cover work accomplished under contingency
allowance.
1.10 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS
A. Should net cost to Contractor be more or less than allowances, Contract Sum will be
adjusted by Change Order at project closeout.
B. For products supplied under unit cost allowance, unit cost shall apply to quantities
i actually used with nominal allowance for waste. Contractor is responsible for all
quantities.
C. Submit claims for any anticipated additional costs or expenses caused by selection
under allowance, prior to execution of work. Failure to submit claims constitutes
waiver of claim for additional costs.
it
END OF SECTION
01
10
SECTION 01050 - JOB REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
A and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
# A. Survey of Existing Conditions
B. Manufactured Articles
C. Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical Systems
i
D. Project Layout
E. Utilities
s F. Debris Removal
G. Work by Subcontractors
H. Housekeeping
I. Measurements
1.03 SURVEY OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
' A. Contractor acknowledges by submitting a Proposal, that he has visited and inspected
the Project Site and building area in which the Work is to be performed, that he has
satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, including any
obstructions, amount of work, actual levels, the equipment and facilities needed
preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, and all other matters which
can in any way affect the Work or the cost thereof under this Contract.
B. Contractor shall locate drainage or sewer lines, water, gas and other utility and
electrical service lines, piping and conduits in the way of new work. He shall see that
services that are to be removed have been capped or plugged and made gas and water
41 tight in conformance with applicable requirements of governing authorities and utility
firms.
4
JOB REQUIREMENTS 2516
01050.2
C. Failure by Contractor to have acquainted himself with available information
concerning Site conditions, including factors affecting costs and liabilities, shall not
relieve Contractor of responsibility for performance of Work in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents, and for amount of consideration named or
otherwise determined.
1.04 MANUFACTURED ARTICLES
A. All manufactured articles, materials, appliances and equipment shall be applied,
installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, conditioned and placed in operation as
directed by respective manufacturers insofar as these directions are not in conflict
with superior requirements of applicable laws and building codes. Provide
accessories and incidentals recommended by the manufacturer for proper installation.
1.05 MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Extent and general arrangements are shown on the contract drawings. Equipment and i
materials specified is essentially the standard product of listed manufacturers.
Equipment, which will not fit into space limitations shown on the drawings, will not
be acceptable.
a
1.06 PROJECT LAYOUT
A. The Contractor shall lay out all partitions so that the work of the various trades will
be closely coordinated and will fit together properly.
to
J
1.07 UTILITIES
A. Shut down of existing utilities and services, and closing of streets shall be scheduled
with the Owner and/or proper authorities and shall be of least possible duration. it
B. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, or unless otherwise directed by Owner;
water, gas, lighting, power, data and telephone conduits and wires, sewer lines, and
other surface and sub -surface structures and lines shall be maintained by Contractor
and shall not be disturbed, disconnected or damaged by him during progress of Work. A
C. When concealed utilities or services, which are not shown on the Drawings, are
encountered during construction operations, the Contractor shall trace the services
and determine which are active and which are abandoned. Abandoned lines shall be
removed and piping shall be capped or plugged as required. Active lines shall be
relocated as required. The Contractor shall submit a sketch indicating the proposed
relocations of such active lines. Materials to be used shall be those specified in the
applicable Sections where possible and shall match the existing installations where
suitable materials are not specified. The Contractor will be responsible for removing
2516 JOB REQUIREMENTS
01050.3
abandoned lines and relocating active lines, which interfere with new work. Changes
required in work due to discovery of unknown underground utilities or obstructions
will be compensated for in accordance with Provisions of Article 7 of the "General
Conditions."
1.08 DEBRIS REMOVAL
to A. Trash shall not be burned on the property. Flammable debris shall be removed from
the building daily. Debris, trash and waste materials shall be removed from the
property and be disposed at Contractor's expense. Keep the streets free from
materials dropped from trucks.
B. All materials removed from the site must be taken to a Texas Department of Health
Permitted Solid Waste Facility.
C. Storage of salvaged materials or stockpiling of waste and debris at the site will not be
permitted; such materials shall be removed at reasonable intervals during the week
i and in no case shall remain on site over a weekend.
1.09 WORK BY SUBCONTRACTORS
!. A. Protect all preceding work from damage and make repairs or replacements to any
damage caused either directly or indirectly by them. Protect own work against
normal construction risks.
a 1.10 HOUSEKEEPING
41
A. Keep site of operations free from accumulation of rubbish and waste materials at all
times and in accordance with Articles 3.15, Cleaning Up, and 6.3, Owner's Right to
Clean Up, of the General Conditions.
1.11 MEASUREMENTS
A. Before doing work or ordering any materials, the Contractor shall verify all
measurements of any existing and new work and shall be responsible for their
correctness. Any differences, which may be found, shall be submitted to the
Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall be
responsible for differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated
on the drawings and no extra compensation will be allowed for such differences.
r END OF SECTION
L1
SECTION 01080 - BUILDING CODES
# PART I - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 SCOPE
A. All construction hereinafter shown and/or specified shall comply and be in accord
with all local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction, and comply with the
International Building Code as enforced by local codes and ordinances of College
Station, Texas.
B. Work shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped Accessibility
Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes
and with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
i 1.03 COOPERATION WITH BUILDING OFFICIALS
A. Cooperate with applicable governmental officials and inspectors at all times. If such
official or inspector deems special inspection necessary, provide assistance and
facilities that will expedite his inspection.
r
1.04 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED ON SITE
A. The general contractor shall provide a current copy of the Handicapped Accessibility
Act of Texas as identified in Article 7, Article 601 b, Vernon's Texas Civil Statutes in
the Field Office at all times, as well as the local building codes and ordinances.
1.05 CONFLICTS
A. Where a conflict exists between standards, specifications, codes, ordinances and
drawings, the most stringent requirements shall apply.
END OF SECTION
L
•
SECTION 01100 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
` and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
a
P?
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This Section identifies each Alternate by number, and describes the basic changes to
be incorporated into the work, ONLY when that Alternate is made a part of the work
by specific provisions in the Owner -Contractor Agreement.
B. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to
properly integrate the work under each Alternate, and to provide the complete
construction required by Contract Documents.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Bidding documents - Method of quotation of the cost of each Alternate, and the basis
of the Owner's acceptance of Alternates.
B. Owner -Contractor Agreement. Incorporation of Alternates into the work.
C. Sections of Specifications - Requirements for products and methods to achieve the
work stipulated under each Alternate.
1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1 — Permanent Project Sign
State amount to be added to base bid for removing the existing project sign and
constructing the new sign and landscaping as indicated on the drawings.
r B. Alternate No. 2 - Stone Veneer
State amount to be added/deducted to the base bid for furnishing and installing a
stone veneer in lieu of brick veneer.
C. Alternate No. 3 - Shingles
State amount to be deducted from the base bid for furnishing and installing
composition shingles in liew of the metal roof.
END OF SECTION
U
i
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
S 1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
•
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A.
Procedures
B.
Construction Progress Schedules
C.
Schedule of Values
D.
List of Subcontractors
E.
Shop Drawings
F.
Product Data
G.
Samples
H.
Manufacturers' Certificates
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 00700 - AIA Document A201 - General Conditions of the Contract.
B.
Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions
C.
Section 01020 - Allowances
D.
Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Reports
E.
Section 01700 - Closeout Submittals
it
SUBMITTALS 2516
01300.2
1.04 PROCEDURES
A. Deliver or transmit submittals to the Architect at 701 South Texas Avenue, Bryan, 41
Texas, 77803.
B. Transmit each item under AIA Form G810 (Transmittal letter) or other form as
approved. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor, major supplier; identify
pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number and Specification section number, as a
appropriate. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. Provide space for
Contractor and Architect review stamps.
C. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to work progress. Coordinate
submittals of related items. The Contractor shall submit drawings, data and samples
to the Architect at least 30 days prior to the date the Contractor needs the reviewed
submittals returned. Where colors are to be selected by the Architect, submit all
product color samples in adequate time to allow the Architect to prepare a complete
selection schedule. In general all submittals requiring color selection shall be
submitted to the Architect within two weeks of the date of the contract for
construction. a
D. The Contractor shall submit the number of copies of each submittal as outlined
below.
E. The Contractor shall review all submittals, make appropriate corrections, and place
his review stamp on each copy prior to submitting to the Architect. Submittals which
have not been reviewed as outlined above, will be returned to the Contractor (refer to
Supplementary Conditions).
F. After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identifying
changes made since previous submittal.
G. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to appropriate trades and concerned persons.
Instruct recipients to promptly review and report ability to comply with provisions.
1.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation,
identifying first work day of each week or submit network analysis system using the t
critical path method, generally as outlined in Associated General Contractors of
America (AGC) publication "The Use of CPM in Construction - A Manual for
General Contractors".
B. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate
stages and other logically grouped activities. Show projected percentage of
competition for each item of Work at the time of each progress Application for
Payment.
191
2516 SUBMITTALS
01300.3
C. Show submittal dates required for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, and
Product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and those under
• Allowances.
1.06 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit schedule of values in duplicate within 15 days after award of Contract. After
review by Architect revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedules with
each Application for Payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal.
B. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703. Contractor's standard form or media -
driven printout will be considered on request.
C. Format: Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a guideline. Identify
each line item with number and title of the major Specification sections. Additionally
a breakdown of HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical work will be required, indicating the
value of the major labor and material equipment portions of the work in form as
directed by Architect to facilitate approval of requests for payments. Include a
separate pay item for trench safety systems and storm water pollution plan.
D. Revise schedule to list change orders as separate line items, for each application for
of payment.
E. Include in each line item a directly proportioned amount of contractor's overhead and
profit. Allowances, Project Supervision, bonds and insurance will be listed as
separate line items.
1.07 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Prior to awarding a contract to any Subcontractor, the General Contractor shall
submit a list of all Subcontractors proposed for any part of the work in the project, to
the Architect/Owner for their review and approval.
B. Acceptance of a substitute Subcontactor after previous acceptance of a Subcontractor
for any portion of the work shall not constitute reason for an increase in contract
amount.
10
C. The Contractor shall submit the list of proposed Subcontractors and any subsequent
changes thereto, on AIA Document G805. Submit revised list of Subcontractors as
necessary to reflect changes in Subcontractors.
U,
4
SUBMITTALS 2516
01300.4
1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit one high quality reproducible transparency and one opaque print of the shop S
drawing for the Architect plus one additional opaque print for each of the Architect's
consultants involved with the particular section of work. The reproducible
transparency will be marked by the Architects and/or his consultants and returned to
the Contractor for his use, distribution, correction or re -submittal as required. The
marked up prints will be retained by the Architect and his consultants. After review,
the contractor will be responsible for reproducing and distributing in accordance with
requirements in Procedures article, above.
B. The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining all marked -up shop drawings for
the Owner which will be submitted at the conclusion of the project.
1.09 PRODUCT DATA
A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data;
supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information unique to the work.
Include manufacturer's installation instructions as required by the Specification
section.
B. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will
be retained by Architect.
C. Submit product data on all items to be included in the project. Those items listed in
1.10 D. below shall be considered as a guideline for the minimum requirements.
1.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the Product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for
interfacing work.
B. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.
C. Submit minimum of two, one will be retained by Architect. Reviewed samples may
be used in the work if so indicated in the Specification section.
D. The items listed herein are the principal items that will require submittals of
manufacturer's color samples before color selections can be released.
1. Division 4
a. Unit Masonry: Face brick (sample panel at jobsites).
2. Division 6
a. Millwork: Plastic laminate surfacing, exposed wood finishes.
3. Division 7
a. Sheet Metal Roofing: Metal finishes.
•
0
2516 SUBMITTALS
01300.5
b. Building Sealants: Sealant color samples.
4.
Division 8
a. Plastic Faced Doors: Plastic laminate surfacing.
b. Aluminum Storefront Systems: Frame finish samples.
c. Door Hardware: Finish sample of metals.
5.
Division 9
a. Ceramic Tile: Color samples and finishes, glazed and unglazed material.
b. Suspended Acoustical Ceiling: Grid system and ceiling panels.
c. Carpet and Resilient Flooring: Carpet, base, and resilient flooring samples.
d. Painting and Staining: Paint samples and stain samples.
e. Vinyl Wall Coverings: Vinyl samples.
6.
Division 10
`
a. Dry Marker Board, and Miscellaneous Accessories: Color samples.
b. Graphics: Exterior signage (material samples).
7.
Division 12
a. Horizontal Blinds: Blind color samples.
8.
Division 15
a. Air registers and grilles: Finish samples.
9.
Division 16
a. Switches and Receptacles: Cover plates.
b. Speakers: Finish samples.
c. Light Fixtures: Metal Finishes.
10.
Miscellaneous
a. Any other item where a color selection is required or indicated.
1.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
r A. Submit certificates, in duplicate, in accordance with requirements of each
Specification section.
END OF SECTION
•
i
Q
A
i
SECTION 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 2516
d PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
0 A. Testing laboratory services.
B. Testing lab reports.
0 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
'Ej
A. Section 01020 - Allowances
B. Section 01300 - General Requirement for Submittals
C. Section 02200 - Testing Earthwork
D. Section 02219 - Testing Structural Fill
E. Section 02520 - Testing Concrete Paving Work
F. Section 03300 - Testing Concrete Work
` 1.04 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Selection:
1. Owner and Architect will select and Contractor pay for services of any
independent testing laboratory to inspect and test materials and construction for
compliance with Contract Documents and to perform such other specialized
technical services as may be required by Contract Documents.
2. Use of testing laboratory services shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility
to provide materials and construction in strict accordance with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Testing and Inspection Methods:
1. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of
the Drawings and Specifications and if not specified, in accordance with
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 2516
01410.2
applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials and other
recognized authorities.
2. Testing laboratory and lab personnel shall have been and continue to be inspected
on a regular basis by the Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory of the
National Bureau of Standards and shall meet the Basic requirements of ASTM E-
329 "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete
and Steel as used in Construction". A copy of the report of the most recent
inspection shall be submitted to the Architect, Contractor, and Owner upon
request. Report shall include current (within one year) certification of calibration
of equipment used in testing for this project.
C. Test Reports:
1. Laboratory shall furnish reports to Architect, Contractor and such other persons as
Architect may direct covering all of its determinations and all of its control
services. Reports shall show all data customarily listed by the laboratory in
reporting on quantities, qualities, and types of materials together with their
location in the project and applicable Specification Section(s). Form of reports
shall be as approved by Architect.
D. Rejected Materials and/or Workmanship:
1. If, after initial tests have been performed and the results received, any materials
and/or workmanship are rejected, the Contractor shall pay for any subsequent
testing necessary for replacement materials and/or workmanship.
2. All materials and/or workmanship, which have been rejected by reason of failure
to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be removed and
replaced with new, acceptable materials by the Contractor at Contractor's own
expense.
1.05 RESPONSIBILITIES PERTAINING TO TESTING
A. Contractor shall:
1. Pay for testing services required, refer to Section 01020 - Allowances.
2. Make available to laboratory, samples of all materials specified to be tested, in
quantities specified.
3. Assist laboratory as necessary to obtain samples at jobsite.
4. Advise laboratory in advance, as to sources of materials and instruct suppliers of
these materials to cooperate with laboratory, as necessary to achieve inspections.
5. Give notice to laboratory approximately 24 hours in advance of operations
requiring presence of laboratory personnel to allow for completion of initial tests
and assignments of personnel.
6. Review recommended mix design, before beginning concrete operations, and
report to Architect if and where proportions appear to be improper in any respect.
B. Laboratory shall: r
1. Perform tests and inspections as required by Article 1.06 hereinafter.
2. Provide qualified inspection personnel promptly when given proper notice.
Laboratory shall, in advance, acquaint Contractor with a responsible person or
4
2516 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
01410.3
persons within laboratory organization to whom notice is to be given and notify
Architect as to person selected.
r 3. Submit test reports giving observations and results of tests, indicating compliance
or non-compliance with specified standards and with requirements of Contract
Documents.
0 1.06 TESTING SERVICES REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT
A. For Section 02200 - Earthwork and Section 02219 - Structural Fill:
1. Soils Testing
a. Tests on existing subgrade and borrow material - Test for suitability,
` representative samples of existing subgrade, proposed fill and backfill
materials (proctor curve and plasticity index).
b. Provide one optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each type of soil
encountered.
c. Field density test reports - Perform "In -Place" field density and moisture tests
(one test per each 5000 S.F.) for the existing subgrade and each lift to assure
that specified compaction requirements are maintained throughout placement
and compacting operations.
d. Contractor shall pay for (not from allowance amount) additional compaction
testing in the event of failed tests during the earthwork and fill activities.
B. For Section 02520 - Site Concrete Work and Paving and Section 03300 - Cast -In -
Place Concrete (Refer International Building Code, Table 1704.4, "Required
Verification and Inspection of Concrete Construction" for complete listing of special
inspections required):
1. Review and test Contractor's proposed concrete mixes to attain compressive
« strengths specified and plasticity required for various conditions.
2. At beginning of project work, visit plant and set up mix and procedures.
3. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete shall
include the following:
a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C-172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C-94. Where concrete is pumped, samples shall be taken
at pump discharge.
b. Slump: ASTM C-143; one test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
c. Air Content: ASTM C-231; pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each
set of compressive strength test specimens.
d. Concrete Temperature: Test each time a set of compression test specimens
made.
e. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C-31; one set of 3 standard cylinders
for each compressive strength test. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory
cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
(1) Compressive Strength Test Frequency:
(a) ASTM C-39; one set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, or in any
one day, or for each 3,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen
6
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 2516
01410.4
tested at 7 days, 1 specimen tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
(b) When total quantity of concrete to be poured in one day is less than 50
cu. yds., strength test may be waived by Architect if, in his judgment,
adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.
(c) When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 90% of companion
laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and suggest
corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete.
4. Additional Tests: Testing service shall make additional tests of in -place concrete
when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics
have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service
shall conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C-42, Windsor probe, or by other methods as approved.
Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as
may be required, when unacceptable concrete is determined to exist by Architect.
END OF SECTION
:7
14
a
:M
Li
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
a PART 1 - GENERAL
2516
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Temporary
1.
Sanitary Facilities
2.
Utilities
3.
Drinking Water.
4.
Heating and Ventilation
5.
Lighting
6.
Job Signs
7.
Field Office
8.
Shoring and Underpinning
9.
Dewatering
!� 10.
Equipment
11.
Barriers
12.
Damage/Replacement of Trees
13.
Erosion Control
0 B. Use of Premises
C. Material Handling
D. Suspension of Work
E. Lines and Grades
F. Testing and Operating Instructions
i G. Removal
1.03 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide, where directed on site, enclosed temporary toilets for use of workmen.
• Maintain in sanitary condition and remove upon completion. Comply with
regulations of State Department of Health and other authorities having jurisdiction.
Do not use permanent facilities.
6
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 2516 M
01500.2
1.04 UTILITIES
A. Provide temporary water, electricity and gas as required to complete the construction.
Arrange for temporary meters in Contractor's name and pay all charges for gas,
electricity and water for construction, operating, and for testing of plumbing, heating,
air conditioning, lighting and other systems.
J
1.05 DRINKING WATER
A. Provide drinking water for workmen and suitable drinking cups.
1.06 HEATING AND VENTILATION
A. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to maintain at least 50 degrees F to facilitate
drying, to maintain proper temperature for concrete curing and to avoid material
damage. Heat as necessary until Substantial Completion. Remove damaged material
from site and replace at Contractor's expense.
1.07 LIGHTING
C�
A. Provide temporary light for workmen until permanent lighting is operating.
1.08 JOB SIGNS
A. Erect 4 ft. x 8 ft. sign raised two feet above grade in location directed by Architect
and maintain throughout construction period.
B. Allow no other signs on the site without prior approval of Architect.
•
1.09 FIELD OFFICE
A. Provide and maintain weather -tight field office with operating windows and lockable
doors for use of Contractor and Architect. Locate where directed and remove from
site upon completion.
1.10 SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
A. Provide and maintain temporary shoring and underpinning to protect new and
existing work.
2516 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500.3
1.11 DEWATERING
A. Provide pumping equipment to keep excavations, low spots and like areas free of
water. Make provisions for sudden storms. Provide watertight coverings over
openings and unfinished work to prevent admitting rain.
t 1.12 EQUIPMENT
r
A. Furnish, maintain, and remove at completion: temporary stairs, ladders, ramps,
runways, hoists, chutes, scaffolding and other required equipment.
B. Equipment shall comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and
orders of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Maintain equipment in safe condition. Do not build scaffolding into walls of
building.
1.13 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to
protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage during construction
A operations.
B. Provide barriers around trees that are to remain in place. Protect tree trunks as shown
on the drawings. The extent of damage to a tree will be determined at the
Contractor's expense by a tree surgeon registered with the Texas Nurserymen
R Association.
1. Protect such trees that are to remain from the following damage:
a. Compaction of root area by equipment or material.
b. Trunk damage by equipment, material storage, nailing or bolting.
c. Strangling by tying ropes or guy wires to trunks or large branches.
d. Poisoning by pouring solvents, gas, paint, etc. on or around trees and roots.
e. Cutting of roots by excavating, ditching, etc.
f. Damage to branches by improper pruning.
g. Changes of soil ph factor by disposal of lime base materials such as concrete,
plaster, etc.
h. Do not cut roots 1-1/2" in diameter or over. All excavation and earthwork
within the drip line of trees will be done by hand. All pruning will be done by
Owner.
0
1.14 DAMAGE /REPLACEMENT OF TREES
A. When trees other than those approved for removal are destroyed, killed or badly
damaged as a result of construction operations, the Contractor, at his expense shall
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 2516 M
01500.4
replace the destroyed, killed or badly damaged trees or shrubs as per the following
schedule:
1. Replace trees eight inches in caliper and less with the same type of tree of equal
caliper.
2. Replace trees over eight inches in caliper with a tree of the same type and eight
inches caliper. In addition the Contract sum will be reduced by the amount
determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: (D
x D) x 0.7854 x $10.00 where D is the diameter of the trunk in inches.
3. Measure trees as follows:
Trees up to four (4) inches in diameter, measure twelve (12) inches above the
ground. Trees over four (4) inches in diameter, measure fifty-four (54) inches
above the ground.
B. When trees are damaged to lesser extent and replacement is not required the tree will 40
be pruned and treated at the expense of the Contractor by a tree surgeon that is
registered with the Texas Nurserymen Association.
1.15 EROSION CONTROL
A. The site superintendent, or his representative, shall make a visual inspection of all
existing mechanical controls and newly stabilized areas as required; especially after a
rainfall in insure that all controls are maintained and properly functioning. Any
damaged controls shall be repaired prior to the end of the workday, including
reseeding and mulching or resodding if necessary. All inspections shall be
documented with a written report. Reports shall include the effectiveness of erosion
control measures, construction activities conducted since the last report (grading,
storm drain, sewer,...) and their location (...along the detention pond berm). Reports
shall be maintained by the Contractor along with the Certificate of Compliance and
this plan.
it
B. All sediment trapping devices shall be cleaned when the sediment level reaches 25%
capacity. Sediment shall be disposed of by spreading on site or hauling away if not
suitable for fill. a
C. Sediment fence, hay bale barriers, a desiltation basin or other sediment trapping
devices shall control all storm water leaving the site. All fill or cut areas shall be
hydro -mulched or sodding as per the specifications.
D. Siltation control has been provided by all storm drain inlets. The siltation control
will be removed once the site has been stabilized and before the project is open to the
public.
E. The Contractor is responsible for filling a Notice of Intent (NOI) in order to comply
with EPA regulations. Said NOI must be postmarked two days before construction
begins. NOI's and NOT's for the Bryan/College Station area should be submitted to:
2
of 2516 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500.5
Storm Water Notice of Intent
P. O. Box 1215
Newington, VA 22122
F. The Contractor is responsible for filling a Notice of Termination (NOT) at the
completion of the project.
G. The Contractor is responsible for removing sediment control devices after the site has
been stabilized and sod or mulch in planted areas has taken root.
1.16 USE OF PREMISES
0 A. Work with regard for safety. Where the work is carried on, in or adjacent to any road,
parking area or public place the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, furnish
and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, shall provide such
watchmen and take such precautionary measures for the protection of persons or
property and of the work as are necessary.
M
B. Water must be used by the Contractor to sprinkle as required to keep dust to a
minimum.
C. Confine stored materials, equipment and workmen's operations to limits indicated by
law, ordinances, permits and direction of Architect. Do not excessively encumber
site with material.
D. When space in building has been used for storage or shop, repair and clean after use.
• E. Construction parking will be confined to on -street parking as allowed by the City of
College Station.
1.17 MATERIAL HANDLING
A. Protect cement, lime, millwork and other products affected by weather during
delivery and while stored at site.
B. Protect material and equipment stored on site by approved means.
# C. Remove defective or damaged material from site.
1.18 SUSPENSION OF WORK
A. In event of temporary suspension of work, inclement weather or other stoppage,
protect completed work and material from damage. Remove from site material and
work that, in Architect's opinion, has been damaged and replace at Contractor's
expense.
r]
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 2516
01500.6
1.19 LINES AND GRADES
A. Maintain batter boards at corners. Establish and protect at least two widely separated
bench marks. As work progresses, establish bench marks at each level; establish
exact locations of partitions as guide to trades.
1.20 TESTING AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After heating, ventilating, air conditioning, electrical, or other equipment has been
installed, operate for testing and instructing Owner's operating personnel. Provide
equipment and labor for testing and instruction.
1.21 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to
Substantial Completion inspection.
•
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Restore
new and existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original
condition.
END OF SECTION
s
0
!
6
40
SECTION 01640 - SUBSTITUTIONS
7 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.0 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Product Options
B. Substitutions
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
R A. Section 01020 - Allowances
B. Section 01300 - Submittals
1.04 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Within 30 days after date of Contract, submit complete list of major products
proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model.
B. Contractor's Options
1. For products specified only by reference standards, select only products meeting
the specified standard.
2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any
one of the products or manufacturers named, which complies with the
specifications.
3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or
approved equal", Contractor must submit a written request for approval for any
• product or manufacturer not specifically named. Use of product or manufacturers
that have not been approved or acknowledged by published addendum will not be
acceptable.
4. For product specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no
option without approval by published addendum prior to receipt of bids.
♦ 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Certain materials, equipment, methods and services are required by these
specifications to establish standards of quality, function and appearance. Generally
other materials, equipment, methods or services that are proven by evidence
satisfactory to the Architect to meet the standards will be acceptable, in accordance
with Article 16 - Standards, of the Supplementary General Conditions.
B. If, prior to submitting his bid, a bidder at any level determines that any of the
products or systems specified would perform in a manner that will limit the
Contractor's ability to satisfactorily perform the work or to honor his Warranty, the
S bidder shall promptly notify the Architect in writing, providing substantiation for his
SUBSTITUTIONS 2516 M
01640.2
position. Any necessary changes, including substitution of materials, shall be set
forth in an Addendum.
C. The Architect does not bind himself to consider a substitution during the bidding
period unless written request has been submitted to the Architect for approval at least
seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include a
complete description of the proposed substitute, the name of the material or
equipment for which it is to be substituted, drawings, cuts, performance and test data
and any other data or information necessary for a complete evaluation. If the
Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in an
Addendum.
D. If, after award of contract, the Contractor or one of his Subcontractors or suppliers
determines that any of the products or systems specified would perform in a manner
that will limit the Contractor's ability to satisfactorily perform the work or to honor
his Warranty, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing, providing •
substantiation for his position. Any changes deemed necessary by the Owner and
Architect, including substitution of materials and change in Contract Sum, either
upward or downward, if any, shall be accomplished by appropriate modification.
E. Conditions Governing Substitutions
1.
No substitutions of any description will be allowed without the approval of the
Architect in writing.
2.
The Contractor shall refer to and comply with special substitution requirements of
the various sections of the Specifications.
3.
The terms approved, as approved, in an approved manner, satisfactory, approved
equal, similar, equal" and like words and phrases refer to items which, in the
opinion of the Architect, are similar and equal in all respects to the items
a
indicated in the drawings and/or Specifications. Under no circumstances will the
Architect be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is not equal
to the specified item. It is mandatory that the Contractor submit to the Architect
in writing all the evidence required to support his contention that the item
proposed for substitution is equal to the item indicated on the Drawings and/or
Specifications.
4.
Except as otherwise required by the Specifications, substitution requests may be
submitted at any time during construction providing the Contractor allows ample
time for Architect's investigation, and for preparation of shop drawings or
submittals, fabrication and delivery without delaying the work. When not
allowed sufficient lead time, the Architect will not consider substitutions. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to accurately ascertain the amount of lead time
required.
I
5.
Proposed substitutions will be considered only if the Owner receives the
advantage of less cost with no decrease in quality or earlier completion date or
both.
6.
Requests for substitutions will be considered only if submitted by or through the
General Contractor.
7.
The Architect reserves the right to reject any material and/or workmanship, either
before or after installation, which is not indicated in the Drawings and/or
Specifications or the substitution of which has not been approved by the Architect
in writing.
8.
Architect's approval of any substitutions does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of providing the specified item. For example, if the substituted
'
item, in the opinion of the Architect, proves to be inferior to the specified item, in
any manner, during the construction period or the warranty period, the Contractor
shall provide, at no extra cost, the specified item completely installed including
repairs or damages to other materials necessitated by the changes.
END OF SECTION
R
•
R
0
0
4
4
•
s
SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and other Division 1 Sections, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Closeout Procedures
B. Final Cleaning
C. Project Record Documents
D. Operation and Maintenance Data
E. Systems Demonstration
F. Warranties
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals, and other
administrative requirements.
1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. At or about the completion of the project, the following items shall be performed in
order to achieve Substantial Completion and project close-out:
1. Contractor submits a thorough List of Items to be completed (Punch List) or
corrected, along with a written request for Substantial Completion and inspection
of the work.
2. Architect and Engineer inspect project and prepare supplemental list.
3. Contractor completes corrections. Architect and Engineer reinspect (with Owner)
to establish Date of Substantial Completion. Note: Any items remaining on Date
of Substantial Completion are appended to Certificate (AIA G-704).
4. Certificate of Substantial Completion prepared and executed by all parties and
returned to Architect. Items on the appended Punch List are to be completed or
corrected within the time limits established in the Supplementary Conditions.
5. Final Change Order executed (including allowance adjustments).
6. Contractor submits written notice that work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance and shall specifically note each item on the Punch List as being
complete or the status of any incomplete item.
7. Contractor submits Final Application for Payment and a Certificate of Project
Compliance which indicates the following:
a. All Permit Numbers (include copies)
b. Utility Release Dates
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 2516
01700.2
c. That the building has been duly inspected and found to comply with all code
requirements and ordinances.
d. That a Certificate of Occupancy has been issued (include copy).
8. Architect and Engineer make final inspection (with Owner).
9. Contractor submits additional Final Items.
a. Consent of Surety of Final Payment (AIA G-707).
b. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (AIA G-706).
c. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA G-706A with contractors,
subcontractors and suppliers separate releases). ,
d. General Contractor's Warranty.
e. Subcontractors' Warranties.
f. Project Record Documents.
g. Operations and Maintenance Manuals (2 sets).
h. Final List of Subcontractors (AIA G-805).
i. Affidavits from Contractor, Subcontractors and suppliers stating that no
asbestos products have been installed in this project.
j. Furnish written Warranties to the Owner including specific items in each
product warranty stipulated for individual sections.
B. Final release of retainage will not be authorized by the Architect until Contractor
completes all the above mentioned requirements. Is
C. Terminal Inspection
1. Immediately prior to expiration of the one-year warranty period, the Contractor
shall make an inspection of the Work in the company of the Architect and the
Owner. The Architect and the Owner shall be given not less than 10 days notice
prior to the anticipated date of terminal inspection. i
2. Where any portion of the Work has proven to be defective and requires
replacement, repair or adjustment, the Contractor shall immediately provide
materials and labor necessary to remedy such defective Work and shall execute
such Work without delay until completed to the satisfaction of the Architect and
the Owner, even though the date of completion of the corrective work may extend
beyond the expiration date of the warranty period.
3. The Contractor shall not be responsible for correction of Work which has been
damaged because of neglect or abuse by the Owner, nor the replacement of parts
necessitated by normal wear in use.
1.05 FINAL CLEANING
IP
A. Execute prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion.
B. Clean all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view (new or existing to remain);
remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy
surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a
sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. Clean roofs,
gutters, and downspouts, remove obstructions and flush debris from drainage
systems. Project shall be cleaned thoroughly so that the Owner may occupy and use
the building without further cleaning.
C. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces. S
D. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities
from building and from the site.
0
2516 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700.3
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
s A. Store record documents at the site separate from those used for construction.
B. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required
information has been recorded.
C. Provide and maintain in proper order and good condition at the site, one complete set
�! of blue line prints of all drawings which will form a part of this contract. On this set
(in red pencil) indicate any and all changes in the location and type of partitions,
walls, electrical and mechanical services and equipment. In addition, one (1) copy of
all shop drawings and the color selections for the project incorporating all changes
during the construction shall be submitted in bound sets. At the completion of the
project the Contractor shall submit an additional set of record prints to show all
changes made during bidding and construction. Drafting shall be of comparable
quality as the original drawings.
D. Furnish the Owner, through the Architect, two (2) complete bound sets of operation
instructions and maintenance recommendations for all work installed in the building,
including work installed by the Contractors' own forces and all work done by
Subcontractors. The above information must include the serial number, model
number and operating power requirements.
•
1.07 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Refer to requirements of Divisions 15 and 16.
1.08 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
A. Refer to requirements of Divisions 15 and 16.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. In addition to the General Contractor's one-year warranty, the following warranties
are required to be submitted to the Architect in duplicate prior to application for final
payment. Unless specified otherwise in their respective sections, all warranties shall
be for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion as evidenced by the
Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. All warranties shall include all
labor, material and delivery costs required to correct defective material or installation.
Warranties include but are not limited to:
1. Masonry
r 2. Roofing
3. Sealants (two-year warranty)
4. Custom Hollow Metal
5. Wood Doors
6. Hardware
7. Glazing (two-year warranty)
• 8. Ceramic Tile
9. Drywall and Ceiling Systems
10. Suspended Acoustical Ceiling
11. Resilient Flooring
6
PROJECT CLOSEOUT 2516 w
01700.4
12. Carpet
13. Painting and Staining (two-year warranty)
14. Equipment and Specialties
15. Millwork f
16. Plumbing Systems
17. Mechanical Systems
18. Electrical Systems
B. The Contractor's Warranty shall cover all work under the Contract, whether or not
any portion or trade has been assigned or sublet. In the event any portion of the work
is performed by assignees and subcontractors, their written Warranty to the Owner
covering their respective portions of the work for the periods required shall be
delivered, together with the Contractor's Warranty, to the Owner. Assignees' and
subcontractor's Warranties shall expressly provide that the same shall be enforceable
directly by the Owner, if he so elects, and shall run concurrently with the Contractor's
Warranty. Warranty shall be secured by the Contractor's Performance Bond.
C. Conditions of Warranty: Whenever, within the warranty period, the Contractor is
notified in writing by the Architect or the Owner that any item of equipment, material
and/or workmanship has proved defective or is not meeting the specification
requirements, the Contractor shall immediately replace, repair or otherwise correct
the defect or defects without cost to the Owner and the warranty shall be extended
another year from the date the repairs or replacements are completed for the defective
item or items. The Contractor is fully obligated to the Owner for all work performed
by his Subcontractors and also for the validity and performance of each guarantee and
each warranty required by these Specifications.
D. Provide duplicate, notarized copies. Execute Contractor's submittals and assemble a
documents executed by Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide a table
of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover.
E. Submit copies for Architect's and Owner's review prior to final application for
payment.
END OF SECTION
n
11
CJ
SECTION 02010 - SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
1.01 SOILS REPORT INFORMATION
A. The Report
1. Dated: 24 August 2005
2. Prepared By: Spencer J. Buchanan Associates, Inc.
3. Title: New JP Complex
1.02 AVAILABILITY
2516
* A. Reports may be inspected at the office of the Architect, 701 South Texas Avenue,
Bryan, Texas.
B. Copies of the test boring data are included following this page.
• 1.03 APPLICABILITY
A. The following information on soil investigation and testing is furnished by the Owner
from an independent testing laboratory. This data, together with the recommendation
of the laboratory, is the basis on which the depth and size of footings was established.
• It is included herein for use by the Contractor for bidding purposes and his general
information only. The Architect and Owner will not be responsible for the accuracy
of the data given herein. Boring locations as shown on plot plan.
B. Bidders shall visit the site and acquaint themselves with all existing conditions and
make any additional investigations they deem necessary to properly bid the work and
to satisfy themselves as to existing subsurface conditions. All such investigations
shall be performed only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance
by the Architect.
C. No additional amounts will be made available to the successful bidder for work
arising from failure to examine the site or subsoil conditions.
9
C�
LOG OF BORING
PROJECT* New JP Complex BORING NO: B-1
College Station, Ta■as LOCATION. As directed by Client
CLIENT. BRAZOS COUNTY COMMISStONER'S COURT
DATE' August 19, 2DD5 PROJECT NO: 051691 BORING TYPE: 4" Auger
DRILLER: M Hodges SOIL TECHNICIAN: J Oconnell GROUND ELEV Unknown
Ji
3
fe
F 9
a. : =
p
w
o
3
a
o
b
o <
d
Shelby Tube Sample Penetration Sample J Jar WF Blows per fool
Disturbed sample No Recovery B Ba Pen Field estimate
from cuttings g It�l
Q Water encountered while drilling Open -hole water level
Moisture
Content
(%)
Dry
Dens kY
(PN)
Artarbarg Limits
COMPRESSION TESTS
Comp
(�)
Strain %
Lateral
Pressure
(psi)
Type Failurs
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
Other Tub
1255
4.
Hard brown silty clay with grass, roots and grevsl
11
105
1256
4.
Hard gray sandy Gay with gravel
0.
SNmYAM • Ile0%5
Shlap
11
23
P24
1257
4.
Hard tan nd gray sandy day
sk�s.s. • 110%
Shmg.
12
119
709
169
4
Bulge
1258
25
Very still tan Gay with organics
79
N s2 [1
N. MO W.r
21
103
1259
3 0
Very stiff tan clay with organics
31
90
76
27
49
24
7
7 5
Bulge
10
1260
30
Very stifftan Gay with calcareous nodules
29
as
15
1261
35
Very sli f tan clay with calcareous nodules
30
E9
69
76
43r222
56
16
60' shear
20
Bottom at 20-h
Water M 9-ft 6-inches, August 24. 2DO5
25
30
35
40
SPENCER J DUCHANAN ASSOCIATES. INC.
B"AN, TEXAS
O un
N C—
O t 0z
O V)
N �
a
n
m
r
0
0
a • 0 0 0 • 40 . 10 & 0
•
LOG OF BORING
PROJECT- New JP Complex CORING NO B-2
College Station, TLOCATION. As directed by Client
CLIENT' BRAZOS COUNTY COMMISSIONER'S COURT
DATE. August 19, 2005 PROJECT NO: 051691 BORING TYPE: 4"Auger
DRILLER M Hodges SOIL TECHNICIAN: J Oconnall GROUND ELEV' Unknown
dCC
a E
A
e
=
a, ac
Z
O o
�
m yr a
< �
d
' Shelby Tube Sample Penetration Sample J Jar B!F Blows per loot
Disturbed sample No RecoveryB S Pen is Field estimate
� kan wltegs W ( �
Q Water encountered while drill aq � Open -hole water level
Moisture
Content
(%)
Dry
Density
(�
Aaerbs L.mlu
ra
COMPRESSION TESTS
C*mP
(qn
Strain X
Latent
Pressure
(Pal I
T Failure
YW
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
Other Testa
LL
PL
►I
1262
40
Very stiff gray Sandy clay with grass, roots and gravel
14
121
1263
4+
Hard brown sandy day with gravel
s a 11
14
116
37
17
20
6 5
5 0
2
30' shear
5
1264
40
Vary stiff gray sandy clay with gravel
1265
10
Plastic to stiff gray low Gay with sand and gravel
72 % .-d s" 200
18
103
7E
15
13
1 15
56
6
Bulge
10
1266
30
Gray sandy Gay .
21
104
15
1267
15
Stiff gray clay
34
84
73
26
47
098
36
12
Bulge
20
1266
20
Very stiff Ian clay
40
B0
Bottom at 20.N
Water at 9-tt 8-inches, August 24. 2005
25
30
35
40
SPENCER J BUCHANAN ASSOCIATES. INC
BRYAN, TEXAa
N
1n
4
IT
LOG OF BORING
PROJECT New JP Complex BORING NO: B-3
College Station, Texas LOCATION: As directed by Client
CLIENT: BRAZOS COUNTY COMMISSIONER'S COURT
DATE August 19, 2005 PROJECT NO: 051691 BORING TYPE: 4" Auger
DRILLER M Hodges SOIL TECHNICIAN. J Ocortnell GROUND ELEV: Unknown
s
S p E
a i 9
E z
CA
a
c
G
o $
S
e
m t
IL
Shelby Tube Sample Panstation Sample J Jar B/F Blows per fool
Disturbed Sample No Recovery B Bag Pan (tsf) Held estimate
from cuttings
0 Water encountered while dolling Open -hole water level
Moisture
Content
(%)
Dry
Density
(PCf)
Atlsrbera Limits
COMPRESSION TESTS
Comb
059
Strain %
Lateral
Pressure
(pet)
Type Failure
DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM
Other Tests
LL
PL
PI
1269
s+
Hard y sandy olio dh gravel
15
110
1270
0
V stiff brown sand clay with gravel
«Y Y Y O<
Shr Lnsu
Snrv"w . 5 (Hr
10
111
26
15
11
399
56
p
Vertical spin due to
but e
5
1271
4a
Hard brown sandy Gay with gravel
57 No 1% cure nr
13
115
Bottom at 6-fl
10
15
20
25
30
35
�0
SPENCER J SUCNANAN ASSOCUITES, INC
aRYAN,TEXAs
r r 0 • 10 r • 0 r 0 •
` 2516 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
02010.5
•
0
L
•
' � I
j r„tom
AN 4p eru- S o 1-4
END OF SECTION
Q
r�
r
SECTION 02100 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Site Clearing Work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
• the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
0 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
•
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Site Clearing Work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications. Verify all conditions and dimensions at the site.
B. Work included (but not limited to):
1. Protection of existing improvements.
2 Removal of vegetation.
3. Topsoil stripping.
4. Clearing and grubbing.
0 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork
B. Section 02219 - Structure Excavation
•
C-I
SITE CLEARING 2516
02100.2
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Existing Improvements - Protect improvements on adjoining properties
and on Owner's property.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property - Authority for performing removal and
alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property shall be obtained prior to start
of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CLEARING
A. General
1. Remove vegetation, improvements, and obstructions interfering with installation
of new construction. Remove such items elsewhere on site as specifically
indicated. Removal includes digging out stumps and roots.
B. Topsoil stripping
0
1. Topsoil shall be defined as natural, fertile, friable surface soil to minimum depth •
of 6 inches. Satisfactory topsoil for stockpiling is soil reasonably free of subsoil,
clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2" in diameter, and without weeds,
roots, and other objectionable material.
2. Strip soil from all areas of the site to receive slabs, walks, cut and/or fill, or other
construction.
3. Strip topsoil to minimum depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling
with underlying materials.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping by mowing or
other approved means.
b. Remove all organic or undesirable materials from where concrete walks are to
be placed.
c. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown, or where directed. Construct
storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles as required to
prevent wind-blown dust.
C. Clearing and Grubbing
1. Clear site of shrubs and other vegetations, except for those indicated to be left
standing.
2. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground
surface.
•
0
2516 SITE CLEARING
02100.3
D. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with approved fill
material. Place fill material in layers not exceeding 6" loose depth, and thoroughly
compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
E. Disposal of Waste Materials
1. Burning is not permitted on Owner's property.
2. All waste materials, debris, and unsuitable soil materials shall be disposed of in an
• off -site location at the expense and discretion of the Contractor.
3. All excess soil not required for rough or finish grading, or for fill or backfill under
Section 02200 shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed
in an off -site location at the discretion of the Contractor. This disposal shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor under this Section whether stockpiled under
♦ this Section or others.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
11
•
•
•
SECTION 02110 - DEMOLITION
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - Special Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describes the Demolition. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the
site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
D. All hazardous materials will be removed by the Owner at their expense and will not
be part of this contract.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the demolition work.
B. Salvage: All removed materials and items, except those specifically indicated on the
drawings to be delivered to the Owner will be become the property of the Contractor
• and shall be removed from the site.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the demolition work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the site.
B. Demolition work includes, but is not limited to all items as hereinafter specified.
Perform all demolition work as required to prepare for new construction and as
necessary for proper completion of the work.
1. Exterior:
a. Remove portions of existing concrete sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and
paving.
b. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical drawings and specifications for demolition
work under these Divisions.
6
DEMOLITION
02110.2
2516 !
C. General:
1. Perform all cutting and demolition work required for mechanical, plumbing, and
electrical trades except as hereinafter specifically listed under "Related Work." •
2. Contractor shall refer to Mechanical Drawings and Electrical Drawings as
well as to Architectural Drawings as certain demolition requirements are indicated
only on these mechanical and electrical drawings.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Trades requiring holes, openings or trenches to be cut or drilled through floors, walls,
ceilings, or other construction shall perform layout work for cuts.
B. Mechanical and Electrical demolition work is specified under Division 15 and 16
respectively.
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
C
A. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained
by the Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within the structure may
occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to the start of the demolition
work.
•
B. Remove all items, materials and debris resulting from demolition operations from the
site unless they are specifically noted for delivery to the Owner. All other items will
become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Refer to
Division 1, General Provisions, for requirements concerning removal and disposal of
trash and debris. •
C. Items of salvageable value to the Contractor may be removed from the structure as
the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the Project Site as
they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the Project Site will not be
permitted. •
D. Explosives: The use of explosive will not be permitted.
E. Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
governing regulations.
•
0
f
2516 DEMOLITION
02110.3
1.06 SUBMITTALS
•
A. Schedule: Submit copies of proposed methods and operations of demolition to the
Architect for review prior to the start of work. Include in the schedule the
coordination for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required.
0 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Refer Part 1 - Scope of Work for specific information on demolition and removal of
scheduled items.
B. Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable
• methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the
lowest practical level.
1. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
2. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such
as ice, flooding and pollution.
3. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of all dust, dirt and debris caused by
demolition operations, as directed by the Architect or governing authorities.
Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the work.
C. Clean up
* 1. After demolition activities are complete, remove all waste, trash, and debris
resulting from the demolition work.
2. All materials to be disposed of off site at the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
6
•
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Earthwork. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the site.
•
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
0 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Earthwork indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and
• Specifications. Verify all conditions and dimensions at the job.
B. Work Included
1. Preparation of subgrade for slabs, walks, and pavements outside of building lines
is included as part of the work of this Section.
2. Rough and finish grading of site.
3. Backfilling.
4. Field quality control.
i 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services
B. Section 02010 - Subsurface Exploration
0 C. Section 02100 - Site Clearing
D. Section 02219 - Structure Excavation
6
EARTHWORK 2516
02200.2
E. Section 02520 - Site Concrete Work and Paving
F. Section 02600 - Site Utilities •
G. Section 02810 - Underground Irrigation System
H. Section 02900 - Landscape Work
•
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards
1. Perform excavation and earthwork in compliance with applicable requirements of
governing authorities having jurisdiction.
B. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. Soil classifications listed complying with the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) M145. 41
2. Texas State Highway Department, Item 340 - Specifications for Road
Construction.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Soil Test Information - Refer to Section 02010.
B. Existing Utilities
1. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in
place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.
2. Should damage occur, the Contractor shall replace or repair it to the satisfaction
of the Architect and Owner's Representative without expense to the Owner.
C. Unknown Utilities
1. If any unknown and uncharted utilities are encountered during excavation,
promptly notify the Architect and wait for his instruction before proceeding.
2. If it is ascertained by Architect that such utility line has been abandoned, the
Contractor shall properly cap the line at a depth of 12" or more below finish
grade.
3. If such unknown utilities are encountered and work is continued without
contacting the Architect for instructions, and damage is caused to said utilities, the
Contractor shall repair, at his own expense, such damage to the satisfaction of the
utility company concerned.
D. Unknown Obstacles
1. Should the Contractor encounter any unforeseen major obstacle in excavation
such as existing foundation of former building, abandoned water well, sub -surface
streams or "cave-ins", etc. which prove to be unduly expensive to overcome, it is
•
0
2516 EARTHWORK
02200.3
the intention of the Owner to cause a survey to be made to determine a course of
action that will relieve the Contractor of undue expense.
2. Contractor will be instructed by Architect as to course of action.
E. Use of Explosives is not permitted.
F. Protection of Persons and Property
• 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning
lights.
2. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
C1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Definitions
1. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with American
• Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) M145,
soil classification Groups A- 1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3.
2. Unsatisfactory soil materials are those defined in AASHTO M145, soil
classification Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7; also, peat and other
highly organic soils.
•
B. Materials
1. Backfill and Fill: Approved soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than
2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other
deleterious matter. Fill and backfill material under buildings and concrete paving
shall be nonactive sand clay with plasticity index between 7 and 20 and a liquid
limit not to exceed 30.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0 3.01 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Carefully establish lines from data given on the drawings. Accurately lay out new
building lines and erect permanent batter boards at point where they will not be
disturbed during construction of foundation.
B. Carefully establish benchmark with reference to levels and dimensions shown on
drawings. Benchmark shall be at such a location to insure it against any disturbance
throughout construction operations.
11
6
EARTHWORK 2516
02200.4
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation Classification - Excavation consists of removal and disposal of any and 16
all materials encountered when establishing required grade and subgrade elevations.
B. Unauthorized Excavation
1. Unauthorized excavation shall be defined as removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of •
Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
Architect, shall be at Contractor's expense.
2. Under footings, foundation bases, and retaining walls, fill unauthorized
excavation by extending indicated concrete bottom, without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position,
when approved by Architect.
3. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for
authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by
Architect.
C. Additional Excavation 40
1. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who
will make an inspection of conditions.
2. If unsatisfactory soil materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations,
carry excavations deeper as directed by Architect.
3. Removal of unsatisfactory soil materials and its replacement as directed will be
paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work.
D. Stability of Excavations
1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances and OSHA
2207 - Revised February, 1983, Part 1926 - Occupational Safety and Health
Standards, Subpart P - Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring. Shore and brace
where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
E. Shoring and Bracing
1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing as required.
2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing. Recognizing that the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction
means, methods, techniques, and sequences and procedures at the site, the
Contractor shall adhere to these minimum standards and any revision which may
be published by OSHA or any other jurisdictional authority during the period of
construction. Refer to Construction Industry Standards OSHA 2207 - Revised
February, 1983, Part 1926 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Subpart P
- Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring. Submit trench safety systems data to City 40
of College Station Engineering Division prior to trenching activities for approval.
3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations
will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.
C
2516 EARTHWORK
02200.5
F. Dewatering
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into
excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent
softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes
detrimental to stability of subgrade and foundations. Provide and maintain
pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering
system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
3. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off
areas. When necessary, establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and
other diversions to intercept or divert surface water outside excavation limits for
` each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
G. Material Storage
1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for
backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
• 3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified.
H. Excavation for Structures - Refer to Section 02219.
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus
0.10', and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit
• placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other
construction, and for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is
placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
other work.
I. Excavation for Pavements
1. Shape subgrade at drives and pavements by cutting and filling as required.
0 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. General
1. After stripping and general excavation activities are complete, all exposed
surfaces should be proof -rolled and any soft or weak areas removed and replaced
with compacted fill.
2. Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each
area classification listed below.
a. In excavations, use approved excavated or borrow material (plasticity index
between 7 and 20).
b. For general fill and under grassed areas, use approved excavated material.
c. Under walks and pavements, use approved excavated or borrow material, or
combination of both (plasticity Index between 7 and 20).
d. Refer to Section 02219 for fills under building slabs.
EARTHWORK 2516 •
02200.6
3. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the
following:
a. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable,
dampproofing and waterproofing.
b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities.
c. Removal of concrete formwork.
d. Removal of trash and debris.
4. Reopen trenches which have been improperly backfilled, to a depth as required
for proper compaction. Refill and compact as specified, or otherwise correct to
the approval of the civil engineer.
5. Should any of the work be so enclosed or covered up before it has been approved,
uncover all such work and after approvals have been made, refill and compact as
specified, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
•
B. Ground Surface Preparation - Refer to Section 02100.
C. Placement and Compaction - General
1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6" in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in 40
loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers.
2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum
moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry
density for each area classification (Refer 3.04G). Do not place backfill or fill
material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
3. Place backfill and fill materials adjacent to structures evenly to required
elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by
carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in
each lift.
•
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of
density specified for each area classification.
B. Except as otherwise specified, earth embankments shall be constructed in successive
layers for the full width of the cross-section and in such lengths as are suited to the
sprinkling and compaction methods utilized. Prior to compaction, the layers shall not
exceed six (6) inches in depth where pneumatic tire rolling is to be used and shall not
exceed eight (8) inches in depth for rolling with tamping rollers. Layers of •
embankment may be formed by utilizing equipment which will spread by blading or
other acceptable methods from piles or windrows dumped from excavating or hauling
equipment in such amounts that the material is evenly distributed.
C. Each layer of embankment shall be a uniform material with consistent density and 40
moisture content before beginning compaction. No material placed in the
embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that
position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar
n
•
2516 EARTHWORK
02200.7
methods. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material
mixed by blading, harrowing or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of
• uniform density is secured in each layer. Water required for sprinkling to bring the
material to the moisture content necessary for maximum compaction shall be evenly
applied and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure a uniform
moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as may be necessary. In order
to facilitate uniform wetting of material the Contractor may apply water at the
material source if the sequence and methods used are such as not to cause an undue
waste of water. Such procedure shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
D. Embankments shall be made of sufficient height and width so that after compaction
they will conform to the typical section shown on the drawings with no variation
therefrom at any point on the slopes more than five tenth (0.50) foot above or below
the established grade measured at right angles to the slope. The degree of finish for
the grading of the slopes shall be that obtainable from machine operations; the
smoothness of surface finish ordinarily associated with template or string line and
hand operations will not be required. Slopes may be flattened at locations authorized,
with materials approved by the Engineer. In general, slopes shall be flattened with
surplus material from excavation or with material from excavation unsuitable for
embankments.
E. In the construction of embankments, starting layers shall be placed in the deepest
portion of the fill, and as placement progresses, layers shall be constructed
1 approximately horizontal, but not steeper than the finished surface grade line.
F. All embankments shall be crowned at all stages of construction so as to permit ready
runoff of rainwater. No depressions or ruts will be permitted on the upper surface of
the embankment.
r
G. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements
1. Compaction of select fill should be at optimum moisture content up to a
maximum of 4 percent over optimum in lifts not to exceed 6" compacted
thickness. Density should not be less than the following percentages of the
maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test, ASTM D-698.
a. Building Slabs - Refer to Section 02219.
b. Lawn and Unpaved Areas - Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum dry density.
c. Walkways - Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill
material to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
d. Drives and Pavements
(1) Compact top 6" of existing subgrade and each layer of fill or select fill
material to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
(2) The compacted subgrade and fill or select fill shall extend at least three (3)
• feet beyond the curb or edge of paving.
6
EARTHWORK 2516
02200.8
3.05 GRADING AND FINISH GRADING
A. General •
1. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading shown. Smooth finished surface
within specified tolerances below, compact to uniform slopes between points
where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.
B. Grading Outside Building Lines
1. Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structure at a minimum
of 5% slope for at least 10 feet to provide a minimum 6" fall in the first 10 feet in
all directions to prevent ponding.
2. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows:
a. Lawn or Unpaved Areas - Finish areas to receive 6" topsoil to within not more
than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevations.
b. Walks - Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section,
with finish surface not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade
elevation.
c. Pavements - Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross 41
-
section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below required
subgrade elevation.
C. Finish Grading
1. After pavements, walks and concrete work are in place, fill final 6" of site (to
limits of grading shown) with approved topsoil, placing to allow for settlement. 41
Pulverize topsoil, fine grade and rake for grass planting.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01410.
3.07 MAINTENANCE
•
A. Protection of Graded Areas
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and
debris.
2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified
tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas
1. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction
operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required
density prior to further construction.
•
11
2516 EARTHWORK
02200.9
3.08 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
• A. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove unacceptable excavated material, trash,
debris, and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner's property.
3.09 GRASS PLANTING
A. Seed for ALL areas which grading activities occurred under this contract, unless
shown otherwise on the landscape drawings. Grass seed shall be hulled Turf Type
Bermuda Grass seed free of noxious weed or other deleterious seeds. Seed areas at
the rate of 3.0 lbs, per 1000 square feet.
B. Fertilize seeded areas with a complete organic fertilizer with 13-13-13 percentages of
weight. Apply balanced fertilizer at the rate of 2 lbs. per 100 square feet.
C. Maintenance:
1. Water seeded areas as necessary to keep upper V of soil moist for the first seven
(7) days and thereafter as required to promote healthy growth and spreading and
to prevent washing and eroding of sloped areas.
2. Mow grass weekly, commencing not less than 4 or more than 6 weeks after
planting, and continue this maintenance and upkeep until final acceptance of the
project by the Owner.
3. After each rain which occurs during this maintenance period, fill any eroded or
rutted areas with topsoil to original smoothness and reseed as necessary.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
•
SECTION 02219 - STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Excavation for Structures. Verify all dimensions and
. conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
0 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
0
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects of is affected by the work under this Section.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the specifications consists of the furnishings of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Structure Excavation indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications. Verify all conditions and dimensions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Excavation, filling, backfilling and grading for building slabs on grade
2. Excavating and backfilling of grade beams and dug footing.
3. Field quality control.
1.04 RELATED WORK
0 A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services
B. Section 02010 - Subsurface Soils Investigation
• C. Section 02100 - Site Clearing
D. Section 02200 - Earthwork
E. Section 02520 - Site Concrete Work and Paving
0
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION 2516 •
02219.2
F. Section 02900 - Landscape Work
•
G. Section 07150 - Under -floor Vapor Barrier
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 02200 - Earthwork, as a minimum. •
B. Codes and Standards - Perform excavation and earthwork in compliance with
applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction including OSHA
2207, Part 1926, Sub -part P - Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring.
•
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Soil Test Information - Refer to Section 02010.
•
B. Existing Utilities
1. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in
place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations.
2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered
during excavation, consult Architect and utility Owner immediately for directions.
Cooperate with Architect and utility companies in keeping respective services and
facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility Owner.
C. Protection of Person and Property
1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning •
lights.
2. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other
hazards created by structure excavation operations. •
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Sand Fill and Backfill: Washed, bank sand, P.I. of 5 or less, free of organic matter,
clay content not over 5%.
B. Select Backf ill and Fill: Approved soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger
than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other
deleterious matter; shall be nonactive sand clay with plasticity index between 7 and
20.
0
2516 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
02219.3
C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BUILDING FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE
A. Provide subgrade excavation and filling work before starting footing and grade beam
work.
B. Excavation under building slabs on grade:
1. Remove soil to a minimum 12" depth below the existing grade occurring as a
result of topsoil stripping. See Section 02100 for topsoil stripping.
2. Following work of subparagraph 3.01B1 above, compact the top 6" of exposed
subgrade to ninety-five (95) percent of the maximum standard dry density (ASTM
D-698) and within plus or minus 2 (two) percent of the optimum water content.
3. After compaction operations of subparagraph 3.01B2 have been completed and
approved, place and compact select fill as required to accommodate depth of fill
under building slab.
a. Select fill material, minimum 12" thick directly below slab, shall be a low PI
soil (less than 20 but greater than 7), carefully processed, with moisture
contents adjusted to near optimum (plus or minus two percent) spread in 6"
lifts, and compacted to 95% of the dry unit weight as determined by ASTM
D-698 procedure, latest edition.
4. Select fill work shall be completed and approved before start of excavation for
footings and grade beams.
3.02 FOOTING AND GRADE BEAM EXCAVATION
A. Excavate for footings to bearing approved by Architect. Base bid on estimated depth
shown on drawings. Keep accurate log of actual depths. Contract will be adjusted
should amount of excavation vary from that shown.
B. Keep excavations properly shored and dewatered.
•
C. Remove grade beam formwork including stakes and braces, leaving areas clear of
wood, debris from construction and other sources.
0 3.03 BACKFILLING
A. Backfilling shall be accomplished after completion of beams, walls and other
construction below grade, and after forms have been removed, and other required
operations have been completed, inspected and approved.
B. Use approved select soil material for backfilling.
C
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION 2516
02219.4
C. Place backfill materials in layers not more than 6" in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for
material compacted by hand -operated tampers.
D. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum
moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum standard
dry density specified to at least 95% of the dry unit weight as determined by ASTM
D-698 procedure, latest edition and within plus or minus 2 (two) percent to optimum •
moisture content. Do not place backfill materials on surfaces that are muddy, frozen,
or contain frost or ice.
E. Place backfill materials adjacent to structures evenly to required elevations. Take
care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material
uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. Distribute surplus excavated material on site as directed by Architect. Clean site of •
debris resulting from work of this Section.
B. Removal from Owner's Property
1. Remove unacceptable excavated material, trash, debris, and waste materials and
dispose of it off Owner's property. 41
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Section 01410.
END OF SECTION
L
C
r
•
11
0
SECTION 02280 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
• and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
0)
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe Soil Treatment. Verify all at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects of is affected by the work under this Section.
• 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the specifications consists of the furnishings of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Soil Treatment indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and
Specifications. Verify all conditions and dimensions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Soil treatment below building slabs -on -grade for subterranean insects.
2. Soil treatment for structural slab construction with crawl space, interior and
• exterior foundation perimeter, for subterranean insects.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Backfilling
B. Section 02219 - Structure Excavation: Fill under building slabs
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and
application.
•
TERMITE CONTROL 2516
02280.2
B. Applicator: Company specializing in soil treatment for termite control with three
years documented experience.
C. Materials: Provide certification that toxicants conform to specified requirements.
D. Material Packaging: Manufacturer's labels and seals identifying content.
•
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to state of Texas requirements for application licensing and authority to use
toxicant chemicals.
•
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and application in accordance with Section
01300.
B. Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, and
proposed application rate.
41
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites,
damage to building, building contents caused by termites; repairs to building,
building contents so caused. 40
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
•
A. Use an emulsible concentrate insecticide for dilution with water, specially formulated
to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutant.
Provide a working solution of the following chemical element:
1. Permethrin, 1.0% in water emulsion •
B. Applicator shall determine whether specified product(s) are currently approved for
use by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for similar installations.
C. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting.
•
0
2516 TERMITE CONTROL
02280.3
0
•
2.02 MIXING
A. Mix by volume in careful proportions to assure actual percentages specified. Follow
manufacturer's mixing instructions on label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb dry to absorb
toxicant, ready to receive treatment.
B. Beginning of application means acceptance of soil conditions and responsibility for
results.
• 3.02 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation
1. Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment in areas
to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously
compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before
placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant
manufacturer.
B. Use applicator with flow meter and measure rate.
C. Application Rates - Apply soil treatment solution as follows:
1. Under building slab treat soil as follows before vapor barrier or slabs are placed.
a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to critical areas under slab,
such as along inside of grade beams and foundation walls, along both sides of
interior grade beams walls, and around plumbing risers.
• b. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of solution per 10 sq. ft. as overall treatment under
building and slabs on grade within 10 feet of building perimeter.
c. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of
depth from grade to grade beam or foundation wall bottom, outside perimeter
of building.
d. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, at
rates of 5 gallons per 10 lin. ft. of penetration.
D. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application before beginning concrete
placement or other construction activities.
E
u
E. Post signs in areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been
applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction.
11
TERMITE CONTROL 2516
02280.4
3.03 COORDINATION
0
A. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other
construction activities following application.
B. Coordination treatment at foundation perimeter with finish grading and landscaping
work to avoid disturbance of treated soil. 0
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
7
•
•
•
0
SECTION 02520 - SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
• and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
- - -- - B.- Read -all other -Sections -of the Specifications, which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Site Concrete work. Verify all dimensions, grades, and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
• B. Other trades requiring work to be built into concrete will provide such work prior to
depositing concrete. Provide access to locations of such items of work; set items
securely. Notify all interested trades of intention to place concrete, allow time for
installation of their work and ascertain that their work is in place before depositing
concrete. Protect such work from displacement of damage during depositing of
10 concrete.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the installation of all Site Concrete work indicated or reasonably inferred
from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Concrete paving.
2. Concrete walks.
3. Other site concrete work as shown on drawings.
• 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services
B. Section 02200 - Earthwork
•
SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING 2516 •
02520.2
C. Section 02219 - Structure Excavation
•
D. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete
1.05 QUALITY ASSISTANCE
•
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. ASTM A-185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
2. ASTM A-615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
3. ASTM C-33 - Concrete Aggregates
4. ASTM C-94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete •
5. ASTM C-150 - Portland Cement
6. ASTM C-260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
7. ASTM C-309 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
8. ASTM C-494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
9. ASTM D-1190 - Concrete Joint Sealers •
10. ASTM D-1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction
11. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice
B. Supervision: Perform reinforced concrete work under direct supervision of General
Contractor's superintendent; refer to General Conditions. Superintendent shall
control the following:
1. Tying and placing reinforcing steel.
2. Construction, bracing, alignment of forms.
3. Mixing, placing of concrete.
4. Placement of sleeves or anchors required by other trades. •
C. Concrete Testing Service: Employ and pay for, testing laboratory services acceptable
to Architect and Owner to perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete
mixes as outlined in Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services.
•
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
•
B. Prior to start of work of this Section, submit:
1. Manufacturer's product data with application or installation instructions for
proprietary materials and items including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, curing compounds, sealers, joint materials, and other items as
requested by Architect.
2. Shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement.
Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, and
0
2516 SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING
02520.3
•
•
arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required
around openings through concrete.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Store cement and other packaged goods in weather -tight sheds; store reinforcing steel
on platforms or supports in a manner to prevent bending, twisting, or other damage.
Placing of materials on bare ground will not be permitted.
B. Deliver packaged materials to job in original unopened packages or containers
bearing manufacturer's labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Forms
1. Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until
removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects.
2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as
• required.
3. Coat forms with a non -staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface
surface of concrete.
•
B. Reinforcing Bars - Deformed steel bars, ASTM A-615, Grade 60
C. Fabricated Bar Mats - Welded or clip -assembled steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A-184.
Use ASTM A-615, Grade 40 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Joint Dowel Bars - Plain steel bars, ASTM A-615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
E. Plastic Dowel Sleeves - Furnish for one end of each dowel bar in expansion joints.
Design sleeves with one end closed and a minimum length of 3" to allow bar
movement of not less than I", unless otherwise indicated.
F. Expansion joint filler material pre -molded, non -extruding, closed -cell polyurethane
foam filler; with Burke extruded PVC "Snap -off ' cap, removable filler strip. Sizes to
extend full depth of concrete less 1/2" for sealant. Furnish proper thickness for the
various widths of joints shown and required. Redwood filler may be used on
sidewalks not associated with curbs or paving.
•
G. Expansion joint sealer for all exposed expansion joints shall be Sonolastic Paving
Joint Sealant, polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products,
Inc., color to match concrete. Use sealant manufacturers vertical grade sealant at
joints in concrete curbs.
0
SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING 2516 •
02520.4
H. Construction (control) Joint - Equal to Burke Keyed Kold Joint Form with
construction accessories, including removable screed (joint) cap. •
I. Epoxy Adhesive: "Epogel" High strength, high modulus , non -sag epoxy gel
adhesive by Sonneborn of equal.
J. Concrete Materials
1. Portland Cement - ASTM C-150, Type I
2. Aggregates - ASTM C-33, sized according to ACI 318 with maximum 1-1/2"
aggregate size
3. Sand - clean, hard, sharp sand, well graded
4. Water - clean, fresh water suitable for drinking. •
5. Admixtures:
a. Air -entraining: ASTM C-260
b. Other: ASTM C-494, Types A, D, and E as recommended by manufacturer
for prevailing weather conditions.
c. Color: "Chromix" by L.M. Scofield Company or approved equal. Color as •
selected by the Architect.
K. Provide metal accessories, including spacers, chairs, ties, bolsters and other devices
necessary for properly assembling, placing, spacing and supporting reinforcement in
place.
L. Marking Paint - Stripe full length of each space, 4" wide stripes, P&L "traffic paint",
white. At all designated fire lanes - paint curb red with white letters with copy "Fire
Lane No Parking" spaced at 10' to 15'.
•
2.02 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03300 and as herein specified.
B. Design mix to produce standard -weight concrete as follows: •
1. Compressive Strength unless otherwise shown on drawings - 3000 psi, minimum
at 28 days.
2. Slump Range - 4" to 6".
3. Air Content - 5%, plus or minus 1%.
4. Fly Ash will not be allowed in the mix. •
5. Color - admixture as required at all curb ramps to provide "significant contrasting
color with that of adjoining pedestrian routes".
C. Measure, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94.
C
C
2516 SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING
02520.5
•
0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. This Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the preceding work and satisfy himself that it
has been properly accomplished. Should he find any conditions, which will adversely
affect his work, he shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner's Representative.
B. Beginning work under this Section without such notification to the Architect will
constitute acceptance, by this Contractor, of the preceding work.
3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured and sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours
after concrete placement.
B. Wood Forms: Constructed of lumber of good quality, free from loose and unsound
knots, knot holes, twists, decay and other defects which would affect its strength or
impair the finished surface of the concrete.
• C. Plywood Forms:
1. Manufactured with waterproof adhesive.
2. Minimum thickness; 3/4".
3. Back and support with adequate studs and wales.
4. Apply plywood with long dimension across studs.
5. Oiled at mill and re -oiled or lacquered on the job before using.
D. Metal Forms:
1. Use metal of such thickness that forms will remain true to shape.
2. Countersink all bolt and rivet heads of facing sides.
3. Use clamps, pins or other connecting devices designed to hold forms rigid and
allow removal without injury to concrete.
4. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or which fail to align properly
will not be permitted.
5. Keep metal free from rust, grease or other foreign material, which will stain or
• discolor concrete.
E. Wetting and Oiling Forms:
1. Coat facing of all forms with an approved, light clear mineral oil which will not
discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surfaces or delay or impair
curing operations.
2. Apply oil before reinforcing is set.
3. Wetting: Immediately prior to placing concrete, wet all form surfaces that will be
in contact with concrete.
0
SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING 2516 •
02520.6
F. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1. Top of forms not more than 1/8" in 10'.
2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10'. •
G. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required to
ensure separation from concrete without damage.
•
3.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Form reinforcement accurately to dimensions shown. Bend bars cold and straighten
in a manner, which will not injure materials.
B. Space and position bars as shown. Place, splice and locate reinforcement in
•
accordance with recommendations of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the
American Concrete Institute as set forth in ACI publication 315 and 318, current
editions.
C. Where steel dowels are shown to be placed into existing concrete, drill into existing •
concrete no more than 1/4" diameter larger than the dowel, depth as shown on the
drawings. Remove all dust and dirt with brush and compressed air. Apply epoxy gel
into hole filling half full, butting dowel and forcing into hole, twisting until it bottoms
out.
•
3.04 NOTIFICATION
A. Notify Architect of time schedule for any pouring operation at least 24 hours before
start of placing in order that he may inspect form and reinforcing conditions prior to •
placing of concrete.
B. Furnish adequate light and access to all parts of the work.
�7
3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General - Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300 for placing
concrete, and as herein specified.
•
B. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade.
Moisten subgrade if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time
concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until
they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
C. Place concrete using methods, which prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate •
concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator.
Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, and side forms. Use only
0
2516 SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING
02520.7
square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to
prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.
• 1. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints,
as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2-hour, place a preformed
construction joint.
2. When adjacent pavement lanes are places in separate pours, do not operate
equipment on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry
loads without injury.
D. Curbs: Automatic machine may be used for curb placement at Contractor's option
and subject to Architect's approval of equipment. If machine placement is to be used,
submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed minimums
specified. Unless otherwise approved, machine placement must produce curbs to
required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified to formed
concrete.
3.06 JOINTS
•
A. General:
1.
Construct expansion, weakened -plane (control or contraction), and construction
joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct
transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Place control joints at 5'-0" o.c. in concrete walks and 20'-0" o.c. in concrete
paving unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
b. Place expansion joints at 30'-0" o.c. in concrete walks and 60'-0" o.c. both
ways in concrete paving and curbs unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
2.
When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously
•
placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more
than 1" below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If joint sealer is not
required, place joint filler flush with finished concrete surface.
4.
Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed, wherever
possible. Where more than one length is required, place or clip joint filler
sections together.
5.
Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement. Tip edge of filler
material to be held 1/2" below surface by means of removable PCV strips
attached to filler. When concrete has hardened sufficiently, carefully remove
PCV strips.
• 6.
Seal all exposed joints and other joints indicated on the Drawings with specified
expansion joint sealer to within 1/8" of top of surface..
7.
At concrete curbs, rake joint filler to a minimum I" depth and install sealant
manufacturer's vertical joint grade sealant.
•
0
SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING 2516 •
02520.8
3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and •
floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust
floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.
B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-foot straightedge. Distribute
concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to
provide a continuous smooth finish.
C. Work formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/4" radius, unless otherwise
indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface.
•
D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has
disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows:
1. Walks: Concrete walks shall receive a transverse medium broom finish after hand
tamping, wood floating and steel troweling to a uniform and smooth grade, graded
as indicated on the drawings. Curb ramps to receive grooved texture as shown on
•
the drawings.
2. Concrete Curbs:
a. After concrete has been placed, thoroughly compacted and placing has
sufficiently advanced, the concrete shall be struck off with a "mule" cut to the
exact profile shown on the Drawings (or to match existing adjacent), after
which it shall be worked with a wood float.
b. After concrete has been thoroughly worked and has set sufficiently, all
exposed corners are to be edged or rounded to the radii shown on the
Drawings.
c. As a final finish, the concrete shall be lightly sprinkled with water and given a
brush finish by starting at the top of the curb and brushing down and out
•
across the gutter.
3. Retaining Walls, Head Wall, Step Side -walls, and Foundation Walls: Exposed
vertical surfaces of walls shall receive a "rubbed" finish as follows:
a. Immediately after removal of forms all irregularities shall be removed from
exposed surfaces. Honeycombs, pocks, chips, etc., shall be patched to provide
smooth surfaces.
b. All exposed surfaces shall be rubbed with a course carborundum stone as
necessary to remove burrs, fins, ridges, protrusions and irregularities and to
provide even surfaces and true, uniform corners and edges.
c. The final rubbing shall consist of rubbing the surfaces with a medium fine
•
stone, using a moderate amount of water splashed on with a brush, until a
paste is formed. Spread this paste uniformly over the surface and allow to
reset, after which finish surface by rubbing down with a dry cloth. This final
rubbing shall not be applied until concrete is at least 10 days old.
d. The final rubbing shall be so accomplished as to provide a uniform color and
texture throughout. After final rubbing, surfaces shall be protected against
damage or staining. Any areas damaged or discolored prior to final
acceptance shall be re -rubbed to provide the uniform finish required.
•
2516 SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING
02520.9
4. Concrete Paving:
a. After concrete has been placed, thoroughly compacted and placing has
sufficiently advanced, the concrete shall receive a transverse heavy broom
finish to provide a non -slip finish suitable for traffic.
b. Finish shall be uniform without "slick" or very rough spots.
E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form
• removal, clean ends of joints and point -up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove
and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect.
3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from elements and from defacement due to
construction operations.
B. As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage, spray coat with
an approved curing compound. Other methods of curing may be used, subject to
• approval by Architect (Refer Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete).
3.09 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Refer to Section 01410.
3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS
• A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.
B. Patching: (Immediately upon Removal of Forms):
1. Fill and finish all honeycombed surfaces with mortar composed of one part
cement and two parts sand.
2. Honeycombed or blemished surfaces exposed to view: Patch defective areas with
mortar carefully matched to surrounding surfaces in both texture and color.
3. Remove laitance and unsound material from areas requiring patching, pack solid
with mortar leaving mortar 1/8" higher than surrounding surface. Wet cure for 3
days, then grind flush with finished surfaces.
C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from
pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted,
maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of
materials as they occur.
• D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other
foreign material just prior to final inspection.
0
SITE CONCRETE WORK AND PAVING 2516 •
02520.10
3.11 PARKING LOT STRIPING
A. Layout line with chalk as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Architect. •
B. Stripe full length of each space, 4" wide stripes, P&L "traffic paint", white.
C. Provide additional painted graphic where shown on the drawings.
•
D. At all designated fire lanes - paint red with white letters with copy "Fire Lane No
Parking" spaced at 10' to 15'.
END OF SECTION •
•
II
'7
•
•
•
•
SECTION 02600 - SITE UTILITIES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
• and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Site Utilities work. Verify all dimensions, grades, and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
• B. Notify all interested trades of intention to place piping, allow time for installation of
their work and ascertain that their work is in place before beginning construction.
Protect such work from displacement of damage during Site Utilities work.
•
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the installation of all Site Utilities work indicated or reasonably inferred
from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Sanitary sewer piping
2. Domestic water piping
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork
• B. Section 02520 - Site Concrete Work
0
SITE UTILITIES 2516 •
02600.2
C. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete
D. Division 15 - Sanitary sewer system and domestic water system within, and to 5 feet •
outside of, building line.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code and Standards
1. Perform excavation, trenching, backfilling and site drainage work in compliance
with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction and
Sections 02200 and 02219.
2. Provide concrete work pertaining to this Section in accordance with applicable
requirements of Section 03300. •
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Store cement and other packaged goods in weather -tight sheds; store reinforcing steel •
on platforms or supports in a manner to prevent bending, twisting, or other damage;
support pipe material in such a manner to prevent damage from construction activity
and movement. Cover as required. Placing of materials on bare ground will not be
permitted.
•
B. Deliver packaged materials to job in original unopened packages or containers
bearing manufacturer's labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS •
2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING
A. Use polyvinyl -chloride (PVC) piping complying with ASTM D1785, schedule 40.
B. Use solvent cement for PVC joints complying with ASTM D2564.
C. Fittings and Specials:
1. Use fittings and specials suitable for schedule 40 rating, unless otherwise
specified or directed.
2. Use fittings and specials for PVC pipe complying with ASTM D2468. •
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts as required and where shown on the Drawings. •
0
• 2516 SITE UTILITIES
02600.3
1. Provide traffic weight covers and frames where cleanouts are within pavements,
with the letters ) "SSCO" cast into the cover.
• 2. Acceptable products:
a. Alhambra Foundry, Model A-2100, 10" round cover, unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings.
B. Where cleanout is within a graded area, construct as shown on the Drawings or cast
• cleanout in a 16" x 16" x 4" thick concrete surround.
2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
• A. Use polyvinyl -chloride (PVC) piping complying with ASTM D1785, schedule 40.
B. Use solvent cement for PVC joints complying with ASTM D2564.
C. Fittings and Specials:
•
1.
Use fittings and specials suitable for schedule 40 rating, unless otherwise
specified or directed.
2.
Use fittings and specials for PVC pipe complying with ASTM D2468.
3.
For threaded PVC fittings, use schedule 80.
D. Gate Valves:
•
1.
Use gate valves designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi.
2.
Provide connections as required for the piping in which they are installed.
3.
Provide a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valve,
openable by turning counter clockwise.
4.
Provide an arrow on the operating nut or wheel, cast in metal, indicating direction
of opening.
5.
Valves smaller than 3":
1. Provide all bronze, screwed, single wedge disc, screw -in bonnet, packing
gland, and nut, with non -rising stem.
2. Buried valves: Install in suitable precast, concrete hand hold with cover
•
marked "WATER".
3. Provide risers on pipe line to place valve within box depth.
4. Acceptable products:
a. Manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc., El Monte, California.
•
2.04 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the
• Architect.
0
SITE UTILITIES 2516 •
02600.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SANITARY SEWER PIPING
•
A. Location:
1. Where the sewer location is not located clearly by dimensions on the Drawings,
locate the sewer:
a. Not closer than ten feet from a water supply main or service line. •
b. Where the bottom of the water pipe will be at least 12" above the top of the
sewer pipe, the horizontal spacing may be a minimum of six feet.
c. Where the gravity flow sewers cross above water lines, fully encase the sewer
pipe for a distance of ten feet on each side of the crossing; or
d. Use acceptable pressure pipe with no joint closer horizontally than three feet
from the crossing. •
e. Where concrete encasement is used, provide not leas than 4" thickness
including that on pipe joints.
B. Pipe Laying:
1. Protect pipe during handling against shocks and free fall. Remove extraneous •
material from the pipe interior.
2. Lay pipe by proceeding upgrade with the spigot ends of bell -and -spigot pipe
pointing in direction of flow.
3. Lay each pipe accurately to the indicated line and grade, aligning so the sewer has
a uniform invert. •
4. Continually clear interior of the pipe free from foreign material.
5. Before making pipe joints, clean and dry all surfaces of the pipe to be joined.
6. Use lubricants, primers, and adhesives recommended fro the purpose by the pipe
manufacturer.
7. Place, fit, join, and adjust the joints to obtain the degree of water tightness •
required.
C. Provide wye branches where sewer connections are indicated or required.
1. Where joining an existing line, join by placing a saddle over the line and make
connection in a manner which will not obstruct or interfere with the existing flow. •
2. When conditions are such that connection pipe cannot be supported adequately on
undisturbed earth or compacted fill, encase the pipe in a concrete backfill, or
support on a concrete cradle.
3. Provide concrete required because of conditions resulting form faulty construction
methods or negligence, at no additional cost to the Owner.
•
D. Building Connection:
1. Provide temporary closures at terminals where the building pipe is not installed.
a. Place marker post at grade end of plugged line.
b. Where building piping has been installed, make connection to the building
system. •
rn
LA
• 2516 SITE UTILITIES
02600.5
E. Embedment:
Install embedment using 6" minimum pea gravel under the pipe and manually
• consolidate. Provide 12" minimum cover over pipe using bank run river sand (free of
debris), followed by fill material compacted as outlined in Section 02200.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
•
A. Locating:
1. Locate water pipe at least ten feet away (9' outside clearance minimum),
horizontally, from sewer pipes, unless shown on plans otherwise.
2. Where bottom of the water pipe will be at least 12" above top of the sewer pipe,
• locate water pipe at least six feet away, horizontally, from the sewer pipe.
3. Where water lines cross under gravity -flow sewer lines, fully encase the sewer
pipe in concrete for a distance of at least ten feet each side of the crossing, or
provide pressure sewer pipe with no joint located within 10' to the crossing.
4. Do not place water lines in the same trench with sewer lines or electric wiring.
t
B. Placing and Laying:
1.
Lower pipe and accessories into trench by means of derrick, ropes, belt slings, or
other equipment approved by the Architect.
2.
Do not dump or drop any of the materials of this Section into the trench.
3.
Except where necessary in making connections to other lines, lay pipe with the
•
bells facing in the direction of laying.
4.
Position pipe and fittings in trench in a manner that identifying markings will be
readily visible for inspection.
5.
Cutting and Joining:
a. Protect against abrasion from serrated holding devices.
b. Remove burrs and glosses from surface to be jointed; use abrasive paper, file,
or steel wool.
c. Remove dirt, dust, and moisture by wiping clean with chemical cleaner or dry
cloth.
d. Using a pure bristle paint brush, apply an even coat of the specified solvent
•
cement in the fitting socket and on the surface of the pipe to be joined.
e. Promptly, insert pipe into bottom of the fitting socket; turn the pipe slightly to
assure an even distribution of cement.
f. Remove excess solvent cement from exterior to the joint.
g. Should cement begin to dry before the joint is made, reapply cement before
•
assembling.
h. Allow at least one hour for the joint to gain strength before handling or
installing the pipe.
6.
Do not thread plastic pipe; make connections only with the solvent cement or with
special adapter fittings designed for the purpose.
• 7.
Align pipe system components without strain.
8.
Support piping at intervals of not more than four feet, at ends, branch fittings, and
change of direction or elevation.
0
SITE UTILITIES 2516 •
02600.6
9. Support plastic pipe in trench with a 3" layer of sand. Allow no rocks, debris, or
potentially damaging substances within 6" of plastic pipe in trenches.
•
C. Connections: Use specials and fittings to suit the actual conditions where connections
are made between new work and existing mains. Use only those specials and fittings
approved by the utility having jurisdiction.
D. Sleeves: Where pipe passes through walls of pits or structures, provide cast iron wall •
sleeves.
E. Embedment:
Install embedment using 6" minimum pea gravel under the pipe and manually
consolidate. Provide 12" minimum cover over pipe using bank run river sand (free of
debris), followed by fill material compacted as outlined in Section 02200. •
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTING
A. Execution:
ALL PIPES shall be tested before they are backfilled, concealed in furring or chases,
insulated, painted, or otherwise covered or rendered inaccessible. Testing shall be
accomplished by sections of lines or systems as required by the conditions existing
during construction.
•
B. Soil Lines:
1. After all horizontal soil lines have been set, all the outlets shall be temporarily
plugged, the pipes filled with water, and allow to remain so for at least 4 hours.
2. Minimum test pressure for all sections of piping shall be 5 ft. of water.
3. A final test shall be made after all vertical and horizontal soil pipes have been •
installed and the fixtures roughed in, and before the sewer connections are made.
4. All soil piping shall be flushed immediately before final inspection to assure all
lines are flowing properly.
C. Waste Pipe Cleaning: •
1. All soil piping shall be cleaned before final testing using a sewer machine and
shall be certified in writing to be clear of all foreign material. The Architect's
Representative shall be afforded the opportunity to witness the tests.
D. Water Systems: •
1. All water lines shall be tested under water pressure of 100 psi and proved tight
before final connections are made to any fixtures or equipment.
E. Any leaks in piping systems shall be repaired:
1. Leaks in soldered or brazed joints shall be repaired by remaking the joint. No
soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. •
0
2516 SITE UTILITIES
02600.7
2. When any defect is repaired, that section of the system shall be retested and
proved tight.
•
F. The OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE shall be afforded the opportunity to inspect
each section of the piping system and each piece of equipment while it is being tested,
and shall have the opportunity to approve tests. He shall have the right to accept or
reject the work of the systems on the basis of the performance during those tests.
•
G. Disinfecting of Water Distribution System:
1. Each unit of completed domestic water piping shall be disinfected with Chlorine
before acceptance for domestic operation.
2. Use liquid chlorine or hypo chlorite.
•
a. The amount of chlorine provided shall be not less than 50 parts per million,
introduced to the system in a manner approved by the Architect.
b. all valves in the line shall be opened and closed several times during the
disinfecting period.
c. After a contact period of 24 hours the system shall be flushed with clean water
•
until the chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million.
d. The final sample shall be free of contamination and pass TNRCC's bacteria
requirements before being put into use.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
0
•
SECTION 02810 - UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 2516
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
• and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Underground Irrigation System work. Verify all dimensions
and conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Items furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless specifically
stated otherwise; furnish installation directions, setting drawings, templates,
specifications, and other information required for clear understanding of setting and
• operation requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
• A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete Underground Irrigation System work indicted or reasonably inferred from
the Drawings and Specifications.
• B. Work Included:
1. Furnishing and installing sprinkler system as described in Contract Documents
complete with accessories necessary for proper function.
2. Obtaining all necessary permits.
3. PVC Sleeves
• 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Finish Grading
• B. Section 02900 - Landscape Work
0
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 2516 •
02810.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with latest rules, regulations and other •
applicable state or local laws. Nothing in the Contract Documents is to be construed
to permit work not conforming to these codes.
B. Minor adjustments in system will be permitted to avoid existing fixed obstructions.
•
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. As -Built Drawings
1. Prepare an accurate as -built drawing as the installation work proceeds to be
submitted prior to final inspection. As -built drawing shall be reduced, circuits •
color -keyed and laminated in plastic. Drawings shall fit inside controller box
cover.
2. Final payment for system will not be authorized until accurate and complete as -
built drawings are submitted.
•
1.07 PRODUCT STORAGE
A. During construction and storage, protect materials from damage and prolonged
exposure to sunlight. •
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Any portion of the site damaged during the course of the work shall be replaced or •
repaired by the original installer at no cost to the Owner.
B. Existing Trees and plants to remain shall be protected throughout construction and
shall be replaced by the original installer if damaged at no cost to the Owner.
�1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, AND SLEEVES
A. Pipe for pressure lines shall be schedule 40 PVC. Pipe for lateral lines shall be class •
200 PVC unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
B. Fittings shall be of same material as pipe or as shown on the Drawings.
C. Pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name, size, •
schedule, type and working pressure.
0
2516 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810.3
•
D. Pipe sizes shown on the Drawings are minimum. Larger sizes may be substituted if
approved by the Architect and without additional cost to the Owner.
2.02 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Conform to requirements shown on the Drawings as to type, size, radius of throw,
• pressure and discharge.
B. Each type of head shall be product of a single manufacturer.
• 2.03 SPRINKLER RISERS
A. All risers shall be polyvinyl chloride hose equal to the I.P.S. of the sprinkler head,
except for shrub risers which shall have a threaded schedule 80 (gray) nipple.
• 2.04 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A. Control valves shall be of size and type indicated on the drawings.
B. Control wire shall be OF-UL listed color -coded copper conductor, direct burial, size
• 14. Tape control wire to side of main line every 10 ft. Where control wire leaves
main or lateral line, enclose it in Class 200 PVC conduit. Use waterproof wire
connectors at splices.
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Locate trenches in such a manner that all lateral lines parallel to building will be 10'-
• 0" minimum from building foundation system. All lateral lines with sprinkler heads
will be run perpendicular to building.
B. Locate trenches for sprinklered areas under existing trees to remain in such a manner
that all lateral lines will not be placed under the dip lines. all lateral lines with
• sprinkler heads to be placed under drip lines will be run if a radical toward the trunk
of the existing tree.
C. Over -excavate trenches 2 inches and bring back to indicated depth by filling with
fine, rock -free soil or sand.
a D. Cover pipe both top and sides with 2 inches of material specified in Paragraph C
above. In no case shall there be less than 2 inches of rock -free soil or sand
surrounding pipe.
40
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 2516 •
02810.4
E. Do not cover pipe or fittings until the Landscape Architect has inspected and
approved the system.
F. Balance of fill and compaction shall be water settled and made flush with surrounding •
grade.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install plastic pipe in manner to provide for expansion and contraction as
recommended by the manufacturer.
•
B. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install main lines with cover of 18
inches minimum based on finished grade. Install remaining lateral lines with cover of •
12 inches based on finish grade.
C. Install pipe under driveways or parking areas in sleeves at least 12 inches below
finish grade or as shown on the Drawings.
•
D. Locate no sprinkler head closer than 12 inches from building foundation. Heads
immediately adjacent to walks or curbs shall be 1/8 inch below top of walk or curb
and have one inch clearance between head and walk or curb.
E. Drawings show schematic arrangement of piping. Should local conditions necessitate
rearrangement, obtain approval of the Architect before proceeding with the work.
F. Cut plastic pipe square. Remove burrs at cut ends prior to installation so
unobstructed flow will result.
•
G. Make solvent weld joints in the following manner:
1. Clean mating pipe and fitting with a clean dry cloth and apply one coat primer to
each.
2. Apply uniform coat of solvent to outside of pipe.
3. Apply solvent to fitting in a similar manner. •
4. Re -apply a light coat of solvent to pipe and quickly insert into fitting.
5. Give pipe or fitting a quarter turn to insure even distribution of solvent and make
sure pipe is inserted to full depth of fitting socket.
6. Hold in position for 15 seconds minimum or long enough to allow proper setting
of joint.
7. Wipe off solvent appearing at outer shoulder of fitting. •
8. Do not use an excessive amount of solvent thereby causing an obstruction to form
on inside of pipe.
9. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before applying pressure to PVC pipe.
H. Coat threaded connections with Rectorseal No. 5 or teflon tape. •
•
2516 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810.5
3.03 CONTROL VALVES AND CONTROLLER
A. If system is designed as an automatic system, install controller, control wires and
valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations unless indicated
otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Install remote control valves in a valve box positioned over valve so all parts of valve
can be reached for service. Set cover of valve box even with finish grade. Install
valve boxes over 4 inches of gravel for drainage and reasonably free from dirt and
debris.
• 3.04 SPRINKLER HEADS
Cl
A. Prior to installation of sprinkler heads, open control valves and use full head of water
to flush out system.
B. Set sprinkler heads and quick -coupling valves perpendicular to finish grade.
C. Set lawn sprinkler heads adjacent to existing walks, curbs and other paved areas to
grade.
D. Place one cubic foot minimum of 3/4" to one inch washed gravel around each rotor
• pop-up sprinkler head for drainage of water from sprinkler case.
•
3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjust heads in lawn areas to proper grade when turf is sufficiently established to
allow walking on it without appreciable harm. Such lowering or raising of heads
shall be part of original contract with no additional cost to the Owner.
• B. Adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution and trim after completion of
landscaping.
0
C. Remove debris, material and equipment associated with work of this section from site
and legally dispose of.
3.06 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Standard one-year guarantee shall include:
1. Filling and repairing depressions and replacing plantings due to settlement of
irrigation trenches for one year following acceptance of Project.
2. System can be adequately drained to protect from freeze damage in areas where
freezing occurs.
3. System has been adjusted to supply proper coverage of areas to receive water.
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 2516
02810.6
B. After system is installed and approved, instruct Building Custodian to complete
operation and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
C
•
Cl
•
•
r
•
P
SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE WORK
0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
M attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Landscape work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
` A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the Landscape Work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications. Verify all conditions and dimensions at the job site.
B. Work Included:
. 1. Trees, shrubs, lawns, and bed construction.
2. Grass planting.
3. Fertilization.
4. Watering.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Finish Grading
B. Section 02810 - Underground Irrigation System
r 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection of adjacent surfaces and finish work from damage due to landscaping
operations is responsibility of this Contractor. Remove any spottings, stains, smears,
and make good any damage resulting from this work as directed by the Architect at
no cost to the Owner.
C
LANDSCAPE WORK 2516
02900.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
M
A. Grass seed for all areas indicated for seeding shall be hulled Turf Type Bermuda
Grass seed or a combination of Rye and unhulled Bermuda Grass seed, free of
noxious weed or other deleterious seeds. Seed used will be determined by Architect
in accordance with season in which grass is to be planted.
B. Trees and Shrubs: All plant material furnished for this project shall be nursery
grown, well branched, full foliage and well proportioned, particularly with respect to
the width -height relationship, and shall have a fibrous root system. The Architect
may inspect plant materials at place of growth, but such inspection shall not preclude
the right to rejection at the site.
1. Nomenclature: The scientific and common names of plants herein specified are
shown on the Drawings and shall conform with the approved names given in
STANDARDIZED PLANT NAMES as prepared by the American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, except that where local usage does not
follow this standard, the accepted local names will be used.
2. Quality and Size: Plants shall be in accordance with rules and grading adopted by
the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., and included in the American
Standard for Nursery Stock, utilizing the ball sizes as recommended in the
American Standards. All plants shall be excellent quality and have a normal habit
of growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from disease and insect
infestations and damage. Trees shall have single straight trunks unless otherwise
specified. Any tree with weak, thin trunk not capable of supporting itself when
planted in the open will not be accepted. The minimum acceptable sizes of all
plants, measured before pruning, with branches in normal position shall conform
•
to the measurements specified in the list of required plants, shown under Planting
Schedule on the Drawings. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with
the approval of the Architect, but the use of larger plants will make no change in
contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the ball of earth or spread of
roots shall be increased proportionately.
3. Digging, Wrapping, and Handling: Plants shall be prepared for shipment in a
manner that will not cause any damage to the branches, shape, root system, and
future development of the plants after replanting.
a. Container -Grown Plants: Plants furnished are container -grown. Plants shall
have sufficient roots to hold earth intact after removal from containers without
being root -bound.
,
4. Plants Required: The species (scientific and common names), size and the
manner in which to be furnished is shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
furnish and plant all plant materials required by the plan.
C. Grass seed shall be hulled Turf Type Bermuda Grass seed free of noxious weed or
other deleterious seeds.
D. Fertilizer:
1. Fertilizer shall be complete fertilizer, part of the elements of which are derived
from organic sources. The percentages of weight shall be 13-13-13.
2. It shall be delivered to the site in original unopened containers which shall bear
the manufacturer's guarantee statement of analysis. Fertilizer shall be stored in ID
weatherproof locations in such manner that it will be kept dry and its
effectiveness not impaired.
2516 LANDSCAPE WORK
02900.3
E. Topsoil: Topsoil for planting beds and backfill for tree pits shall be supplied by the
Contractor and should not rely on existing stockpiled material at site.
1. Topsoil shall meet the following requirements:
a. It shall be fertile, friable and representative of local productive soil, capable of
sustaining vigorous plant growth and shall be free of clay lumps, subsoil,
noxious weeds or other extraneous material; not frozen or muddy.
b. Acidity Range: Shall range between ph 5.0 and 7.5. Contractor will be
required to bring ph range to 6.0 to 7.5. Required additives shall be provided
as directed by soil tests and Landscape Architect.
c. Organic Content: Shall not be less than 5% and not greater that 30%.
d. Clay Content: Shall range between 5% and 25%.
e. Mechanical Analysis: Shall be as follows:
PASSING RETAINED ON PERCENTAGE
• PASSING
1"screen 1/4" screen 100%
•
No. 100 U.S.S. Not more than 3%
mesh sieve
very fine sand, 40-60%
silt and clay 40-60%
2. Topsoil Tests:
a. Topsoil testing shall be paid for by the landscape contractor, not by the testing
• allowance for the General Contractor.
b. Will be required on all topsoil to determine its acceptability for seeding based
on the requirements outlined herein. Tests shall be paid for by the Contractor
and all soil samples for testing shall be taken by the Contractor. Test samples
shall be submitted for testing to the Soil Testing Lab, Texas Agricultural
Extension Service, Texas A&M University.
c. Test results shall be submitted to the Architect for review.
F. Organic Matter: Shall be 25% composted rice hulls, well rotted pine bark mulch, or
composted sheep manure mixed by volume with 25% peat moss, and 50% sandy
topsoil for tree pit backfill and planting beds.
• G. Top Bark: Shall be a medium to coarse grade of pine bark chips.
H. Guying, Staking and Wrapping Material:
1. Stakes for staking shall be sound, uniform pieces of treated wood, 2"x2"x120"
long or an approved equal.
2. Staking wire shall be 3-strand, annealed galvanized steel.
3. Hose for covering wire shall be new or used, black or red, two-ply fiber
reinforced garden hose, not less than 1/2" inside diameter. Seconds rejected by
factory are acceptable.
4. Tree wrap shall be burlap or treated tree wrapping.
I. Water for irrigating shall be from the domestic supply of the project. Volume will be
• provided under the Mechanical Sections of these Specifications, suitable for portable
sprinkler systems to be used by the Contractor for watering.
E
LANDSCAPE WORK 2516 46
02900.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Deliver fertilizer and grass seed in containers labeled with name, trademark,
analysis and warranty of producer.
2. Fertilizing: Apply specified balanced fertilizer at the rate of 800 pounds per acre
(approximately 2 lbs. per 100 sq. feet).
3. Maintenance:
a. Water seeded areas as necessary to keep upper 1" of soil moist for the first
seven (7) days and thereafter as required to promote healthy growth and
spreading and to prevent washing and eroding of sloped areas.
b. Mow grass weekly, commencing not less that 4 nor more that 6 weeks after
planting, and continue this maintenance and upkeep until final acceptance of `
the project or landscape portion of the project, by the Owner.
c. After each rain which occurs during this maintenance period, fill any eroded
or rutted areas with topsoil to original smoothness and reseed as necessary.
B. Grass Seed
1. Topsoil is placed under Section 02200 - Earthwork
2. Pulverize topsoil 3" to 4" deep with disc harrow or rotor tiller. Rake as required
to provide a smooth bed for grass seed.
3. Seed all areas where grading work, or other construction activity has occurred or
otherwise disturbed existing ground surface. Seed indicated areas with a
"Brillion", or equal, seeder at the rate of 60 pounds of seed per acre approximately
1.5 lbs. per 1000 sq. feet.
4. Seeded areas to be watered and maintained as outlined above by the Contractor
until final acceptance of the project by the Owner.
C. Trees and Shrubs:
1.
Planting operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during
the seasons which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice
in the locality. Any damage to existing structures, utilities, or work of any kind
shall be promptly repaired by or at the expense of the Contractor.
2.
All plant material furnished shall be subject to inspection and approval by the
Architect both at the nursery source and upon delivery at project site for size,
grade, condition and general suitability for planting.
3.
Trees and shrubs shall be planted in accordance with accepted horticultural
standards and as shown on the Drawings.
4.
Extra quantity of select top soil shall be furnished by the Contractor for
backfilling around trees and shrubs where plantings are to be made in unsuitable
existing soil conditions as determined by the Architect.
5.
All trees shall be staked as shown on tree planting detail.
6.
Pruning of plants shall be done after planting but limited to removal of injured
twigs and branches to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, and to
clear building, but never to exceed one-half of branching structure.
7.
Remove all deleterious matter and obstructions from plant pits during excavation.
8.
Protect all planted areas during planting operations.
9.
Minimum size of plant to be according to planting legend.
10.
Excess soil from plant pits to be removed and disposed of on or off project site as
directed by the Architect. Planted areas to be left in neat, clean condition.
11.
Backfilling Tree and Shrub Pits: Excavated tree pits after placement of trees shall
be backfilled with loam topsoil and settled by application of water.
M
e 2516 LANDSCAPE WORK
02900.5
12. Planting to be watered and maintained by the Contractor until completed planting
project has been finally inspected by the Owner at the close of planting
j operations.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE OF UNDERLYING WORK:
A. Areas to receive Grass Seed must have been proven to be smoothly graded to provide
r drainage of all areas with no entrapment of water in any place.
B. Grass Seed installed in areas not properly drained shall be removed, the soil regraded
and new Grass Seed reinstalled at no additional cost to the OWNER.
r 3.03 WARRANTY
0
C
0
0
a
A. Each plant furnished and planted shall be warranted by the Contractor to begin
normal growth for one growing season or maximum one year after planting on the
project site. At the end of warranty period any plant not alive and in satisfactory
growing condition shall be replaced with plant of like kind and size as the original at
Contractor's expense and during the specified planting period.
B. Exceptions to replacement responsibility of the Contractor shall be removal, loss or
damage due to occupancy of project by the Owner, vandalism or acts of negligence
on the part of others not under control of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
0
6
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
. attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Concrete Formwork. Verify all dimensions and conditions
at the site.
! C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
•
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by Concrete Formwork.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close joining and fitting
1i with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Concrete Formwork as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Wood or steel formwork for cast -in -place concrete, complete with shoring,
bracing and anchorage.
2. Form openings for mechanical and electrical work.
3. Coordinate installation of items supplied by other sections of work.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete.
A B. Section 04200 - Masonry accessories to be embedded in concrete.
C. Section 05500 - Metal fabrications to be embedded in concrete.
4
CONCRETE FORMWORK 2516
03100.2
E. Division 15 - Mechanical items to be embedded in concrete.
F. Division 16 - Electrical items to be embedded in concrete. '
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete.
2. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including forming accessories, form •
coatings, waterstops, and other items as requested by Architect.
C. Samples: Submit samples of proprietary materials if requested by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms - Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with
plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at
least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
2.02 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of sufficient
strength and character to maintain formwork in place while pouring concrete.
Z1
w
B. Form Release Agent - Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete or impair M
natural bonding or color characteristics of coating(s) intended for use on concrete.
C. Construction (control) joint form - Equal to Burke Keyed Kold Joint Form with
accessories.
D. Expansion joint filler - Sonneborn's "Sonoflex F, " pre -moulded, non -extruding,
closed -cell polyurethane foam filler; sizes to extend full depth of concrete less 1/2"
for sealant. Furnish proper thicknesses for the various joints shown and required.
2516 CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
& 3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured and sufficiently
tight to prevent leakage of mortar. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow
continuous progress or work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours
after concrete placement.
B. Wood Forms: Constructed of lumber of good quality, free from loose and unsound
knots, knot holes, twists, decay and other defects which would affect its strength or
impair the finished surface of the concrete.
C. Plywood Forms:
1. Manufactured with waterproof adhesive.
2. Minimum thickness; 3/4".
3. Back and support with adequate studs and wales.
4. Apply plywood with long dimension across studs.
• 5. Oiled at mill and re -oiled or lacquered on the job before using.
D. Metal Forms:
1. Use metal of such thickness that forms will remain true to shape.
2. Countersink all bolt and rivet heads of facing sides.
3. Use clamps, pins or other connecting devices designed to hold forms rigid and
allow removal without injury to concrete.
4. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or which fail to align properly
will not be permitted.
5. Keep metal free from rust, grease or other foreign material which will stain or
discolor concrete.
E. Wetting and Oiling Forms:
1. Coat facing of all forms with an approved, light clear mineral oil which will not
discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surfaces or delay or impair
curing operations.
2. Apply oil before reinforcing is set.
3. Wetting: Immediately prior to placing concrete wet all form surfaces that will be
in contact with concrete.
F. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1. Top of forms not more than 1/8" in 10'.
2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 " in 10'.
3.02 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Construct formwork, shoring and bracing to meet design and code requirements, so
that resultant finished concrete conforms to required shapes, lines and dimensions.
C]
CONCRETE FORMWORK 2516
03100.4
B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping, so that concrete
is not damaged during its removal.
l�
C. Align joints and make watertight, to prevent leakage or mortar disfigured appearance
of concrete. Keep form joints to minimum.
D. Obtain Architect's approval for use of earth forms for grade beams. When using earth
forms, hand -trim sides and bottoms, and remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete. '
Allow for two inch additional concrete coverage over reinforcing steel from amount
shown on structural drawings.
E. Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores, where and
when these are required to remain in place.
G
F. Obtain Architect's approval before framing openings in structural concrete members.
G. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Brace and strengthen previously
constructed formwork likely to be over -stressed by construction loads.
H. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to ensure separation from concrete without damage. Apply prior
to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
I. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes If,
or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated
forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete.
3.03 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves, and other work
to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.
B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
E
M
C. Coordinate work of other sections and cooperate with trades involved in forming and
setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts. Do
not perform work unless specifically indicated on drawings or reviewed prior to
installation. 0
D. Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations;
straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
E. Place formed construction joints in floor slab pattern as approved for pouring
sequence. Set top screed to required elevations. Secure to resist movement of wet
concrete.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
FJ
2516 CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100.5
A. Inspect and check completed formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in
accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and
parts are secure.
B. Notify Architect when formwork is complete and has been cleaned, to obtain
Architect's review prior to placing concrete.
C. Obtain Architect's approval of each section of formwork intended for reuse.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean forms after each use as installation proceeds, remove foreign matter. Remove
cuttings, shavings, and debris from within forms. Flush with water or use compressed
air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior
through clean -out ports.
3.06 FORM REMOVAL
A. Notify Architect prior to removing formwork.
B. Do not remove forms, shores or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength
to carry its own weight, and construction and design load which are liable to be
imposed upon it. Verify strength of concrete by compressive test results.
END OF SECTION
00
A
0
U
s
SECTION 03200 - REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Reinforcing Steel work. Verify all dimensions and
14 conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
,S. 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all Reinforcing Steel work
indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included in this Section:
1. Reinforcing steel for all concrete foundations, footings, beams, slabs, walls, steps,
and other reinforced concrete work as shown on the Drawings.
2. Plastic jackets for slip dowels.
3. All chairs, bolsters, ties, and wire necessary to tie steel and hold reinforcing in
position.
4. Shop Drawings for all items included herein.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Concrete
B. Section 04200 - Masonry Reinforcement
10
4
REINFORCING STEEL 2516
03200.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following.
1. ACI 315 - Manual of Standard Practice.
2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete.
3. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice.
4. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars.
5. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and
Nomenclature.
B. Supervision - Perform reinforcing steel work under direct supervision of General
Contractor's Superintendent: Refer to General Conditions.
0
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Furnish shop drawings of all reinforcing steel; show bar sizes, spacing, bends, splices, 4,
chairs, supports, and accessories pertinent to fabricating and placing reinforcing steel.
1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of registered professional engineer.
C. Samples: Submit samples of proprietary materials if requested by Architect.
,It
D. Submit, at time of delivery, certified copies of mill test report of reinforcing being
furnished, giving physical and chemical analysis.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 0
A. Store reinforcing steel on platforms or supports in a manner to prevent bending,
twisting, or other damage. Placing material on bare ground will not be permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 0
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All reinforcing steel for poured -in -place concrete construction shall be deformed
billet steel bars with a minimum yield strength of not less than 60,000 psi. Latest
ASTM Specifications A-615, Grade 60, shall apply.
B. All steel shall be domestic steel.
C. Bars shall be free from flaws or mill defects and must be cleaned of all loose rust, fro'
scale, grease, paint, or other coatings before being used. Warehouse stocks, if badly
rusted in cross section, will not be acceptable.
io
+ 2516 REINFORCING STEEL
03200.3
a
D. All rods and other steel shall be bent to the required shape before being placed in the
forms. No splicing or welding of the rods shall be allowed between the supports of
any beams or floor slab or unsupported lengths of any column unless such splice or
weld is designed and detailed by the Architect.
E. At all locations where slip dowels are indicated thru expansion joints, provide plastic
jacket for one end of each dowel.
F. Inserts shall be of the sizes and types indicated on the Drawings and shall be of
malleable iron equal to those manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. Bolts
meeting ASTM A-307, or proper size and 1/2" to 3/4" longer, overall length, than the
depth of this insert, shall be provided in each threaded insert.
G. Supports for Reinforcement:
1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other
devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire
fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI
recommendations, unless otherwise acceptable.
2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where
base material will not support chair legs.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315.
B. Locate reinforcing splices, not indicated on drawings, at points of minimum stress.
Location of splices shall be reviewed by Architect.
C. Where indicated, weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned and, unless otherwise shown or
specified, shall be secured against displacement by using, at intersections, annealed
e iron wire of not less than No. 18 gauge or suitable metal clips.
B. Reinforcement shall be supported by hangers where necessary, and shall be supported
by metal chairs, bolsters, and spacers in accordance with the "Specifications for
Placing Accessories" contained in "A Manual of Standard Practice", latest edition, as
published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
C. All spacing of bars shall be as shown on drawings, and in general, reinforcement shall
be placed spliced, lapped, bent, located, etc., in accordance with the recommendations
it
REINFORCING STEEL 2516
03200.4
of the American Concrete Institute as set forth in ACI publication 315 and 318,
current editions.
•
3.02 CONCRETE PROTECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT
A. The reinforcement shall be protected by the thickness of concrete indicated on the
drawings. Where not otherwise shown, the thickness of concrete over the !
reinforcement shall be:
1. Where concrete is deposited against the ground without the use of forms, not less
than three (3) inches; where concrete may be exposed to the ground, but is placed
in forms, not less than two (2) inches: where concrete may be exposed to the
weather, not less than 1 1/2" for #5 bars and smaller, and not exposed to the
ground or to weather, not less than 3/4".
2. In beams not exposed to the ground or to weather, not less than 1 1/2". In all
cases the thickness of concrete over the reinforcement shall be at least equal to the
diameter of the bars.
END OF SECTION
f
.0
4
r
0
y
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Provisions, Supplementary General Conditions,
r and Division 1, General Provisions, which shall govern work under this Section
whether attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Cast -in -Place Concrete work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Other trades requiring work to be built into concrete will provide such work prior to
depositing concrete. Provide access to locations of such items of work; coordinate
and cooperate with other trades requiring such work to be built into concrete or form
work; set items securely. Notify all interested trades of intention to place concrete,
allow time for installation of their work and ascertain that their work is in place
A before depositing concrete. Protect such work from displacement or damage during
depositing of concrete.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the installation of all Cast -in -Place concrete work indicated or reasonably
inferred from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Concrete footings, grade beams, floor slabs and other cast -in -place concrete
items.
2. Patching and joining new concrete at existing.
3. Concrete finishes.
L
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services
B. Section 02520 - Site Concrete Work and Paving
C. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
D. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
E. Section 07150 - Plastic Film Waterproofing
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards - Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications
and standards (current edition) except where more stringent requirements are shown
or specified.
f
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. C-31 Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure.
2. C-33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C-39 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete
Cylinders.
t
4. C-42 Methods of Securing, Preparing, and Testing Specimens from
Hardened Concrete for Compressive and Flexural Strengths.
5. C-94 Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete.
6. C-143 Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
7. C-150 Specifications for Portland Cement.
8. C-172 Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete.
9. C-192 Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure
Test Specimens in the Laboratory.
10. C-231 Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method.
11. C-260 Specifications for Air -Entraining Admixtures.
12. C-494 Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for concrete.
The Contractor shall comply with the above standards; should copies be required, they
may be obtained at the Contractor's expense from:
American Society for Testing and Materials
,
1916 Race St.
Philadelphia 3, Pennsylvania 19103
C. American Concrete Institute: (Current Issue Required)
1. ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compression
Test Results of Field Concrete.
2. ACI 211 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for
Concrete.
3. ACI 301 Suggested Specification for Structural Concrete Building.
0
2516
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300.3
0
4. ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and Placing
Concrete.
5. ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.
6. ACI 306 Recommended Practice for Winter Concreting.
7. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
8. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
The Contractor shall comply with the above standards; should copies be required, they
may be obtained at the Contractor's expense from:
American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 4754
Redford Station
Detroit 19, Michigan 48219
D. Supervision: Perform reinforced concrete work under direct supervision of General
Contractor's Superintendent: (Refer to General Conditions). Superintendent shall
control the following:
1. Tying and placing reinforcing steel.
2. Construction, bracing, alignment of forms.
3. Mixing, placing of concrete.
4. Placement of sleeves or anchors required by other trades.
5. Finishing.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching
compounds, joint filler systems, curing compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and
other items as requested by Architect.
C. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise requested by
Architect, including names, sources and descriptions.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Store cement and other packaged goods in weather -tight sheds. Placing of materials
on bare ground will not be permitted.
B. Deliver packaged materials to job in original unopened packages or containers
sk bearing manufacturer's labels.
C. Aggregates shall be stored and handled to preserve the gradation and cleanliness of
the materials. Segregation and/or contamination are causes for rejection.
lb
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.4
D. Cement shall be stored to prevent deterioration or contamination. Cement which has
become caked, partially set or otherwise deteriorated, damaged or contaminated shall
be rejected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
41
A. Cement: The cement shall be Portland Cement, Type 1, conforming to ASTM
Specifications C-150, latest revision. Use only one brand throughout. Take special
care to provide same color cement for all exposed concrete. Submit brand name and •
mill reports for approval; use no cement in the job unless it is of the brand and lot
tested and approved. Sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM C-183, latest
revision.
B. Admixtures:
1.
Prevailing weather conditions will determine the extent of usage of admixtures.
Refer to manufacturer for recommendations.
2.
Air entraining agent: Neutralized vinsol resin solution or approved substitute,
conforming to ASTM C-260.
3.
Water -reducing, set -controlling admixture: Pozzolith as manufactured by Master
Builders, Cleveland, Ohio.
4.
Fly ash will not be allowed in concrete mix.
5.
The admixture shall produce concrete with the following specific qualities as
required in this Division:
a. Workability
b. Entrained Air content
c. Controlled Rate of Hardening
d. Compressive and/or Flexural Strength
6.
Provide proof of a minimum of ten years actual experience and field service using
the exact formulation and dosage for which approval is requested. Only products
with an established field record will be approved.
7.
The admixture manufacturer shall provide a certified test result showing the
admixture exceeds the minimum requirements of ASTM C-494.
8.
Field service shall be available. A qualified concrete technician of the admixture
manufacturer shall assist in the preparation of design mixes at the testing
laboratory and during critical periods of the batching and placing of concrete.
,
C. Water: Use Potable water available at plant or jobsite.
D. Aggregates: Gravel and sand conforming to ASTM C-33, clean, hard and durable,
uncoated particles, free from clay, loam and other deleterious matter. Submit sources
of gravel and sand for approval; use only material from approved sources. Sieve
analysis method shall conform to ASTM C-136, latest revisions.
1. Coarse Aggregate - Hard, durable gravel, conforming to ASTM C-33:
0
2516 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300.5
SIEVE SIZE
PER CENT PASSING
1-1/2 inch
100
3/4 inch
35 - 70
3/8 inch
10 - 30
No. 4 sieve
0-5
2. Fine Aggregate - Clean and graded as follow:
SIEVE SIZE
PER CENT PASSING
4 3/8 inch
100
No. 4
95 - 100
No. 16
45 - 80
No. 100
10 - 30
Ll
2.02 CONCRETE RELATED MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent: Permagile Corporation's "Uniweld" epoxy compound or approved
equal.
1
B. Concrete Cleaner: Steelcote "Clean & Etch" phosphoric acid degreasing agent,
Wilbur & Williams Co. "Tuf-Quick Crete -Clean", Sure Klean Degreaser & Etch by
Pro So Co., Inc., or approved equal.
. C. Chemical hardener: Chemical hardener for exposed concrete floors to be 'Lapidolith'
by Sonneborn or'Hornolith' by A.C. Horn.
D. Floor Sealer: Kemiko "Transcel No. 5A Crystal Clear Sealer" or approved equal.
E. Epoxy Adhesive: "Epogel" High strength, high modulus , non -sag epoxy gel
adhesive by Sonneborn of equal.
2.03 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE
A. Composition: The concrete shall be composed of Portland Cement, fine aggregate,
coarse aggregate, water, admixture, and as required, air -entraining agent.
B. Proportion of Mixture: The concrete shall be homogeneous, readily placeable and
uniformly workable and shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI-214 to attain
properties of strength, slump, entrained air content and rate of hardening in
conformance with the following requirements:
1. Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate: Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be
not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between the sides of the
forms of the member for which the concrete is to be used, nor larger than three -
fourths the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.
2. Strengths and Slumps: The following are the specified compressive strengths and
maximum slumps:
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.6
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS SLUMP
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION 28 DAYS PSI (minimum) INCH
Grade Walls & Beams 3000 5
Slabs -on -Grade 3000 5-6
3. Air Entrainment: The air content in all concrete exposed to weathering shall be
5% plus or minus 1% for 3/4 " aggregate concrete.
4. Rate of Hardening of Concrete:
a. For climatic conditions and structural concrete construction the concrete mix
shall be adjusted to produce the required rate of hardening.
REQUIRED RATE OF
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HARDENING
Over 90 degrees F Retard
Under 50 degrees F Accelerate
b. All other concretes shall have normal rate of hardening. Should the
Contractor find it advantageous to use concretes with modified rates of
hardening to facilitate his work and improve workmanship, consideration for
approval will be given by the Architect/Engineer upon submission of f
laboratory test data.
5. Limits: All concrete shall be proportioned to meet strength, workability and
durability requirements in accordance with ACI-301, ACI-318, and local building
code requirements.
6. The concrete shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.41b/lb of cement.
2.04 MIXING
A. Equipment: All concrete under these Specifications shall be machine mixed.
Adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and control of all
materials shall be provided for readily changing the proportions to conform with
varying conditions of work.
B. Method of Mixing:
1. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Shall be used throughout. (ASTM C-94, 58.4 alternate
No. 2).
a. Concrete Ready -Mixed shall be used in preference to concrete mixed at the
job, and shall conform to the "Specifications for Ready -Mixed Concrete",
ASTM C-94, except as modified herein. The plant shall have sufficient '
capacity and transportation equipment to deliver at the rate required.
b. Water may be added to the mix at the job site by an experienced materials
engineer in order to develop design workability but only to the extent that the
water/cement ratio does not exceed 0.4 lb/lb.
c. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of
concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 will be required
when air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is
above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
CJ
2516 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300.7
C. Central Mixing:
1. All concrete shall have an initial mixing at the plant of not less than 1 minute after
all materials, including water, are in the mixer and shall be transported in clean
water -tight receptacles equipped with an agitator device which shall be operated
until the concrete is discharged.
2. Mixing Time: Minimum time for mixing each batch after raw materials are in the
mixer shall be 1 minute for batches 1 1/2 cubic yards or smaller and shall be 1 1/2
minutes for batches larger than 1 1/2 cubic yards in size. The speed or volume
capacity of the mixer shall not exceed those recommended by the manufacturer of
the mixer. Excessive over -mixing, requiring additions of water to preserve the
required consistency, will not be permitted.
D. Batching:
1. Cold Weather Batching (ACI 306): When the temperature is below 40 degrees F
or is likely to fall below 40 degrees F during the 24-hour period after placing,
equipment shall be provided for heating the concrete materials meeting the
approval of the Architect/Engineer. No frozen materials or materials containing
ice shall be used in cold weather. Temperatures of the separate materials,
including the mixing water, when placed in the mixer shall not exceed 100
degrees F. When placed in forms the concrete shall have a temperature between
50 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
.
2. Hot Weather Batching (ACI-305): During hot weather, the temperature of the
cement, aggregates and mixing water at the time delivered to job site will be less
than 90 degrees F.
E. Retempering: Concrete shall be mixed in such quantities as are required for
immediate use and shall be placed while fresh, before loss of slump occurs.
Retempering (adding water to restore slump lost during excessive mixing or due to
too long a lapse of time since initial mixing) will not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
4
c"K1710O7:7u (.v
A. Provide in accordance with Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
s
3.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Provide in accordance with Section 03200 - Reinforcing Steel
a
a
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.8
3.03 NOTIFICATION
A. Notify Architect of time schedule for any pouring operation at least 24 hours prior to
start of placing an order that he may inspect form and reinforcing conditions prior to
placing concrete.
B. Furnish adequate light and access to all parts of the work.
3.04 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: The use and location of monolithic construction joints shall be
subject to prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. In general, they shall be in •
accordance with the following.
1. Preparation of joints: The surface of the concrete shall be roughened, thoroughly
cleaned, and all laitance removed. In addition to the foregoing, joints shall be
thoroughly wetted and slushed with a coat of neat cement grout immediately
before placing of new concrete.
2. Joints in Horizontal Members: Construction joints in floors shall be located as
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs and
between walls and footings. Place construction joints perpendicular to main
reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. 10
3.05 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Set and build into work all anchorage devices, inserts, pipe sleeves, drains, hangers,
metal ties, reglets, anchor slots, nailing strips, blocking and other required devices for
attaching to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
B. Penetrations Through Structural Concrete:
1. Locations of sleeves or other penetrations through beams, floors, etc., shall be
reviewed by the Structural Engineer, prior to placement. Generally, the criteria
for placement are:
a. Concrete Beams: Only within the mid 1/3 section of the beam depth, and only
within the mid 1/4 span of the beam length.
2. All penetrations shall be sleeved with Sched. 40 galvanized steel pipe, 2" i.d.
larger than outside diameter of penetrating pipe or conduit. Annular space shall
be packed and sealed at all floors, exterior beams, and exterior basement walls.
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT, GENERAL a
A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork
installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other
6
2516 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300.9
a
crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such
work.
B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of
forms and reinforcing steel.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of ACI 304 for placing concrete. Deposit
concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on
concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide approved construction
joints. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final location to avoid
segregation.
D. Conveying: Concrete shall be conveyed rapidly from mixer to forms by methods that
will prevent segregation.
E. Bleeding (Water Gain): The Architect shall determine prior to placing of concrete the
r allowable bleeding. It shall then be the Contractor's responsibility to remain within
that limit. Excessive bleeding will because for rejecting concrete.
F. New Concrete on Set Concrete: Before depositing new concrete on or against
concrete which has set, the forms shall be reset, the surfaces of the set concrete shall
be roughened thoroughly and cleaned of all foreign matter and laitance. It shall be
saturated with water, slushed with a coat of mortar grout and the concrete placed
while the grout is still soft.
3.07 PLACING CONCRETE BEAMS, SLABS, ETC.
A. Concrete shall be placed and consolidated in a continuous operation in final location
within 90 minutes of initial batching of the mix. Any concrete remaining in the
hopper, drum, etc., shall not be placed and shall be promptly removed from the site.
B. In preparation for the placing of concrete, all construction debris and extraneous
matter shall be removed from within the forms. Struts, stays, bracing and blocks,
serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment, shall be
removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their services
unnecessary. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall be placed on clean, damp
surfaces, free from any standing water, or upon properly consolidated fills, but never
upon soft mud or dry porous earth.
C. Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers (approximately 18" in thickness ) to
avoid flowing along the forms. Placement shall be carried on at such a rate that all
concrete surfaces not yet to grade shall not have reached their initial set before
additional concrete is placed thereon.
C
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.10
D. Concrete shall be consolidated by means of mechanical vibrating equipment.
Vibrators shall be inserted and removed vertically (not dragged horizontally) at such
regular intervals as to insure uniform consolidation throughout the entire section of a
concrete being placed. In no case shall vibrators by used to transport concrete inside
the forms. Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than 7,000 impulses
per minute when in operation submerged in concrete. The number of vibrators used
shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete properly. At least one standby vibrator
shall be on hand at all times that concrete is being placed. Concrete having a slump
in excess of the specified at the point of placement will be rejected.
3.08 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. Inspection:
1. Architect and the Owner's Representative shall have access to all points where
concrete materials are stored, proportioned or mixed. All materials, equipment
and methods shall be subject to his inspection, test and approval.
2. Prior to concreting operation, or at any time during concreting operations, the
Owner may have an independent testing and/or inspection laboratory sample and t
test the concrete material and the concrete in accordance with ASTM and ACI
Standards to verify their conformance with the Specifications. Refer to Section
01410 Testing of Materials.
B. Test Specimens: �!
1. The Contractor will make arrangements with an Independent laboratory for
making strength tests. The laboratory representative will take the samples and fill
the molds: The Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory representative and
shall store all test specimens at the site of the work in accordance with ASTM C-
39 or C-109. The information required on each test shall include air content and
slump as well as compressive strength and other required information. Copies
will be forwarded to the Architect and Contractor.
2. Strength tests will be taken of each class of concrete as indicated in Section 01410
Testing Laboratory Services.
3. Where there is a question as to the quality of the concrete in the structure because
of strength -test failures, approval or direction may be given by the Engineer to
have alternate strength tests made on specimens secured from the structure in
accordance with ASTM Method of Test C-42, or the actual load tests made in
accordance with Building Code Requirements ACI-318. Basis of acceptance (or
rejection) of the quality of the concrete by these alternate tests shall be agreed
upon by the Engineer and the Contractor at the time the approval of such tests is
obtained.
3.09 PATCHING AND JOINING NEW CONCRETE AT EXISTING
A. Patching
1. General:
40
0
«" 2516 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300.11
a. Prepare samples of patching material where patch will be exposed to view.
Add white cement as necessary to insure that patch blends with hardened
concrete. Patching of concrete is acceptable only where specifically approved
by the Architect.
b. Before mortar or concrete is placed in patches, the surrounding concrete shall
be kept wet for several hours.
C. A grout of cement and water mixed to the consistency of paint shall be
brushed into the surfaces to which the new material is to be bonded.
d. Start curing of patched areas as soon as possible.
2. High Areas: Where finished elevation is out of specified tolerance, make repairs
to bring the slabs within tolerance where specified finish floor will conceal repair.
Grind high spots down.
3. Misaligned: Consider any concrete which is not formed as shown on the plans, or
for any reason is out of alignment or level or shows specifications and shall be
removed from the job by the Contractor at his expense. The Architect may grant
permission to patch the defective area, however, do not consider such permission
as a waiver of the Architect's right to require complete removal of the defective
work if the patching does not, in his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality and
appearance of the surface.
4. Honeycombed and Defective Areas: Chip out to solid concrete. Slightly
undercut the edges to provide a key at the edge of the patch.
5. Shallow Patches: Low spots shall be filled with epoxy type underlayment of a
type approved by the manufacturer of the finish floor product type scheduled to
be installed on the patched area.
6. Large and Deep Patches: Fill with concrete held in place by forms. Reinforce
and dowel to the hardened concrete.
B. Joining New Concrete to Existing:
1. Surface Preparation: Clean and wash contact surfaces of existing concrete with
specified acid cleaner. Apply cleaner undiluted and spread with stiff brush at a
rate of 1 quart per 25 square feet; scrub cleaner into existing concrete surface for
several minutes without allowing solution to dry; apply water to scrubbed area at
the rate of 1 pint per 25 square feet, scrub for additional 3 to 5 minutes, then
sweep or mop the area; rinse the cleaned area with water, mop up, squeegee,
allow to dry.
2. Application of New Concrete: When existing concrete surfaces are thoroughly
dry and immediately prior to placing new concrete, mix and apply specified
epoxy bonding agent in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Place specified new concrete.
3. Where steel dowels are shown to be placed into existing concrete, drill into
existing concrete no more than 11,V diameter larger than the dowel, depth as
shown on the drawings. Remove all dust and dirt with brush and compressed air.
Apply epoxy gel into hole filling half full, butting dowel and forcing into hole,
twisting until it bottoms out.
LAI
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.12
3.10 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough Form Finish (for formed concrete surfaces not exposed -to -view in the finish 46
work) Concrete surface texture shall be as imparted by form material used, with tie
holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections rubbed
down or chipped off as approved.
B. Smooth Form Finish (for formed concrete surfaces exposed -to -view, or that are to be .
covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, painting and similar systems) Surface as obtained with approved form
facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch defective areas as required by Architect with fins and other
projections completely removed and smoothed.
C. All concrete surfaces above finished grade shall receive a "rubbed" finish as follows:
1. Immediately after removal of forms all irregularities shall be removed from
exposed surfaces. Honeycombs, pocks, chips, etc., shall be patched to provide
smooth surface.
2. All exposed surfaces shall be rubbed with a coarse carborundum stone as
necessary to remove burrs, fins, ridges, protrusions, and irregularities and to
provide even surfaces and true, uniform corners and edges.
3. The final rubbing shall consist of rubbing the surfaces with a medium stone, using
a moderate amount of water splashed on with a brush, until paste is formed.
Spread this paste uniformly over the surface and allow to reset, after which, finish r
surface by rubbing down with a dry cloth. Finish exterior surfaces 2" below
finish grade.
4. The final rubbing shall be so accomplished as to provide a uniform color and
texture throughout. After final rubbing, surfaces shall be protected against
damage or staining. Any areas damaged or discolored prior to final acceptance
shall be re -rubbed to provide the uniform finish required. Repair and patch
defective areas as required by Architect with fins and other projections
completely removed and smoothed.
D. Miscellaneous Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across adjacent uniformed surfaces, unless otherwise directed.
3.11 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
•
A. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed -to -
view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint and other
thin finish coating systems.
1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. is
Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved
over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free
of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane
U�
u
rl 2516 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03300.13
tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straight edge. Grind
smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering
system.
2. Concrete floor slabs are to be free of any foreign substances (wax, oil, paints, etc.)
or surface irregularities which may affect the final appearance of installed floor
finished such as carpet or resilient flooring.
M
B. Non -Slip Broom Finish: Apply non -slip medium broom finish to exterior concrete
platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown or directed.
1. Immediately after trowel finishing, roughen concrete surface by brooming with
fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final
finish with Architect before application.
C. Exposed Concrete Floor Slabs with Hardener: Protect concrete floors exposed in the
completed building from damage during construction. After slabs have cured a
minimum of six weeks, thoroughly scrub to remove surface dirt, grease and other
foreign matter. Acid wash, rinse, allow to dry and apply specified hardener in strict
accordance with manufacturer's written directions. Apply hardener in three
applications in accordance with Coverage Chart as published by manufacturer in all
areas scheduled to receive exposed concrete (Includes all entries, porticos,
mechanical rooms, and storage rooms). Apply hardener in four applications at
exterior receiving dock scheduled to receive a non-skid (broom) finish.
1. Furnish Owner with certificate of coverage signed by manufacturer's authorized
representative.
2. Furnish Owner with a five-year written guarantee against dusting as provided
manufacturer.
3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. All concrete including concrete topping, shall be cured for a period of not less than 7
days by one of the approved methods listed below with approval of the
Architect/Engineer. During this curing period no part of the concrete shall be
+� permitted to become dry. The curing medium shall be applied so as to prevent the
checking and cracking of the surface of the concrete immediately after placing and it
shall be maintained so as to prevent loss of water from the concrete for the duration of
the entire curing period.
1. Fresh concrete shall be protected from heavy rains, flowing water and mechanical
r injury. All concrete shall be protected from injurious action of the sun.
2. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Water Curing: Concrete shall be kept wet by mechanical sprinklers or by any other
approved method which will keep the surfaces continuously wet. Provide sand berm
at the perimeter of the slab in order to pond water over the entire slab area.
41
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2516
03300.14
C. Saturated Sand Curing: Finished surfaces shall be covered with a minimum of 1"
thickness of sand which shall be kept uniformly distributed and continuously
saturated during the entire curing period.
D. Paper Curing: Waterproof Paper conforming to ASTM C-171 or opaque
polyethylene film may be used. Concrete shall be covered immediately following the
final finishing operation. The paper or film must be anchored securely and all edges
sealed or applied in such a manner as to prevent moisture escaping from the concrete.
3.13 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Remove forms in a manner and at such time to insure complete safety of the structure.
In no case shall supporting forms or shoring be removed until sufficient strength has
been obtained to support weight and load. Results of test cylinders shall be used as
evidence that concrete has obtained required strength. Reshoring as required by the
Architect/Engineer shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,
and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 degrees F. for 48 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing
and protection operations are maintained.
r
3.14 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work
by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in •
place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to
complete work.
B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to
template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
END OF SECTION
•
•
0
•
SECTION 04100 - MASONRY MORTAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
. and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Masonry Mortar work. Verify all dimensions and conditions
at the site.
C. Reference to the term Contractor shall be construed as the Contractor for this Section
of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
is 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
• B. Built-in items of other trades; cooperate with other trades for proper installation of
such items, provide access to Masonry work at the various stages of construction as
required, confer with other trades to ascertain that their work is in place, protect such
work during execution of masonry work, and execute bedding for such work.
U
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
f provide all Mortar for the Unit Masonry work as indicated or reasonably inferred
from the Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the
site.
B. Work Included in this Section:
1. Mortar and grout for masonry work.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
• B. Section 04430 — Stone Masonry
6
MASONRY MORTAR 2516
04100.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with: 416
1. ANSI/NBS 211 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
2. International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council (IMIAC) Recommended
Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
U7
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Submit manufacturer's product information and technical data sheets for admixtures
and proprietary materials if proposed for use.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Maintain mortar materials and ambient air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F
prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. Cold Weather Requirements - Comply with applicable requirements of IMIAC -
Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry
Construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Portland Cement - ASTM C150, Type I. Provide white cement as required to
produce required mortar color for face brick or stone.
B. Hydrated Lime - ASTM C207, Type S. >>
C. Aggregates - ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded with
100% passing the No. 16 sieve. (White sand for stone masonry)
D. Admixtures: As recommended by Contractor and approved by Architect. f
E. Mortar color - Pure, substantially non -fading mineral pigments shall be equal to
"Starbrite" as manufactured by A.C. Horn Co. Quality of coloring agent shall be as
required to produce color directed by the Architect, but not in excess of mixing
proportions recommended by the manufacturer. It
F. Water - Fresh, clean, suitable for drinking.
2516 MASONRY MORTAR
04100.3
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General
1. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti -freeze
agents.
2. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
3. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients, in quantities needed for immediate use.
4. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Ensure uniformity of mix and coloration. Any areas of
masonry work which show variations in color or mortar shall be removed and
replaced with mortar matching the surrounding area.
B. Mortar mixes (See Section 04200 and 04430 for strength types)
1. For face brick: white cement -lime -sand by volume with colorant added as
required to match approved mortar color.
2. For stone: white cement -lime white sand.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
r A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with Section 04200.
END OF SECTION
B
UA
11
a
f
SECTION 04150 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
. and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe Masonry Accessories. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
the site.
C. Reference to the term Contractor shall be construed as the Contractor for this Section
of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
r B. Built-in items of other trades; cooperate with other trades for proper installation of
such items, provide access to masonry work at the various stages of construction as
required, confer with other trades to ascertain that their work is in place, protect such
work during execution of masonry work, and execute bedding for such work.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
furnish Masonry Accessories as indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the site.
B. Work Included in this Section:
1. Horizontal joint reinforcement.
♦ 2. Wall ties.
3. Through -wall flashings, except membrane flashing.
4. Rope weeps
1.04 RELATED WORK
t
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
B. Section 04430 — Stone Masonry
0
MASONRY ACCESSORIES 2516
04150.2
C. Section 07600 -Flashing and Sheet Metal
L7
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single responsibility - To the maximum extent possible, provide masonry accessories
from one manufacturer only.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing material order, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of
masonry accessory proposed for use.
2. Submit two (2) samples of each of the following items: ties, fixed anchors,
ladders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Joint reinforcement - Truss type galvanized standard weight (9 gauge side rods and
cross ties), Dur-O-Wall or approved equal of proper width for wythe reinforced.
Provide factory fabricated corners and intersection as required.
a
B. Corrugated Wall Ties - Galvanized 20 gauge steel, 7/8" by required length to
penetrate bed depth min. 2".
C. Plastic Tube Weeps - Heckman No. 330, 1/4" i.d.<Rope weeps: 1/4" i.d., cotton. >
D. Thru-wall Flashings: 0
1. Thru-wall flashings required to be built into masonry will be furnished under
other Sections of this Specification for installation by the Masonry Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION r
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Install masonry accessories in accordance with Section 04200.
END OF SECTION
0
•
SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
00 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Unit Masonry work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
a/ B. Built-in items of other trades; cooperate with other trades for proper installation of
such items, provide access to masonry work at the various stages of construction as
required, confer with other trades to ascertain that their work is in place, protect such
work during execution of Unit Masonry work, and execute bedding for such work.
C. Build openings, slots and chases into walls as shown on Drawings or as required by
other trades; confer with mechanical and electrical trades as any such item omitted
shall be cut by this Contractor without charge.
to 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the installation of all Unit Masonry work as indicated or reasonably inferred
from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included in this Section:
1. Face brick.
11 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place -Concrete
0
UNIT MASONRY 2516
04200.2
B. Section 04100 - Masonry Mortar
C. Section 04150 — Masonry Accessories
D. Section 04430 — Stone Masonry
E. Section 07150 - Water Repellent
F. Section 07900 - Sealants for control joints in masonry work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform masonry work in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI/NBS
211 and as specified herein.
B. When requested by Architect, provide evidence and test data confirming that masonry
units conform to standards specified herein.
C. Construction Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb - For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and
arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor
1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2"
in 40' or more.
2. Variation from Level - For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20'
maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line - For position shown in plan and related portion
of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum,
nor 3/4" in 40' or more.
4. Variation in Cross -Sectional Dimensions - For columns and thickness of walls,
from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2".
5. Maintain flush face on exposed masonry surfaces. a
D. Job Mock -Up - Prior to start of masonry work, erect sample exterior wall panel using
materials, bond, joint color and tooling as standard for final work. Provide special
features as directed. Build at site, where directed, approximately 4 ft.. long by 3 ft..
high indicating proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in
the completed work. Obtain Architect's approval of visual qualities of mock-up
before start of masonry work. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for
judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work
is completed. Provide mock-up panel for typical exterior face brick wall.
E. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with requirements of the following:
1. ANSI A41.1/NBS 211 -Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
CA
2516 UNIT MASONRY
04200.3
1.06 SUBMITTALS
♦ A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Product data - If requested by Architect, submit data substantiating masonry products
compliance with specified requirements.
C. Prior to placing material order, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of
masonry accessory proposed for use.
2. Submit two (2) samples of each of the following items: ties, fixed anchors,
ladders.
•
D. Samples:
1. For selection of color and texture, submit the following:
a. Face brick samples showing range of colors and textures available in products
complying with specified requirements. Following preliminary selection of
colors and textures submit samples consisting of 5 individual bricks of each
color and texture under consideration. Include in each set the maximum
variation to be expected in finished work.
b. Concrete masonry units showing nominal unit and all special shapes, textures,
etc., including bullnose unit, pilasters, etc.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Ll
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees. F. prior
to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. During freezing or near freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to
maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees. F. and to protect masonry work
completed or in progress.
It C. Store cement or other packaged goods in weather tight shed; store aggregates in bins,
hoppers, or on wood platforms, store masonry units on wood platforms and cover at
all times with waterproof covers. Placing of materials on bare ground will not be
permitted.
1.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect top of unfinished work at night, during inclement weather and during delays
in work. Protect corners, sills or other points subject to damage. Provide such
protection without damaging completed work. Extend covers down wall 24" and
anchor in place.
0
UNIT MASONRY 2516
04200.4
B. After masonry has been completed, with exception of pointing up, thoroughly clean
masonry of mortar, stains, and other discoloration, using agents which will not
discolor or damage work. 0
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK
A. Face Brick -Modular
1. Comply with ASTM C-216, Grade SW, Type FBS.
2. Two Colors are required.
3. All face brick shall be provided with usual core holes. In addition, provide a
quantity of solid brick with no core holes for use where the width face is exposed
to sight or weather and where shown on Drawings.
4. Refer to Section 01020 — Allowances for purchase of Face Brick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP, GENERAL
A. Place masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on drawings. Before
commencing to set masonry units, lay out courses and wall faces to maintain plumb,
even construction and uniform joints; provide balances, symmetrical facings between
columns, piers, pilasters, openings, intersecting partitions and walls, etc.
B. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections.
C. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control
joint, with mortar raked back 1/4" regardless of joint treatment.
0
EA
D. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace. -1
E. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry with approved power tools to provide straight and
true, unchipped edges.
F. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints
equal and of uniform thickness. Lay in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other
work.
G. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking masonry
corners.
H. Built -In Work
1. As work progresses, built-in items specified under this and other sections of these
specifications, fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
19
1
r 2516 UNIT MASONRY
04200.5
2. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar.
i 1. Rake joints for caulking or sealants where masonry abuts other work.
0
J. Provide weep holes approximately 32" o.c. in bottom course of masonry over lintels
and at the lowest course above grade of exterior walls by means of rope weeps, not by
means of omitting head joint mortar.
3.02 MORTAR, BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Use ASTM C-270, Type S mortar for exterior walls.
B. Batch Control:
1. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required
proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Include
mortar color where required. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not
be permitted.
2. Mix mortars with amount of water consistent with workability to provide
maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar.
3. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer.
Use water clean and free of deleterious materials. Do not use mortar which has
' begun to set, or if more than 2 1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing.
Retemper mortar during 2 1/2 hour period as required to restore workability.
C. Lay brick and other solid masonry units with completely filled bed, head and collar
joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do
At not slush head joints.
D. Joints - Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain
bond alignment. Unless otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints
flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other
materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for
application of caulking or sealants where shown.
E. Control joints in brick
1. Control joints indicated on drawings are intended to provide planes of weakness
in masonry work to relieve stresses due to expansion, contraction or other
movement. Interrupt masonry reinforcement at all control joints.
2. Provide control joints in face brick at spacing as shown or directed, at maximum
30 ft. spacing.
F. Bond Patterns, unless otherwise shown:
it 1. Brick - One half bond.
UNIT MASONRY 2516
04200.6
3.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A. Place masonry reinforcing and anchorages for unit masonry as follows:
1. Embed wall ties for face brick at maximum 24" on center vertically and 16" on
center horizontally.
2. Secure brick veneer to stud framed back-up with wall ties attached to studs at
maximum 24" on center vertically and 16" on center horizontally.
3. Provide additional ties at maximum of 3 ft. centers around openings and within «
12" of opening.
3.04 CLEANING AND POINTING
A. Keep masonry surfaces clean during progress of the work; do not allow mortar
extrusions or drippings to dry on masonry surfaces. Wipe surfaces with damp cloth
and brush as necessary. DO NOT allow scaffolding, etc. to touch wall surfaces.
B. After completion of masonry work and adjacent work liable to soil masonry, point up
any defective joints, holes, cracks, voids, etc., and clean all exposed masonry surfaces
from top down with stiff fiber brushes, cleaning tools and clean water. NO ACID OF
ANY KIND SHOULD BE USED IN CLEANING PROCESS. Leave completed
masonry free of stains, dirt, mortar droppings and defects in workmanship and
materials.
C. Keep all hods, carriers, mortar boards, tools and other items required for this work in
a clean condition, remove unused mortar waste while still fresh.
3.05 CLEAN-UP 0
A. All floors and surrounding areas shall be kept clean of mortar droppings, bats, etc. at
all times. All exterior areas shall be kept clean of debris caused by this Contractor at
all times and entire project left clean at the completion of masonry work.
B. Remove sample panel(s) from site when directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
0
0
SECTION 04430 STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Stone Masonry work. Verify all dimensions and conditions
at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Built-in items of other trades; cooperate with other trades for proper installation of
such items, provide access to masonry work at the various stages of construction as
required, confer with other trades to ascertain that their work is in place, protect such
work during execution of Stone Masonry work, and execute bedding for such work.
C. Build openings, slots and chases into walls as shown on Drawings or as required by
other trades; confer with mechanical and electrical trades as any such item omitted
shall be cut by this Contractor without charge.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the installation of all Stone Masonry work indicated or reasonably inferred
from the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Stone Masonry
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place -Concrete.
0
B. Section 04100 - Masonry Mortar.
C. Section 04150 - Masonry Accessories.
0
STONE MASONRY 2516
04430.2
D. Section 05500 - Metal fabrications to be built in masonry work.
E. Section 07150 - Water Repellent
F. Section 07900 - Sealants for control joints in masonry work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE w
A. Perform masonry work in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI/NBS
211 and as specified herein.
B. Construction Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb - For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and
arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor
1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and
other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2"
in 40' or more.
2. Variation of Linear Building Line - For position shown in plan and related portion
of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum,
nor 3/4" in 40' or more.
C. Job Mock -Up - Prior to start of masonry work, erect sample exterior wall panel using
materials, bond, joint color and tooling as standard for final work. Provide special i
features as directed. Build at site, where directed, approximately 4 ft.. long by 3 ft..
high indicating proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in
the completed work. Obtain Architect's approval of visual qualities of mock-up
before start of masonry work. Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for
judging completed masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up until work
is completed. Provide mock-up panel for the typical stone masonry wall.
D. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with requirements of the following:
1. ANSI A41.1/NBS 211 -Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing material order, submit product manufacturer's technical data and
installation instructions for each type of masonry proposed for use.
C. Samples:
1. For selection of color and texture, submit stone samples showing range of colors
and textures available in products complying with specified requirements.
10
0
2516 STONE MASONRY
04430.3
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees. F. prior
to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. During freezing or near freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to
maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees. F. and to protect masonry work
completed or in progress.
C. Store cement or other packaged goods in weather tight shed; store aggregates in bins,
hoppers, or on wood platforms, store masonry units on wood platforms and cover at
all times with waterproof covers. Placing of materials on bare ground will not be
permitted.
1.08 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect top of unfinished work at night, during inclement weather and during delays
j in work. Protect corners, sills or other points subject to damage. Provide such
protection without damaging completed work. Extend covers down wall 24" and
anchor in place.
B. Before pointing, the face of all Stone shall be scrubbed with a fiber brush, using soap
powder and water and shall then be rinsed thoroughly with clean running water. Any
mortar on the face of the Stone shall be removed. No acids or prepared cleaners shall
be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0 2.01 LIMESTONE MASONRY
w
A. Natural limestone from the Georgetown area consisting of white limestone with
seams of slight discolorations, Stone thickness shall be 3" to 4" and in no case
exceed 4". Faces may vary from 3" to 8" in height, lengths will be random.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP, GENERAL
A. Place stone masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on drawings. Lay
out courses and wall faces to maintain plumb, even construction; provide balances,
symmetrical facings between columns, piers, pilasters, openings, intersecting
partitions and walls, etc.
1b B. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections.
C. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control
joint, with mortar raked back 1/4" regardless of joint treatment.
STONE MASONRY 2516
04430.4
D. Do not shift or tap stone masonry after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace. 9
E. Where non -bearing masonry partitions extend to underside of floor, roof deck or
structural system, stop masonry short 3/8 to 1/2" to allow for live load deflection. Fill
gap with preformed joint filler or caulking. Provide structural anchorage for retention
as shown or, if not shown, in accordance with ANSI A41/NBS 211.
F. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking masonry
corners.
G. Built -In Work
1. As work progresses, built-in items specified under this and other sections of these
specifications, fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
2. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar.
H. Rake joints for caulking or sealants where masonry abuts other work.
I. Provide weep holes approximately 32" o.c. in bottom course of masonry over lintels
and at the lowest course above grade of exterior walls by means of rope weeps, not by
means of omitting head joint mortar.
3.02 MORTAR, BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Use ASTM C-270, Type S mortar for exterior walls, and for interior load -bearing
walls and partitions. Use Type O for non -load -bearing interior masonry walls and
partitions.
0
B. Batch Control: •
1. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required
proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Include
mortar color where required. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not
be permitted.
2. Mix mortars with amount of water consistent with workability to provide
maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. A
3. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer.
Use water clean and free of deleterious materials. Do not use mortar which has
begun to set, or if more than 2 1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing.
Retemper mortar during 2 1/2 hour period as required to restore workability.
C. Lay stone masonry with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
D. Joints - Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered
by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in
preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown.
E. Bond Patterns, unless otherwise shown to be roughly squared, ashlar pattern.
it
2516
STONE MASONRY
3.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A
A. Place masonry reinforcing and anchorages for stone masonry as follows:
1. Provide cavity and single wythe walls with horizontal masonry reinforcing in
every second CMU mortar joint (if solid masonry backup is provided).
2. Embed wall ties for stone masonry at maximum 24" on center vertically and 16"
.
on center horizontally.
3. Ensure that anchorages embedded in concrete or attached to structural steel
members are properly placed. Embed free end of anchorages in masonry joints.
4. Secure stone masonry veneer to steel stud framed back-up with wall ties attached
to metal studs at maximum 24" on center vertically and 16" on center
horizontally.
•
5. Provide additional ties at maximum of 3 ft. centers around openings and within
12" of opening.
B. Install specified wall plugs at all locations where trim, molding, nailers, paneling and
other wood finish items are attached to walls. Space plugs a maximum of 16" on
centers along top of masonry to accept all wood blocking. At parapet caps, space
wall plugs at 16" o.c. staggered. Cooperate with carpentry trades in properly locating,
spacing, and setting wall plugs.
V
A
0
r
i
3.04 CLEANING AND POINTING
A. Keep stone masonry surfaces clean during progress of the work; do not allow mortar
extrusions or drippings to dry on stone masonry surfaces. Wipe surfaces with damp
cloth and brush as necessary. DO NOT allow scaffolding, etc. to touch wall surfaces.
B. After completion of stone masonry work and adjacent work liable to soil stone
masonry, point up any defective joints, holes, cracks, voids, etc., and clean all
exposed stone masonry surfaces from top down with stiff fiber brushes, cleaning tools
and clean water. NO ACID OF ANY KIND SHOULD BE USED IN CLEANING
PROCESS. Leave completed masonry free of stains, dirt, mortar droppings and
defects in workmanship and materials.
C. Keep all mortar boards, tools and other items required for this work in a clean
condition, remove unused mortar waste while still fresh.
3.05 CLEAN-UP
A. All floors and surrounding areas shall be kept clean of mortar droppings, stone pieces,
etc. at all times. All exterior areas shall be kept clean of debris caused by this
Contractor at all times and entire project left clean at the completion of stone masonry
work.
B. Remove sample panel(s) from site when directed by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
1
0
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Metal Fabrications work.
i C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
0
L1
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by Metal Fabrications.
B. Items furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless specifically
stated otherwise; furnish setting drawings, templates, and other information required
for clear understanding of setting requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete Metal Fabrications work indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1.
Miscellaneous steel angles, angle frames, clip angles, angle braces, etc.
2.
Steel handrails.
3.
Loose lintels.
4.
Bike Rack.
5.
Teller Grilles.
1.04 RELATED ITEMS
0 A. Section 06100 - Rough Hardware
0
METAL FABRICATIONS 2516
05500.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
a. Manual of Steel Construction.
2.
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
a. Steel Product Manual.
b. Specification for The Design of Cold -Formed Structural Members.
3.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. A-36 - Specification for Structural Steel.
b. A-47 - Specification for Malleable Iron Castings.
c. A-48- Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
d. A-123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed; and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and
;
Strip.
e. A-366 - Specification for Commercial Quality Cold -Rolled Sheet Carbon
Steel.
f. A-500 - Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
g. A-501 - Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.
h. A-525 - Specification for General Requirements, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
Steel Sheet by the Hot -Dip Process.
4.
American Welding Society (AWS)
a. Standard Qualification Procedures - for field welding processes and welding
operators.
b. Structural Welding Code.
5.
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
a. SSPC - SP2 Specification for Hand Tool Cleaning.
b. SSPC - SP3 Specification for Power Tool Cleaning.
B. Field measurements:
1. To the greatest possible extent, take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings or fabrication of items.
2. Provide for field trimming and fitting when field measurements are not possible
without delaying job progress.
C. Shop assembly:
1. To the greatest possible extent, shop assemble items to minimize field splicing `
and field assembling.
2. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for re -assembly and proper installation.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
0
2516 METAL FABRICATIONS
05500.3
•
B. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's product specification and other data for
manufactured items proposed for use.
C. Samples - Submit 2 sets of representative samples of materials and finished products
as may be requested by Architect.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items, including finishes. Provide templates for
anchor and bolt installation as required.
2. Where material or fabrications are indicated to comply with certain requirements
« for design loadings include structural computations, material properties and other
information needed for structural analysis and review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Steel plates, shapes and bars - ASTM A-36.
B. Steel tubing - ASTM A-500 or A-501.
C. Structural steel sheets - ASTM A-570 or A-611 (Class 1) or grade required for design
loading.
D. Steel pipe - ASTM A-53 or type and grade as required for design loading; standard
M weight (schedule 40) unless otherwise required.
A
E. Gray Iron Castings - ASTM A-48, Class 30.
F. Malleable Iron Castings - ASTM A-47.
G. Sheet metal shall be galvanized steel sheet.
H. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors - Cast or formed metal of the same type material and
finish as item being supported, unless otherwise required.
I. Concrete Inserts - Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either
malleable iron, ASTM A-47, or cast steel, ASTM A-27. Provide bolts, washers and
shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A-153.
0 J. Grout - Premixed, factory -packaged, non -staining grout equal to Five Star Grout.
0
METAL FABRICATIONS 2516
05500.4
K. Fasteners:
1. General - Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade and class required for condition of
use.
2. Bolts and Nuts - Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A-307, Grade A.
3. Lag Bolts - Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
4. Machine Screws - Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
5. Wood Screws -Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. •
6. Plain Washers - Round, carbon steel, FS-FF-W-92.
7. Masonry Anchorage Devices - Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325.
8. Toggle Bolts - Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588.
9. Lock Washers - Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
L. All steel and aluminum items that are to be in contact with dissimilar metals,
masonry, mortar, or plaster shall be given a heavy coat of P&L or S-W asphaltic
varnish on contact surfaces. Do not coat sight exposed surfaces.
M. Items indicated to be galvanized or exposed to weather, moisture, etc., shall be hot
dipped galvanized after fabrication. 0
N. Shop Paint:
1. Metal Primer Paint: Paint shall be high solids, alkyd resin type.
2. Primer selected shall be compatible with finish coats of paint. Coordinate
selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements specified in Division 9. r
3. Galvanizing Repair Paint - High zinc dust content paint for re -galvanizing welds
in galvanize steel, complying with MIL-P-21035.
2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Workmanship:
1. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and
thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to
dimensions shown or approved on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support.
2. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless
otherwise shown. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. ,
3. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendation.
Prior to galvanizing or shop painting, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to
match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
4. Fabricate exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if
not show, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
5. Provide for anchorage of types shown or required, coordinated with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for
intended use.
0
2516 METAL FABRICATIONS
05500.5
6. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive finish
hardware and similar items.
•
7. Galvanizing:
a. Provide a hot -dip galvanized coating for items shown or specified to be
galvanized, as follows:
(1) ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
(2) ASTM A-123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shaped,
plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier.
(3) ASTM A-386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.
8. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
9. Shop Painting:
a. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions or
members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be
field welded, and galvanized surfaces.
b. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat.
Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2
"Hand Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-7
"Brush -Off Blast Cleaning".
c. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1
"Solvent Cleaning".
d. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on an approved primer
paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods
which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed
surfaces.
e. Apply one shop paint coat to all ferrous metal items (except galvanized
items), except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first coat.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK ITEMS
A. Rough Hardware:
1. Furnish bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and
iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring
or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
2. Manufacture or fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish
malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural
connection; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
B. Schedule of Items:
1. Steel angle frames, clip angles, edge angles, sill angles, lintel angles,
miscellaneous angles and anchors:
a. Provide steel angles and angle fabrications as indicated on the Drawings and
as required to receive, anchor, and otherwise support attached items or work
such as:
13
METAL FABRICATIONS 2516
05500.6
(1) Angle frame bracing at heads of fixed glass frames, doors, store front
entrances and glazing, accordion partitions, etc: Provide two braces at 6' -
0" frames, three braces up to 8' - 0" frames, and one brace per 48" of
frames of greater length.
(2) Angle frame supports at film projection screen; space as described for
window, door head bracing.
b. Material indicated for use in exterior walls, embedded in masonry or concrete,
or exposed to weather and/or moisture shall be hot -dipped galvanized after
`
fabrication and smooth grinding of welds.
2. Steel Handrails:
a. Fabricate railings to details, dimensions, and of steel tubing sizes as indicated
on the Drawings. Miter and weld all corners; cope and weld all butt joints.
Grind all welds smooth prior to galvanizing or prime painting. Show all
details, dimensions, member sizes, etc. on shop drawings. Provide 6" long
galvanized sleeves for installation in concrete. Set rail verticals in epoxy
grout, all as detailed on the Drawings.
b. All interior rails, sleeves, etc. shall receive one coat of rust inhibitive primer.
3. Loose lintels - Provide steel lintel angles of sizes indicated on the Drawings and
of such length to provide 8" bearing at each end. All lintel angles above doors
ail
exposed to the exterior shall be hot dipped galvanized after cutting to proper
length. Interior lintel angles shall receive one shop coat of rust inhibitive metal
primer.
4. Bike Rack — 2 3/8" O.D. Schedule 40 pipe, 5 space `Loop Style' bike rack by Kay
Park Recreation Corp., or equal, Model 623GIG, galvanized finish.
5. Teller Grilles — fabricate from steel shapes shown, weld joints and grind smooth.
Prime coat for finish painting after fabrication.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the
Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 COORDINATION
J
A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in 0
the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
3.03 INSTALLATION
t
A. General
1. Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack.
U
2516 METAL FABRICATIONS
05500.7
2. Anchor firmly into position.
3. Where field welding is required, comply with AWS recommended procedures of
` manual -shielded metal -arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and for
methods to be used in correcting welding work.
4. Grind exposed welds smooth, and touch up shop prime coats.
5. Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces which have been hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
•
U
10
s
0
w
B. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop
priming.
END OF SECTION
0
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and
Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether attached
hereto or not.
B. Read all other sections of the Specifications which, together with the Drawings and this
Section, describe the Rough Carpentry work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this Section of
the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by Rough Carpentry work.
B. Built-in items of other trades: Cooperate with other trades for proper installation of built-
M in items, provide access to carpentry work at the various stages of construction as
required, confer with other trades to ascertain that their work is in place, and protect such
work during execution of carpentry work.
C. Build openings, supports, nailers, headers, and frames into carpentry work as shown on
Drawings or as required by other trades. Confer with the electrical and mechanical trades
since any such items omitted shall be set by this Contractor without charge.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
r
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to complete all
Rough Carpentry work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and
Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Wood framing at indicated locations.
2. Wood blocking, grounds and nailers for incorporation into, or attachment to,
concrete, masonry, and/or steel framing.
3. Rough hardware.
4. Plywood Roof decking, sub -floors and under-layments.
5. Wood treatment.
4
ROUGH CARPENTRY 2516
06100.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 - Wood formwork for concrete. r
B. Section 06192 - Fabricated wood trusses.
C. Section 06200 - Finish carpentry and millwork.
D. Section 07150 - Dampproofing and waterproofing.
E. Section 07600 - Flashing and sheet metal.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the
following:
1. Lumber Standards - PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading and
inspecting agencies for species and products required.
2. Plywood Product Standards - PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products not manufactured
under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type of
plywood indicated.
3. NFPA - National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening.
M
B. Lumber - Identify with grade stamp of an agency certified by NFPA.
C. Plywood - Identify with grade mark of APA or equivalent.
D. Fasteners - ASTM A 653/A 653M - Specification for Zinc -Coated (galvanized) Steel
Sheet products by the Hot -Dip Process, minimum coating designation G90 (0.90 oz/sq
ft. ).
1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection of Finish Work: Cover and protect sills, jambs, concrete and finish carpentry
work to protect from damage during construction. Maintain protection in good condition
for as long as required or until completion of building.
B. Storage of Materials: Keep wood, plywood and gypsum materials dry at all times. f
Deliver lumber dry. Store on platforms or blocking, under waterproof covering and
provide adequate ventilation. Placing of materials on bare ground will not be permitted.
w
0
2516 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.01 LUMBER
A. General
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency.
2. Nominal sizes are indicated unless shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes
as required by PS 20 for moisture -controlled lumber.
3. Provide fire retardant treated lumber at stage framing and elsewhere as noted.
B. Framing Lumber
1. Unless indicated to be "stress graded", use "Stud" grade for stud framing and
"Construction" grade for other framing; Douglas Fir or Southern Pine.
2. Where framing will not be concealed by other work, use Douglas Fir Appearance
Framing or Southern Pine Appearance Grade.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, with maximum moisture content of 19% at time of
dressing, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Miscellaneous Lumber
1. Provide wood for attachment or support of other work, including rough bucks,
nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar uses. Use "Construction
Grade" light framing size lumber or boards of any species or No. 2 Southern Pine
• boards.
2. Preservative treat all miscellaneous lumber in contact with concrete, masonry, plaster,
and at all roof areas and in exterior walls.
i
2.02 PLYWOOD
A. General - Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark.
B. Concealed Plywood: Where plywood panels will be used for the following concealed
types of applications, provide APA Performance - Rated Panels as follows:
1. Sheathing:
a. APA Rated Sheathing.
b. Exposure Durability Classification - Exterior
c. Span Rating - As required to suit stud spacing shown.
2. Floor and Roof deck:
r a. APA Rated Sheathing.
b. Exposure Durability Classification -Exterior.
c. Span Rating -As required to suit joist, stud or rafter spacing shown.
C. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire -
retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with
exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or if not indicated, not less than 3/4".
6
ROUGH CARPENTRY 2516
06100.4
2.03 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Nails, Spikes, and Staples: Hot -dipped galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity
locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit
application.
B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit
application; hot -dipped galvanized for exterior locations contact with concrete '
construction, high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior
locations.
C. Fasteners: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry and
concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel.
2.04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment:
1. Pressure impregnate with Boliden CCA or Osmose K33 (Fed. Spec. TT-W-550)
preservative to net retention of .23 lbs./cu. ft., in accordance with American Wood -
Preservers Association, 'Book of Standards", in plant licensed by manufacturer.
Stamp for identification.
2. Brush two coats of preservative on bored or sawn surfaces of treated lumber.
to
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units
which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints.
B. Set work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and
accurately cut and fitted.
C. Contractor shall verify all dimensions shown on the Drawings and be held responsible for
checking dimensions shown on the Drawings against job conditions to ascertain possible
discrepancies in figured dimensions shown on Drawings or job conditions not permitting
detailed construction. Notify the Architect before executing any portion of the work.
D. Securely attach work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by
recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish
work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will
be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between .49
members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre -drill as required.
0
2516 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100.5
3.02 WOOD NAILERS, BLOCKING, SLEEPERS, GROUNDS
A. Set wood blocking for support of wood work, metal work, plumbing fixtures, electrical
outlets, lighting fixtures, mirrors, toilet room accessories, etc., where indicated or
normally required to support such items. Provide blocking and nailers to allow nailing of
centers, ends and edges of wall boards where applied to wood frame construction.
Provide nailers and blocking to receive all wood trim and mouldings. Form to shapes as
shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate
location with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of
masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
1. Bore bolt holes same diameter as bolts; drive bolts into place to a snug fit and provide
with washer and nuts. Tighten nuts, bolts and screws at installation and again at
enclosure or completion.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, bevelled lumber not less than
1 1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish
material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
D. Use preservative treated wood where in contact with concrete or masonry and at moist
. locations.
3.03 WOOD FURRING
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finished work.
B. Use preservative treated wood where in contact with concrete or masonry and at moist
locations.
E
3.04 WOOD FRAMING
A. General:
1. Set bottom plates in acoustical caulking.
2. Frame accurately and neatly, at 16" o.c. unless otherwise shown. Brace well and nail
securely.
3. Do not splice structural members between supports.
4. Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up.
5. Do not notch, cut, or bore members for pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other reasons
except as shown on the Drawings or as specifically approved in advance by the
Architect.
6. Make bearings full unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
6
ROUGH CARPENTRY 2516
06100.6
7. Finish bearing surfaces on which structural members are to rest so as to give sure and
even support.
8. Where framing members slope, cut or notch the ends as required to give uniform
bearing surface.
B. Stud Framing: Provide stud framing where shown. Unless otherwise shown, use 2" x 4"
wood studs spaced 16" o.c. with 4" face perpendicular to direction of wall or partition.
Provide single bottom plate and double -top plates 2" thick by width of studs. Nail or .
anchor plates to supporting construction as approved.
C. Joist Framing:
1. Provide framing of sizes and spacings shown. Install with crown edge up and support
ends of each member with not less than 1 1/2" of bearing on wood and metal, and 3"
on masonry. Attach to wood bearing members by toe nailing or metal connectors;
frame to wood supporting members with wood ledgers as shown, or if not shown,
with metal connectors.
2. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders and partitions not less
than 4" or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking (2" thick
by depth of joist) over supports.
3. Provide bridging between joists where nominal depth -to -thickness ratio exceeds 4, at
intervals of 8'. Use bevel cut 1" x 4" or 2" x 3" wood bracing, double-crossed and
nailed both ends to joists, or use solid wood bridging 2" thick by depth of joist, end
nailed to joist.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD
A. Install plywood flooring over framing in accordance with instructions of American
Plywood Association. Nail with 8d common nails spaced 8" at edges and 16" in field
each way.
B. Install 1/2" plywood wall sheathing as shown in accord with instructions of American
Plywood Association. Stagger panel end joints. Space panel ends and edges 1/32". Nail
with 8d ring -shank nails spaced 6" at edges and 8" in field each way.
C. Roof Deck:
1. Apply 5/8" plywood roof deck to roof framing. Run long dimension of plywood
perpendicular to framing and stagger joints. Allow for expansion in plywood joints in
accordance with APA recommendations.
2. Anchor plywood to framing 16" o.c. along edges 32" o.c. in field. Countersink head
to a point flush with top surface of plywood.
3. Clean plywood of all trash, sawdust, etc. and leave ready for roofer's felt application.
3.06 CLEAN-UP
A. At the completion of the rough carpentry work, remove all excess materials and rubbish
accumulated from this work and leave area clean.
END OF SECTION
4
0
t
SECTION 06192 - FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other sections of the Specifications which, together with the Drawings and
this Section, describe the Fabricated wood trusses work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by Fabricated wood trusses work.
B. Built-in items of other trades: Cooperate with other trades for proper installation of
built-in items, provide access to carpentry work at the various stages of construction
as required, confer with other trades to ascertain that their work is in place, and
protect such work during execution of carpentry work.
C. Build openings, supports, nailers, headers, and frames into fabricated wood trusses
work as shown on Drawings or as required by other trades. Confer with the electrical
and mechanical trades since any such items omitted shall be set by this Contractor
without charge.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Fabricated wood trusses work indicated or reasonably inferred from the
• Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Fabrication, delivery and erection of wood trusses.
2. Wood blocking, curbing, anchorage, miscellaneous framing and bracing.
0 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
6
TRUSSES 2516
06192.2
B. Section 06200 - Finish carpentry and millwork.
C. Section 07150 - Dampproofing and Waterproofing.
D. Section 07600 - Flashing and sheet metal
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the provision of the latest edition of
the following:
1. Lumber Standards - PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading and
inspecting agencies for species and products required.
2. NFPA - National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening.
3. National Design Specification for Wood Truss Construction (NDS).
4. American Forest & Paper Association (AFPA), and the National Design Standard
for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction (NDSMPCWTC). Truss
Plate Institute (TPI).
B. Manufacturer shall furnish design drawings bearing seal and registration number of
civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where trusses are to be installed.
Drawings shall be approved by the architect of record prior to fabrication.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Shop drawings and setting plans.
2. Manufacturer's literature for all products proposed for use.
C. Shop drawings:
1. Prepare under supervision of a registered professional engineer.
2. Show profiles, sizes, spacing and location of wood trusses. Include:
a. Minimum bearing width as controlled F of lumber in truss that contacts
bearing.
b. Design dead and live uniform loads and any concentrated loads and their point
of application.
c. Adjustment to allowable values of lumber and plates for condition of use.
d. Reactive forces and their points of occurrences.
e. Plate type, thickness or gauge, size and location of plate on each joint.
f. Lumber size, species and grade for each member.
g. Location of any required continuous lateral bracing.
3. Include details for assembly of wood trusses.
74
a
r]
2516 TRUSSES
06192.3
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
♦ A. Protection of Finish Work: Cover and protect sills, jambs, concrete and finish
carpentry work to protect from damage during construction. Maintain protection in
good condition for as long as required or until completion of building.
B. Storage of Materials: Keep wood, dry at all times. Deliver lumber dry. Store on
♦ platforms or blocking, under waterproof covering and provide adequate ventilation.
Placing of materials on bare ground will not be permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber used for truss members shall be in accordance with published values of
lumber rules writing agencies approved by board of review of American Lumber
Standards Committee. Lumber shall be identified by the grade mark of a lumber
inspection bureaus or agency by that board.
B. Adjustment of values for duration of load shall be made in accordance with the NDS.
C. Where not less than three trusses are positioned side by side, are spaced no more than
24 inches on center and are joined by decking, flooring or other load distributing
elements attached to the chords, the allowable Fb may be increased 15%, or if
repetitive member design values are listed in NDS, those values may be used.
f D. Moisture content of lumber shall be within proper limits, but shall in no case be less
than 7% nor greater than 19% a time of fabrication.
E. Connector plates shall be manufactured by a WTCA member plate manufacturer and
shall be not less than .036 inches in coated thickness (20 gauge) and shall meet or
exceed ASTM A446 grade A or higher, and shall be hot dipped galvanized according
• to ASTM A525, coating designation G60. Minimum steel values shall include: Yield
Point Fy = 33,000 psi; Ultimate Strength Fu = 45,000 psi. Working stresses in steel
are to be applied to effective ratios for plates as determined by test in accordance with
Appendix E and F of NDSMPCWTC, TPI and shall be: Basic Allowable Tensile
Stress F = .60Fy and Basic Allowable Shear Stress F = .4017y.
F. At the request of the architect, the truss manufacturer shall furnish a certified record
that materials comply with steel specifications.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Trusses shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a
permanent nature. Trusses shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using
precision cutting, jigging and pressing equipment under the requirements in
NDSMPCWTC. Truss members shall be accurately cut to length, angle and true to
i
TRUSSES 2516
06192.4
line to ensure proper fitting joints within tolerances set forth in NDSMPCWTC and
proper fit with other work.
40
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 HANDLING AND ERECTION
A. Trusses shall be handled during fabrication, delivery and at jobsite so as not to be
subjected to excessive lateral bending.
B. Trusses shall be unloaded on smooth ground to avoid lateral strain. Erector shall
provide protection for trusses from damage that might result from on -site activities
and environmental conditions. Care shall be taken when banding is removed prevent
toppling.
C. Handling during erection shall be in accordance with recommended practices forth in
Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing and Bracing Metal Plate
Connected Wood Trusses, HIB-91. Field erection shall be consistent with good
workmanship and good building practices and shall be the responsibility of the
erector. Erector shall advise manufacturer of any apparent damage prior to erection
of trusses.
D. Trusses must be set and secured level and plumb, and in correct location. Plumb of
each truss shall be held in correct alignment until specified permanent bracing is
installed. Cutting and altering of trusses is not permitted.
E. Concentrated loads shall not be placed atop trusses until all specified bracing has
been installed and decking is permanently nailed in place. Specifically avoid stacking •
full bundles of plywood or other materials atop unsheathed trusses.
F. Erector should seek professional advice in regards to erection bracing, which is
always required, to prevent toppling or dominoing of trusses during erection.
•
G. Fastening of the deck to the trusses and permanent structural cross -bracing and
anchorage to ensure overall rigidity of the roof system to resist lateral wind or seismic
forces shall be in accordance with the architectural/engineering plans for the building
structure. (See truss design drawings for any additional special bracing
requirements).
H. Materials used in bracing are to be furnished by the erection contractor. Safe erection
of trusses is the responsibility of the building contractor.
3.02 CLEAN-UP
A. At the completion of the wood truss work, remove all excess materials and rubbish
accumulated from this work and leave area clean.
END OF SECTION
r
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 2516
0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 -General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Finish Carpentry work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by, Finish Carpentry work.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close joining and fitting
f with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Finish Carpentry work indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications.
•
B. Work Included:
1. Finish carpentry.
2. Millwork.
3. Plastic laminate.
4. Installation of hollow metal frames and doors: hollow metal frames, and doors
provided under Section 08110, "Metal Doors and Frames".
•
5. Installation of plastic faced doors: plastic faced doors provided under Section
08213, 'Plastic Faced Doors".
6. Installation of Finish Hardware; hardware provided under Section 08700, "Finish
Hardware".
7. Installation of items provided under Division 10 - 'Building Specialties": toilet
f
room accessories, etc.
•
FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 2516 r
06200.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 41
B. Section 08110 - Metal Doors and Frames
C. Section 08213 - Plastic Faced Doors
D. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware a
E. Section 09900 - Painting
F. Division 10 - Building Specialities
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. Softwood Lumber Standards - PS 20.
2. Hardwood Lumber Standards (Comply with National Hardwood Lumber
Association rules) - PS 58, Basic Hardwoods.
3. Plywood Standard - PS 1.
4. Hardwood Plywood Standard - PS 51.
5. Woodworking Standard - AWI "Quality Standards".
B. Factory -mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading
agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent
finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in
accordance with specified requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
C. Finish woodwork and millwork shall be "Custom" grade in accordance with AWI
"Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Industry". Refer to current
publication for all materials, construction, and installation requirements.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of woodwork and millwork fabrication, submit:
1. Shop drawings of woodwork items. Show materials, wood species, component
profiles, fastenings, jointing details, finishes, accessories, and general layout of
the work.
2. Representative samples of wood and plywood scheduled to receive stained or
transparent finish.
3. Color samples and product data for prefinished products for Architect's selection.
4. Wood treatment data.
•
7
2516 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
06200.3
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
•
A. General:
1. Prior to delivery, inspect all woodwork to insure that no sub -grade, defective,
machine -marked or otherwise damaged pieces are delivered.
2. Store millwork and woodwork in an approved, protected area until proper storage
• can be provided at project site.
3. Millwork and woodwork shall not be delivered until proper storage can be
provided at project site.
4. Arrange to have millwork and finish woodwork materials (trim, doors, etc.)
primed and back -painted immediately upon delivery to project.
5. Do not store or erect kiln -dried materials in wet or damp portions of the project.
Concrete shall be thoroughly dry in spaces before items or materials which may
be damaged or affected by dampness are installed therein.
6. Carefully cover and protect finish carpentry materials and items when in transit
and at the job site.
* B. Acclimatization of Wood Materials:
1. Prior to installation, all wood materials and plastic faced doors shall be stored a
minimum of two weeks in protected areas within the building.
2. Contractor shall select and Architect approve the areas so selected.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining temperature of such areas between
50 degrees F. and 75 degrees F. and relative humidity of 50 to 60 percent.
4. Materials shall be stored in an acceptable manner to allow free circulation of air
around all items.
C. Finish Hardware - Store in a locked place, at site under supervision of Contractor's
superintendent.
1.08 PROTECTION
• A. Protection of adjacent surfaces, items, and finish work from damage due to finish
carpentry operations is the responsibility of this Contractor. Make good any damage
to work of other trades as directed by the Architect at no expense to the Owner.
B. Materials and finish items not properly stored or which are damaged or defaced
during construction will be rejected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
t 2.01 LUMBER
6
FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 2516
06200.4
A. Softwood lumber: PS 20, custom grade per AWI Section 100; Southern Pine or
Douglas Fir, S4S, moisture content 10 to 12%, treated on exterior and where noted on
interior.
B. Hardwood lumber: PS 58, custom grade per AWI Section 100; Birch, Maple,
Western Red Cedar, White or Red Oak, S4S, moisture content 10 to 12%, treated on
exterior and where noted on interior. Use clear red oak treads and risers at stage
stairs.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, custom grade per AWI Section 200; rotary cut, veneer
core; Southern Pine or Douglas Fir.
B. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51, custom grade per AWI Section 200, plain sliced, veneer
core; Red Oak.
C. Industrial Grade Particleboard Core: Medium density, custom grade per AWI 200;
overlay with High Pressure Decorative Laminate.
D. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder; tempered grade; 1/4" thick, smooth
2 sides.
2.03 OTHER FINISH MATERIALS
A. Plastic laminate - High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) complying with FS L-
P-508G, Style D, Type 1, Class 1 and NEMA Standard LD3 - 1995, Type 1 general
purpose laminates. Backing or balancing sheets shall be high pressure paper base
plastic laminate without a decorative finish; 0.020 inch thick, smooth surface finish.
Color and pattern as selected by the Architect.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Formica Corp. (Formica)
b. Westinghouse Electric Corp. (Micarta)
c. Ralph Wilson Plastics (Wilsonart)
d. Pionte Decorative Laminates
2. Countertops to be .048" thickness HGS, general purpose grade.
3. Exposed surfaces to be .028" thick VGS vertical surfacing grade.
4. Semi -exposed surfaces to be .020" cabinet liner (not melamine).
5. Concealed surfaces to be .020" BKL, backing sheet
6. Edges to be plastic laminate or bound with "T"-shaped extruded plastic.
2.04 DOORS
A. Metal doors and frames will be furnished to this Section by Section 08110 for
installation.
•
0
2516 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
06200.5
B. Plastic faced doors will be furnished to this Section by Section 08213 for installation.
• C. Finish hardware will be furnished to this Section by Section 08700 for installation.
2.05 BUILDING SPECIALITIES
• A. Building Specialties will be furnished to this Section by Division 10 for installation.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. As shown and as required to suit application.
2. Provide non -corrosive, non -oxidizing type for exterior, at high humidity areas and
at treated wood locations.
B. Laminate Adhesive: Waterproof glue or contact adhesive as recommended by the
laminated plastic manufacturer.
C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Knape and Vogt; 255 standard with 256
clips, Zinc Finish or 5mm pins.
D. Drawer guides: Blum BS 230 E, Bottom mount epoxy coated, 751b.
E. Clothes rod and hardware: Knape and Vogt; hanging rod #660, Flanges #734 and
#735, in locations shown on the drawings. Provide additional wood blocking in stud
wall for anchoring flanges.
F. Hardware: Furnish the following for each cabinet door unless shown otherwise:
I. Hinges: 1 pair, Blum 125 Series. (Heavy duty five knuckle, 2.75", 0.095 gauge
with hospital tip).
2. Door and drawer locks: Knape and Vogt; #986 NP in locations shown on the
• drawings.
3. Pulls: 3 1/2" Wire pulls.
4. Furnish washers under all screw heads securing door and drawer pulls.
5. Locks: Provide locks where shown, master key all locks within one room area as
directed.
G. Exposed hardware finish to be oiled bronze, concealed hardware to be zinc.
H. Wire Grommet: 2" or 3" diameter plastic grommet at desktops as manufactured by
Outwater Plastics, Inc.
i
•
FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 2516
06200.6
2.07 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative treatment:
1. Pressure impregnate with Boliden CCA or Osmose K33 (Fed. Spec. TT-W-550)
preservative to net retention of .23 lb. per cu. ft., in accordance with American
Wood Preservers Association 'Book of Standards", in plant licensed by
manufacturer. Stamp for identification.
2. Immerse millwork which cannot be given pressure treatment for three minutes in
accordance with recommendations of National Association of Millwork
Manufacturers.
3. Brush two coats of preservative on bored or sawn surfaces of treated lumber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Inspect finish materials, trim, doors, etc., to insure that no subgrade, defective or
machine marked pieces are installed.
B. Priming and back -painting: Arrange to have all millwork, miscellaneous trim and
sight exposed nailers primed and backpainted immediately upon delivery to the
building.
C. Nailing:
1. Wood trim less than 4" wide: 6d casing nails not more than 12" o.c. staggered.
2. Wood trim 4" or wider: 2-6d casing nails 12" o.c.
0
D. Install work with neat cuts, close joints and firm seating. Miter or cope trim joints at a
corners. Set nails in exposed work 1/8" for putty. Countersink screws in exposed
work and plug with matching wood unless otherwise noted.
3.02 MILLWORK
•
A. Workmanship:
1. Milling: Fabricate, assemble and finish items at mill insofar as practicable.
Deliver to building ready to set in place. Machine sand items at mill or factory
and sandpaper smooth to touch at building. Provide millwork free of machine or
tool marks or defects that will show through finish.
2. Joints:
a. Make all joints to high standard to conceal shrinkage.
b. Mortise, tenon, dowel, block and glue joints where necessary; avoid use of
nails as much as possible. Conceal nails and screws when necessary to use.
c. Standing trim: Furnish full length for each condition of use; miter corners.
3. Erection:
a. Set items plumb, level and in true alignment. Provide blocking and nailers for
securing in place.
41
2516 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
06200.7
b. Blind nail where ever possible, where not possible, set nails for putty
stopping. Where screws occur in exposed surfaces, counter sink heads and
• stop holes with wood plugs matched to surrounding surface. Hammer or tool
marks on exposed surfaces will be cause for rejection.
4. Backpriming: Do not install any trim or plywood until backs, edges and other
parts not accessible after installation, have been primed. Priming is provided
under Section 09900 - Painting.
•
B. Natural Finish - Cabinets, counters and shelves in areas scheduled for Natural Finish:
1.
Oak Plywood: Plain Sliced Red Oak Veneer
a. Grade: A Grade for all exposed faces, A-2 Grade for semi -exposed faces. A
Grade for both faces of plywood doors and ends with exposed exterior. A-2
Grade for both faces of adjustable shelves, and fixed shelves. A Grade for
backs, verticals.
b. Edging: 1/4" thick Red Oak hardwood edging on all exposed edges, including
all edges of shelves behind doors.
c. Refer to Millwork details on the Drawings for location of the cabinets that are
*
to be constructed of Red Oak materials.
d. Thicknesses: as detailed.
2.
Concealed Framing:
a. 2" nominal dimension material; No. 1 yellow pine, treated where required.
b. 1" nominal dimension material; C Grade white pine.
3.
Exposed Framing and Trim: Specified hardwood to match trim.
'
4.
Finished Wood Tops and Splash: Plain Sliced Red Oak Veneer, Grade A.
5.
Laminated Plastic Tops and Splash: Specified laminated plastic applied to 3/4"
thick A - D Grade exterior type fir plywood with 1 1/2" built-up plywood edge;
apply plastic to A face. Apply specified laminated backing sheets to under -side of
all tops. Set plastic to plywood with contact bond cement. Secure tops to
framing underside with screws; use glue blocks where necessary.
6.
Drawers: Boxes to be 1/2" softwood or 7 ply (all hardwood) veneer core plywood
with 1/4" tempered hardboard bottoms.
7.
Hardware:
a. Adjustable shelf hardware: Furnish and install specified adjustable shelf
•
hardware as shown on Drawings.
b. Hinges: Furnish and install specified hinges on each cabinet door.
c. Catches: Furnish and install specified catches for each cabinet door.
d. Locks: Furnish and install specified locks for each cabinet door.
e. Drawer Guides: Furnish and install specified guides on each cabinet drawer.
f. Pulls for cabinet doors and drawers to be furnished under Section 08700 -
Finish Hardware and installed under this Section.
C. Painted Finish - Cabinets, counter and shelves, in areas scheduled for Painted Finish:
1. Birch plywood: Rotary Cut Birch Veneer
! a. Grade: Paint Grade for all exposed faces; Paint Grade for concealed faces.
Paint Grade for both faces of plywood doors. Paint Grade for both faces of
adjustable shelves, and fixed shelves.
0
FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 2516
06200.8
b. Edging: 1/4" thick Birch or maple hardwood edging on all exposed edges,
including edges of shelves behind doors.
c. Thicknesses: as detailed.
2.
Concealed Framing:
a. 2" nominal dimension material; Select No. 2 yellow pine.
b. 1" nominal dimensions materials; C Grade white pine.
3.
Exposed Framing and Trim: Specified hardwood to match trim.
4.
Laminated Plastic Tops and Splash: Specified laminated plastic applied to 3/4"
thick A - D Grade exterior type fir plywood with 1 1/2" built-up plywood edge;
apply plastic to A face. Apply specified laminated backing sheets to underside of
all tops. Set plastic to plywood with contact bond cement. Secure tops to framing
underside with screws; use glue blocks where necessary.
5.
Drawers: Boxes to be 1/2" softwood or 7 ply (all Hardwood) veneer core
plywood with 1/4" tempered hardboard bottoms.
6.
Hardware:
a. Adjustable shelf hardware: Furnish and install specified adjustable shelf
hardware shown on Drawings.
b. Hinges: Furnish and install specified hinges on each cabinet door.
c. Catches: Furnish and install specified catches for each cabinet door.
f
d. Drawer Guides: Furnish and install specified guides on each cabinet drawer.
e. Pulls for cabinet doors and drawers to be furnished under Section 08700 -
Finish Hardware and installed under this Section.
D. Plastic Laminate Clad - Cabinets, Counters and Shelves in areas scheduled to be
•
Plastic Laminate Clad:
1.
Medium Density Industrial Particleboard core (45 pcf) or plywood as shown on
the drawings, 3/4" thickness; of grade to suite application; sanded faces.
a. High Pressure laminate (nominal .028" thick) for all exposed faces; cabinet
liner (CLS 20) for all semi -exposed locations; mill option for concealed parts.
b. Edging: Same plastic laminate as component or "T" shaped compatible PVC
shall be mounted on all exposed edges; including all edges of shelves exposed
or not.
2.
Concealed Framing:
a. 2" nominal dimension material; Selected No. 2 yellow pine.
b. 1" nominal dimensions materials; C Grade white pine.
3.
Exposed Framing and Trim: Same plastic laminate at component including all
edges.
4.
Laminated Plastic Tops and Splash: Specified laminated plastic applied to 3/4"
thick A - D Grade exterior type fir plywood with 1 1/2" built-up plywood edge;
•
apply plastic to the "A" face. Apply specified laminated backing sheets to
underside of all tops. Set plastic to plywood with contact bond cement. Secure
tops to framing underside with screws; use glue blocks where necessary.
5.
Drawers: Boxes to be 1/2" softwood or 7 ply (all hardwood) veneer core plywood
with 1/4" tempered hardboard bottoms.
6.
Hardware:
s
a. Adjustable shelf hardware: Furnish and install specified adjustable shelf
hardware shown on Drawings.
b. Hinges: Furnish and install specified hinges on each cabinet door.
•
f 2516 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
06200.9
c. Catches: Furnish and install specified catches for each cabinet door.
d. Drawer Guides: Furnish and install specified guides on each cabinet drawer.
• e. Pulls for cabinet doors and drawers to be furnished under Section 08700 -
Finish Hardware and installed under this Section.
E. Standing and Running Trim:
1. All exposed standing and running trim shall be clear grade solid wood, Red Oak
• of sizes and shapes indicated on the Drawings.
2. Trim joinery shall meet the highest standards for quality in accordance with AWI,
Premium Grade.
0 3.03 MILLWORK INSTALLATION
A. Storage: As soon as space can be made available where millwork can be stored in
protected area, Contractor shall inform millwork sub -contractor that he is ready to
receive millwork.
•
B. Inspection:
1. Upon delivery, Contractor shall inspect all millwork for scratches, marks, or other
damage, and shall reject that which cannot be satisfactorily repaired by millwork
sub -contractor.
• 2. Upon delivery, Contractor shall arrange for all millwork to receive first coat of
painter's finish.
3. Immediately prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall repair or replace all
millwork which has been damaged in any way.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts.
D. Install all units to details shown, properly anchored and adequately supported, true to
plane, level and plumb. All millwork backing or framing which will be installed
against masonry or concrete surfaces shall be covered on the contact surfaces with 15
• pound building felt.
E. Millwork application shall provide a completely finished installation in every respect
and that which is not properly fitted, showing open joints at abutting materials or
other irregularities will be rejected.
U
3.04 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Install metal frames and doors; items are provided under Section 08110, "Metal
Doors and Frames".
B. Install rated frames and doors in accordance with NFPA regulations.
0
FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 2516
06200.10
C. Metal Frames:
1. Install frames plumb and square. Shim, adjust and anchor as required. Shore and
brace frames securely until anchored to adjacent construction; do not attach
temporary bracing in a manner that will damage or scar exposed surfaces.
2. Grout frames solid where indicated on the Drawings.
D. Metal Doors: Hang metal doors in frames in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Adjust doors for proper operation immediately after installation and again
at completion of work.
E. Adjusting and Cleaning
1. Remove rust from scratched areas at job site and touch up primer.
2. Fill dents with mineral filler, sand smooth and touch-up primer.
3. Thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces after touch-up and make ready for finish +
painting.
3.05 PLASTIC FACED DOORS
•
A. Install plastic faced doors items are provided under Section 08213, "Plastic Faced
Doors"
B. Do not install doors until wet trade Work is completed and dried, in all areas to
receive doors.
C. Condition doors to the average prevailing humidity of the rooms before hanging. Do
not subject doors to abnormal or sudden changes in heat, dryness, or humidity.
D. Make all installations in accordance with the best workmanlike practices of the trade.
No scuffed or damaged doors will be accepted.
E. Field cutting, trimming, and fitting of prefinished doors will not be permitted.
F. All doors need to be sealed on both end rails before hanging.
G. Do not remove labels from fire rated doors.
H. Protect doors and hardware during construction. Repair marred finishes to perfectly
match door surface to the Architect's satisfaction or replace the door.
3.06 FINISH HARDWARE
A. The supplier will mark each item of hardware for location. Protect the markings until
each item is installed. If any item of hardware is delivered to the job not properly
marked, return it to the supplier for marking before attempting to install it.
2516 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
06200.11
B. Install and make necessary adjustments for proper working order. Hardware
damaged by improper adjustments and careless handling will be rejected.
C. Any hardware damaged by improper adjustment or careless abuse shall be replaced.
D. Fit all surface applied hardware accurately.
♦ E. Metal doors and frames to receive hardware items shall be drilled and tapped
accurately.
F. Plastic faced doors to receive hardware items shall have clean, properly sized and
accurately placed mortises and drilled holes for all mortise and surface mounted
♦ finish hardware. Use appropriate jigs, templates and power mortising equipment for
the installation of all mortise hardware items.
G. Secure door closers, exit hardware and other devices surface mounted on plastic faced
and hollow metal doors with sex -bolts through door. Attach hardware mounted on
40 hollow metal frames into reinforcements built into frames. If reinforcement is not
properly in place, notify Architect before proceeding. Set hardware accurately, adjust
for smooth operation and leave in perfect working order.
H. After hardware is installed, protect exposed surfaces by use of heavy paper and
• masking tape; maintain until job completion.
G
I. Removal for painting: Remove all hardware, except that which is primed for
painting, before painter's finish is applied. Permanently replace and re -adjust for
proper function after painter's finish has dried hard.
3.07 BUILDING SPECIALITIES ITEMS
A. Install all items specified under Division 10 - Building Specialties in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's directions or as shown on the Drawings.
3.08 CLEAN-UP
A. At the completion of the finish carpentry work, remove all excess materials and
r rubbish accumulated from this work and leave area clean.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07150 - DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
` and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Dampproofing and Waterproofing work. Verify all
dimensions and conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects or is affected by Dampproofing and Waterproofing work.
S B. Certain items of Dampproofing and Waterproofing are to be installed in relation to
work of other trades; schedule work, and cooperate in such manner that roofing and
sheet metal items are placed in time to prevent delay of the work to insure proper
application; proper installation of these items is the responsibility of this Contractor.
C. Examine all surfaces prepared by other trades to receive Dampproofing and
Waterproofing work; report any conditions considered detrimental to proper
installation and performance; make report in writing to Architect in ample time to
allow correction without delaying the project. Application of Waterproofing and
Dampproofing will be construed as acceptance of surfaces and corrections of defects
or imperfections shall be made by this Contractor as directed by the Architect, at no
expense to the Owner.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Dampproofing and Waterproofing work as indicated or reasonably
inferred from the Drawings and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Water repellent treatment of exterior faces of masonry walls.
2. Membrane flashing.
3. Plastic film waterproofing.
11
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 2516
07150.2
4. Moisture Barrier (damp proofing)
•
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry.
C. Section 07600 - Roof Flashing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
A. Applicator Qualifications - A firm which has specialized, for not less that five years,
in installation of type of bituminous dampproofing required for project.
1.06 SUBMITTALS 4
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of dampproofing work, submit manufacturer's product data, technical
information and installation instructions for materials proposed for use.
C. If requested, submit for Architect's approval, samples of materials proposed for use.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Store materials and packaged goods in weathertight shed; store mastics and asphalts
under water tight covers. Placing of materials on bare ground will not be permitted.
B. Deliver packaged goods to job in unopened containers or wrappings with
manufacturer's labels thereon.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Substrate - Proceed with dampproofing work only after substrate construction and
penetrating work have been completed.
B. Protection of adjacent surfaces and finish work from damage due to waterproofing
and dampproofing operations is responsibility of this Contractor. Remove any
spotting, stains, smears and make good any damage resulting from this work as
directed by the Architect at no expense to the Owner.
•
0
• 2516 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
07150.3
C. Weather - Proceed with dampproofing work only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
! manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
♦ 2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
C7
A. Water repellent treatment for face of exterior masonry walls shall be Prim -A -Pell
200; White Rock 7 plus, Sonneborn Building Products, Inc., Sureklean Masonry
Water Repellent, Weather Seal SS, ProSoCo., Inc., or approved equal.
B. Thru-Wall flashings and all flashings referred to on the Drawings as membrane
flashings shall be 30 MIL thick, black film, and shall be equal to "Vi-Seal" (PVC
flashing), AFCO Products, Inc.
C. Plastic film waterproofing, 6 mil. thickness at slab -on -grade construction.
1. Plastic film: Virgin polyethylene plastic film conforming to Federal Specification
LP-378a, and equal to "Vis-Queen", manufactured by Visking Col, Division of
Union Carbide Corp.
2. Tape for sealing joints and patches of waterproofing; "Ger-pak Miracle Tape",
• virgin polyethylene plastic, pressure sensitive tape manufactured by Gering
Plastics, or equal product as approved by the Architect.
a
D. Moisture Barrier — ASTM D226, 15 pound asphalt saturated fiberglass felt,
unperforated, 36" wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WATER REPELLENT
• A. General:
1. Repoint all holes, cracks, and open joints and allow to dry before application of
materials.
2. Apply only during favorable weather.
3. Do not apply until all surfaces are completely dry and clean. The work of this
Section shall be coordinated with roofing and masonry work. Take extreme care
not to deface finish surfaces.
4. Flash all construction as shown on plans, and as necessary to protect the building
from water penetration and subsequent damage.
B. Water Repellent Treatment:
1. Location: Face of all new exterior masonry walls.
2. Exterior Masonry: Apply 2 coats of water repellent in strict accordance with the
specifications of the manufacturer and at a rate of approximately one gallon per
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 2516
07150.4
200 square feet. Application shall begin at the top of a wall and shall not move
downward until treatment totally wets the surface being treated. Apply enough
water repellent to thoroughly wet the wall but not too excessive to run down. •
3. Brush apply water repellent only at locations where overspray would affect
adjacent materials and where not practicable for spray application.
4. Avoid letting water repellent dry between passes, keep a wet edge at all times.
C. Adjust and Clean: .
1. Spray Test: After water repellents have dried, spray coated surfaces with water.
2. Recoat surfaces that show water absorption.
3. Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces as recommended by water
repellent manufacturer.
•
3.03 MEMBRANE FLASHING
A. Install in positions and locations as indicated on Drawings and at other points in the
construction as necessary to protect the project against the penetration of water.
0
B. Install all flashings in accordance with the best practices of this trade. Use end dams
at all corners.
C. Slope in flashings, if any, shall be toward the exterior of the building.
•
D. Apply a heavy coat of specified mastic to all surfaces to receive free edges of
flashing. Apply one coat of same material over surfaces of flashings which will not
be sight exposed. At exterior lintels, sills and reglet blocks, extend 8" beyond ends
and 4" vertically. At juncture between masonry and columns or beams, cover joint
and extend 8" each side. At base of exterior walls, install on brick shelf and extend •
minimum 8" up backup masonry. Keep flashings back 3/4" from face of wall.
3.03 PLASTIC FILM WATERPROOFING - SLAB ON GRADE
A. Location: Over compacted fill under concrete slabs on grade - 6 mil.
B. Place specified plastic film on earth and where otherwise indicated on the Drawings;
lap joints a minimum of 6" with top lap in direction of spreading concrete, cut closely
to pipes and other items projecting through film; patch cuts, punctures and tears with
specified tape.
C. Seal joints and patches with specified pressure sensitive tape.
•
D. Inspect waterproofing immediately prior to placing concrete and patch all defects.
•
•
2516 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
07150.5
3.04 MOISTURE BARRIER
• A. Install membrane flashing at brick ledge before felt is laid.
B. Lay one layer of felt vertically over entire wall surface, lapping each course over
lower course 2" minimum at horizontal joints, and 4" side lap at end joints.
C. Secure felt to sheathing with sufficient fasteners to hold in place.
3.05 WARRANTY
A. The Sub -Contractor for this Section shall give the Owner a written warranty against
water leaks that may occur in surface of joints that have been dampproofed by this
Section. This warranty shall be for a period of two years from the date of acceptance
of the work by the Owner, and shall further provide that this Sub -Contractor, at his
expense, will do all work and provide all materials necessary to correct any such
• leaks that may occur.
B. This Sub -Contractor warranty shall not relieve the General Contractor from any
responsibilities for primary one year General warranty.
C. In addition to the above warranty requirements, the Contractor shall provide a five
year warranty against water leakage, moisture migration or infiltration through the
under -slab plastic film waterproofing or through or around any penetrations through
said waterproofing, as evident by any deleterious effects to finished surfaces, odors,
etc., in the building interior.
171
3.06 CLEAN-UP
A. At the completion of the dampproofing and waterproofing work, remove all excess
materials and rubbish accumulated from this work and leave area clean.
•
B. Clean all finished surfaces of excess dampproofing materials applied under this
Section.
END OF SECTION
0
•
E
SECTION 07200 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1- General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Building Insulation work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
40 B. Certain items of Building Insulation are to be installed in relation to work of other
trades; schedule work, and cooperate in such manner that building insulation items
are placed in time to prevent delay of the work to insure proper application; proper
installation of these items is the responsibility of this Contractor.
•
I IN
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Building Insulation work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Thermal insulation.
2. Sound Insulation.
0
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07150 - Dampproofing masonry backup.
6
THERMAL INSULATION 2516 •
07200.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Thermal Conductivity: Thickness shown or specified are for thermal conductivity (k-
value at 75 degrees F) specified. Where insulation is identified by "R" value, provide
thickness required to achieve specified value.
B. Fire and Insurance Ratings: Comply with fire -resistance, flammability and insurance
ratings required and comply with regulations as interpreted by governing authorities. •
Provide U. L. labels or certification for all materials incorporated in fire resistant
assemblies.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
•
B. Prior to start of thermal insulation work, submit manufacturer's product data,
technical information and installation instructions for each type of material proposed
for use. 0
C. Submit for Architect's approval, sample of each type insulation and accessory
proposed for use.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver, store and protect materials in accordance with insulation manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
r
B. Deliver packaged goods to job in unopened containers or wrappings with
manufacturer's labels thereon.
1.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered
with ice or snow. Comply with insulation manufacturer's recommendations for
handling, storage and protection at job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Fiberglass batt thermal insulation as manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglass •
Corp. or United States Gypsum Co.:
1. In stud wall back-up to exterior masonry walls R-13 Kraft -faced fiberglass batt
insulation.
Cl
2516 THERMAL INSULATION
07200.3
•
2. Where insulation is left exposed use FSK-25 Fire -rated insulation in lieu of Kraft -
faced or Foil faced insulation.
B. Blown -in fiberglass insulation shall be placed in the attic above gypsum board,
approximately 10" thick, R-30.
C. Sound attenuation blankets as manufactured by United States Gypsum Co.; USG
Thermafiber, 2" thick mineral fiber blanket @ 2.5 pcf density or 3 1/2 fiberglass batt.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Batt Insulation
1. Batt insulation in stud wall back-up to exterior masonry walls.
a. Install insulation in framing spaces, leaving no voids. Install behind electrical
outlets, around structural obstructions, jambs, sills, etc., cover all such areas as
well as plates and headers with vapor barrier paper.
b. Insert flanged blankets between framing members, vapor barrier facing
building interior, secure flanges to edges of framing members at each end of
blanket and at 12" centers along length of flanges.
B. Blown insulation at attic:
1. Place polystryne baffles in between roof trusses to provide minimum 1" clear air
space between blown in insulation and bottom of roof deck.
2. Place insulation to provide uniform coverage and depth to achieve required "12"
valve.
C. Sound Insulation in Partitions:
1. Specified sound attenuation blankets are required in stud and plywood partitions
surrounding all mechanical rooms, toilet rooms, and elsewhere as indicated on the
Drawings.
• 2. After drywall has been installed on one side of the studs, install specified sound
attenuation blankets in the stud cavities by friction fitting between studs. Butt
ends of blankets closely together and fill all voids. Exercise care to fill around all
electrical boxes in walls around structural obstructions, jambs, sills, between deck
flutes and plates, etc. as required to provide sound, fire, and smoke stop. Allow
air space between backs of blankets and back of opposite face layer.
3.02 CLEAN UP
41 A. Remove all excess material and/or debris from the project and leave work in a neat
and workmanlike manner.
END OF SECTION
C
SECTION 07310 - SHINGLES
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
. and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Shingle work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the
site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as Contractor for this Section
of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Certain items of shingle roofing, roof flashing, etc. are to be installed in relation to
work of other trades; schedule work and cooperate in such a manner that the Shingle
Roofing is placed in time to prevent delay of the work to insure proper application,
proper installation of these items is the responsibility of this Contractor.
C. Examine all surfaces prepared by other trades to receive the Shingle Roofing work;
report any conditions considered detrimental to proper installation and performance;
make report in writing to Architect and in ample time to allow correction without
delaying the project. Application of flashing will be construed as acceptance of
surfaces and corrections of defects or imperfections shall be made by this Contractor
as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Shingle Roofing work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
a 1. Underlayment for roofing work.
2. Shingles
0
SHINGLES 2516 •
07310.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal
C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers - Minimum of five years' experience in manufacture of
fiber glass shingles.
1. Manville Sales Corporation
2. Certainteed Corporation
3. Celotex Corporation
4. Elk Corporation
B. Underwriter's Laboratories Labels:
1. Class A Label •
2. Wind Resistant Label.
C. Install shingles to meet requirements of published manufacturers instructions.
;7
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Shingles: Two of each style selected, indicating full range of color.
2. Roll Roofing: Two pieces, 12 in. x 12 in., indicating full range of color. `
B. Manufacturer's Literature:
1. Material description and recommended installation procedures.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in sealed packages with manufacturer's and Underwriter's
Laboratories labels intact and legible.
B. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations.
C. Do not stack bundles of shingles more than 4 ft. high. Store rolled goods on end.
•
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS 0
A. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces.
41
2516 SHINGLES
07310.3
•
•
•
B. Do not apply shingles when air temperature is below 40%.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Materials: Prestique II - 25 year Prorated Limited Warranty terms and conditions to
apply.
B. Workmanship - Applicator warranty against defects for two (2) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SHINGLES
A. Prestique II - three dimensional over -lay shingle as manufactured by the Elk
Corporation.
0 B. U.L. Class A fire resistance and U.L. standards for wind resistance, ASTM D3462
C. Color as selected by the Architect from manufacturers standard colors.
• 2.02 ASPHALT COATED UNDERLAYMENT
A. ASTM D-226-81 - 15 pound asphalt saturated fiberglass felt, unperforated, 36" wide.
B. Smooth -Surfaced Roll Roofing - for use with closed valley applications.
0
2.03 FASTENERS
A. Nails - Hot galvanized or aluminum 11 or 12 ga. barbed shank, 3/8" head, sharp -
pointed conventional, of sufficient length to penetrate at least 3/4" into solid decking,
or to penetrate through plywood sheathing.
B. Staples - All staples are to be pneumatically applied, zinc -coated, 16-gauge minimum
with minimum crown width 15/16" and sufficient length to penetrate 3/4" into solid
decking or through plywood sheathing.
2.04 BITUMINOUS PLASTIC CEMENT
A. SS-C-153C, Type 1, Class A.
0
SHINGLES 2516 •
07310.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Assure that surfaces to which shingles are to be applied are uniform, smooth, sound,
clean, dry and free of irregularities.
B. Verify that installation of metal flashings has been completed. •
C. Verify that work of other trades that penetrate roof deck has been completed.
D. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 UNDERLAYMENT •
A. Decks with slope from 2" to less than 4" in 12"
1. Fasten metal drip edge along the bottom edge (eaves) before felt is laid and to the
sides (rakes) after the felt is laid.
2. Apply two layers of underlayment parallel with eaves, laying first 19" as starter •
course, overlapping with 36" second layer.
3. Cover roof with 36" sheets of felt overlapping preceding layer by 19" exposing
17" of underlying sheet.
4. Secure underlayment to deck with sufficient fasteners to hold in place until
shingles are applied.
3.03 SHINGLES
A. Starter Strip/Chalk Lines
1. Starter Strip - Use shingles with tabs cut off as a starter strip. Offset first starter
shingle 6" so joints of starter do not lay under joints of first course of shingles.
Starter strip shingles shall overhang the eaves and rake by 1/2". Fasten starter
strip using same spacing as for shingles, and locate fasteners about 3" up from the
bottom edge. Avoid fastening where cut-outs will occur on the first course of
shingles.
2. Chalk lines
a. Snap chalk lines to guide application and maintain level lines parallel with the
eaves and ridge.
b. Hip Roofs: Strike vertical chalk line. Apply singles left and right as
described in the application instructions.
3. Trimming Shingles —Hip Roofs: Cut off even with hips.
B. Nailing/Fasteners
1. Standard Fastener Locations: Refer to individual product illustrations for correct
fastening positions. 0
L]
2516 SHINGLES
07310.5
C. Laminated Overlay Shingles
Important: Random offset of courses is essential for best appearance. End joints
must be offset a minimum of 4-1/2".
1. First Course: Start with a full shingle even with the starter course.
2. Second Course: Offset second shingle to the 4-1/2" alignment notch in the first
course shingle.
3. Third Course: Offset third shingle to the 7-1/2" alignment notch in the second
• course shingle.
4. Succeeding Courses: Continue this pattern, or any combination of these offsets,
to achieve a random appearance.
5. For horizontal alignment, place butt of above shingle at top of 6" horizontal cut
out.
• 6. Fastening Instructions: Place one fastener 1" from each end of shingle and one
12" in from each end, four fasteners in each shingle. All four fasteners must be
placed in the fastening line.
D. Hips and Ridges Laminated Overlay
1. Apply 12" dimension parallel to hip or ridge. For a more attractive appearance,
use double layer of hip and ridge shingles. Start hip or ridge with a triple
thickness of pre-cut hip and ridge shingles. Continue application with double
thickness, fasten as shown.
• 3.04 CONTINUOUS RIDGE VENTS
A. Install over roof deck with proper slot with air opening.
B. Install vent in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to provide a new
appearance and unobstructed air flow.
C. Install Ridge shingles using alignment guide and nailing area on vent.
• 3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Replace damaged shingles
B. Remove excess shingles not part of extra stock and debris from project site.
•
END OF SECTION
•
0
L7
SECTION 07420 - COMPOSITE BUILDING PANELS 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the work involving Composite Building Panels. Verify all
dimensions and conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
0
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades as not to cover up work in progress
and to prevent conflicts and delay.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Composite Building Panel work indicated or reasonably inferred from
the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Cement Board, Composite Building Panels.
2. Cement Board, Trim.
40 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
B. Section 07200 - Thermal Insulation
C. Section 09900 - Painting Composite Building Panels
0
COMPOSITE BUILDING PANELS 2516
07420.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation of this system shall be performed only by a firm with at least five (5)
years experience in the installation of composite building panels similar to those
required for this project.
B. Fire classification per ASTM E-84A shall be: Class A with a Flame Spread of 0 and
Smoke developed of 0.
C. Equipment and accessories shall meet or exceed applicable federal, state and local
building requirements, and be in full conformity with local fire department
requirements, and all authorities or Regulatory Agencies having jurisdiction.
•
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Manufacturer's product data, technical information and installation instructions for •
system materials proposed for use.
C. Submit for Architect's approval, two 4" x 6" samples of each type of finish specified,
trim, and accessories.
•
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Store panels flat on solid, continuous supports, in a dry, ventilated environment,
protected from the weather.
B. If the panels get wet, they should be uncrated immediately and towel dried. If
moisture is allowed to migrate between sheets during storage, surface etching or
staining may occur which could permanently damage panel finishes.
7
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELS
A. All cement board panels shall be as supplied by James Hardie Panels or Architectural •
Panels, Inc., (API) of Bridgewater, NJ., CKA Enterprises, Inc., (telephone 817/861-
9447), or equal.
B. Panel sizes shall be as shown on approved shop drawings subject to final verification
of "field measurements" by this contractor. Thickness shall be 5/16", primed for field
painting.
A
• 2516 COMPOSITE BUILDING PANELS
07420.3
2.02 FASTENING
A. Fasteners shall be self -drilling or self -piercing type as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.03 FABRICATION
•
A. Cement Board
1. Panels can be cut using diamond -tipped blades. Place saw shoe on back side of
panel to cut. To bevel edges, use a carborundum-flocked file, hand sander or
power sander.
2. Verify final panel sizes from field measurements rp for to fabrication.
3. When pre -drilling or face fastening, a variable speed screw gun is preferred.
Carbide -tipped bits and tools are recommended.
4. For protection of workmen, all fabrication and handling shall be in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and current OSHA standards.
•
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Assure that sub wall/surface components, to which panels and moldings are to be
attached, is sound and suitable for panel system installation.
B. Check compatibility between all sealants, mastics, etc. with panel finishes, surfaces
and accessories prLor to installation.
•
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with instructions and recommendations of Manufacturers as applicable to
• project conditions and supporting substrates.
B. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions
for thermal and structural movement.
• C. Follow the specific installation instructions, noted on approved shop drawings.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Panel Installer will leave panels in a clean undamaged condition. However, final
cleaning of the building, panels and accessories, etc. is to be performed by others.
Panels can be steam cleaned, or can be flushed with detergent and water and
thoroughly rinsed to wash away accumulations of soot, dirt or dust. Such final
0
COMPOSITE BUILDING PANELS 2516 •
07420.4
cleaning is to be performed only by qualified personnel and shall be in strict
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove and replace all damaged, or otherwise defective panels and/or moldings. 0
END OF SECTION
7
•
7
•
•
•
•
•
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
. and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Flashing and Sheet Metal work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as Contractor for this Section
of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Certain items of roofing, roof flashing, etc. are to be installed in relation to work of
other trades; schedule work and cooperate in such a manner that flashing items are
placed in time to prevent delay of work and insure proper application, proper
installation of these items is the responsibility of this Contractor.
C. Examine all surfaces prepared by other trades to receive flashing work; report any
conditions considered detrimental to proper installation and performance; make report
in writing to Architect and General Contractor in ample time to allow correction
without delaying the project. Application of flashing will be construed, as acceptance
of surfaces and corrections of defects or imperfections shall be made by this
Contractor as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Flashing and Sheet Metal work as indicated or reasonably inferred from
the Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. All roof flashings, gutters, downspout leaders, etc.
2. Downspouts and splashblocks.
3. Prefinished metal fascias.
4. Metal flashing and counter flashing.
0
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2516 •
07600.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Wood nailers and grounds. •
B. Section 07310 — Shingles
C. Section 07610 - Metal Roofing
D. Section 07900 - Sealants •
E. Division 15 - Flashing and pans for plumbing and mechanical work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE •
A. Applicator - Shall be a firm specializing in roofing sheet metal work with at least 5
years experience showing successful installations to work required for this project.
B. Single Responsibility - To the maximum extent possible, provide sheet metal and •
related materials produced by one manufacturer; exceptions as specified or approved.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
•
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to ordering materials and starting any sheet metal work, submit:
1. Complete list of all materials proposed for use giving manufacturer's brand name
or number designations or applicable standard including physical color samples. •
2. Samples of sheet metal work items, if requested by Architect.
3. Shop drawings showing layout, joining, profiles, finishes and anchorages for
sheet metal work. Furnish layouts at 1/4" scale and details at 3" scale.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
•
A. Comply with material manufacturer's published recommendations for storage
conditions as approved by Architect. Placing of materials on bare ground will not be
permitted.
•
B. Deliver packaged goods to job in unopened container or wrappings with
manufacturer's labels thereon.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS •
A. Coordinate work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper
sequencing of each installation.
0
2516 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07600.3
•
•
B. Protection of adjacent surfaces and finish work from damages due to the flashing
operations is the responsibility of this Contractor. Remove any spotting, stains,
smears, and make good any damage resulting from this work as directed by the
Architect at no expense to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Sheet metal: Galvanized sheet metal equal to Armco Zincgrip, with gauges and
shapes as shown on the Drawings.
B. Prefinished sheet metal flashings, gutters, and downspout leaders shall be formed
from galvanized 24 gauge steel, with Kynar 500 finish, color as selected by the
Architect. Provide removable, continuous leaf screen at gutters, 1/4" galvanized
hardware clothe.
•
C. Fasteners - Cadmium plated or galvanized.
D. Solder - ASTM B-32, half and half virgin lead and tin.
E. Downspouts shall be 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal, equal to Armco Zincgrip,
formed to shapes and sizes indicated on the Drawings.
1. Rectangular downspouts shall be terminated with an elbow grade, into
splashblock.
2. Anchor straps shall occur at top, bottom and midpoint, shape as indicated.
3. Sealant shall be urethane, or silicone as specified in Section 07900 — Sealants.
•
F. Splashblocks - Precast concrete, minimum 4" high x T-0" long x V-0" wide. Provide
one splashblock per each downspout location not piped underground.
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Perform work in accordance with recommended procedures of SMACNA
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual".
2. Avoid joints and seams as much as possible. Overlap seams in direction of flow
of water. Make proper provision for expansion in all work.
3. Shape and install sheet metal as indicated.
4. Provide joint strips, not less than 6" wide and identical in shape to the members
being joined. Crimp vertical edges of covers to hold edges tight against covered
surface. Apply a coat of flashing cement to the members being covered to seal
the joint cover strip to the two ends of material being covered. Take care not to
coat exposed surfaces.
•
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 2516
07600.4
5.
Where counter flashing is indicated to be built into other work, provide it to
contractor for installation and provide him with such assistance as is necessary for
proper location, jointing and installation.
6.
Make sheet metal work water and weather tight, with lines, arises and angles
sharp and true, and plain surfaces free from waves and buckles.
7.
Use bitumastic material between dissimilar metals to prevent electrolysis.
8.
At soldered seams and joints, tin metal for full area of contact. Soak single -
locked seams with solder. Do soldering slowly with well heated coppers,
thoroughly heating seams and completely filling with solder.
9.
Extend fascias, gravel stop, and miscellaneous flashing 4" onto roof surface. Nail
gravel stop flange to wood ground at 3". Set in continuous bed of roofing cement
to prevent dripping bitumen. Make end joints by butting adjoining pieces over
splice plate 8" long, similar in profile to spliced member. Fill space between
gravel stop and splice plate with roofing cement. Provide continuous lock strip at
bottom of gravel stop; nail at 12" with Stronghold nails.
10.
Exposed edges of sheet metal work shall be provided with 1/2" hemmed edges
unless otherwise approved by Architect.
11.
After work is completed remove protective coating from hemmed metal and leave
project in perfect condition. Touch up painting will be allowed only on approval
•
by Architect.
B. Gutters: Install gutters in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions, to
provide a completely watertight installation.
1. Slope bottom of gutters to provide complete drainage. Conceal slope of gutter •
with fascia to provide a straight and level appearance of gutter/eave line.
2. Provide expansion joints in gutters at "high" points such that water drains away to
downspout locations. Cover expansion joints with 6" cover plates, formed to
match gutter profile, with vertical edges crimped slightly to hold firmly against
surface of gutter without gaps.
3. Test gutter and downspouts as described below. Refer to item D (3) below.
C. Downspouts:
1. Furnish and install specified downspouts as locations indicated in the Drawings.
At connection to downspout leaders, set in sealant for completely watertight seal.
2. Seal downspout at PVC boot transition where piped underground.
3. At completion of downspouts and gutters, prior to installation of soffit, block
bottom of downspouts and flood gutters in presence of Architect. Repair leaks
and adjust gradients for proper drainage.
D. Prefinished Metal Fascia:
1. Install metal fascia in accordance with details on Drawings and as per
manufacturers recommendations.
2. Secure fascia only with concealed fasteners or clips at 24" o.c. Do not over
tighten screws. Butt joints and cover with 6" wide covers, vertical edges crimped,
and set in sealant as per item 3.01 A, 4 above.
3. Leave entire installation in clean, workmanlike manner with no scratches, gouges,
oil canning, etc. Replace any damage bent or otherwise imperfect material at no
cost to the Owner.
0
• 2516 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07600.5
E. Splashblocks:
1. Place splashblocks on level surface, sloping away from the building. All
• downspouts not piped underground will have a splashblock.
3.02 CLEANING
• A. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation.
3.03 PROTECTION
• A. Protect the completed installation from damage until final completion.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SECTION 07610 - METAL ROOFING
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
• attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications, which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Metal Roofing, and Roof Flashing work. Verify all
dimensions and conditions at the site.
• C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as Contractor for this Section
of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
•
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Certain items of metal roofing, roof flashing, etc. are to be installed in relation to
• work of other trades; schedule work and cooperate in such a manner that Metal
Roofing and Roof Flashing items are placed in time to prevent delay of the work to
insure proper application, proper installation of these items is the responsibility of this
Contractor.
C. Examine all surfaces prepared by other trades to receive Metal Roofing and Roof
• Flashing work; report any conditions considered detrimental to proper installation and
performance; make report in writing to Architect and in ample time to allow
correction without delaying the project. Application of roofing and flashing will be
construed as acceptance of surfaces and corrections of defects or imperfections shall
be made by this Contractor as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
•
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
• complete all Metal Roofing and Roof Flashing work as indicated or reasonably
inferred from the Drawings. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Felt underlayment.
• 2. Metal roofing and flashing systems.
3. Installation of sheet metal, roofing accessories, curbs, etc., at all mechanical roof
penetrations.
•
METAL ROOFING 2516
07610.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Plywood Roof Deck, and Grounds. 41
B. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
C. Division 15 - Flashing and pans for plumbing and mechanical work.
C
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator - Shall be approved or certified by roof material manufacturer and shall be
a firm specializing in metal roofing work with at least five years experience showing
a minimum of five successful installations similar to work required for this project.
B. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. Underwriters Laboratories, U.L. 90; Factory Mutual, I-90; or Texas General Basis
Schedule.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM Standards in Building Codes.
3. Specifications for the Design of Light -Gage Cold Formed Steel Structural
Members - latest edition.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Roofing System (except rigid insulation)
a. Building Technologies Corp.
b. Metal Building Components, Inc.
c. Architectural Building Components.
d. Barriage
1.06 SUBMITTALS •
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to ordering material and starting any roofing work, submit:
1. Two (2) minimum 12" x 12" roof panel material and color samples.
2. Approximate 24" x 24" roofing system mock-up mounted on plywood and
indicating double -lock seam, seam support strip and support spacer, eave starter,
ridge cap, concealed fasteners and clips, roofing felt, etc.
3. Manufacturer's descriptive literature with highlighting of all information related to
the specific requirements for this project.
4. On manufacturer's letterhead written verification that proposed installer is
authorized by the manufacturer to install the specified system for this particular
project.
5. Submit sample of manufacturer's proposed warranty.
6. On manufacturer's letterhead written verification that the proposed roofing system
as drawn and specified for this project will meet or exceed wind uplift
requirements of U.L. 90 or FM I90.
r,
• 2516 METAL ROOFING
07610.3
C. Shop Drawings
1. Submit roof plan indicating detail Keys, noting various system components,
• standing seam layout, transverse joints (if required by manufacturer) and all roof
penetrations.
2. Submit details for all edge conditions, seams, joints, ridges, intersections, and
penetrations. Details keyed to roof plan.
3. Submit manufacturer's approved details where special job conditions require
details other than indicated in the Drawings.
•
D. Maintenance Procedures
1. Within 10 days of the date of Substantial Completion of the project, deliver to the
Owner 3 copies of the manufacturer's printed instructions regarding care and
maintenance of the roof.
•
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
C
A. Comply with material manufacturer's published recommendations for storage
conditions as approved by Architect.
B. Materials shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer's original unopened
packaging.
C. All components, particularly metal panels, are to be kept dry until installed.
• Condensate shall not be allowed to form between panels. Poly film shall not be used
as a cover.
•
D. Handle roofing panels carefully to ensure against dents, creases, bends or other
damage. Damaged roofing panels are not acceptable for installation.
1.08 PRE -ROOFING CONFERENCE
A. Prior to beginning the metal roof work, a pre -roofing conference shall be held to
review the work to be accomplished. Representatives of the Owner, Architect, and
General Contractor, metal roof contractor, metal roof system manufacturer's
representative, contractor's superintendent, and other parties whose work involves
access to the roof shall attend. The pre -roofing conference shall be held after shop
drawings have been reviewed (and returned) and after the metal roofing contractor
has inspected the building structure. The conference shall be held not more than one
week prior to beginning roofing.
•
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
• A. General
1. Roofing system shall be LokSeam Series manufactured by MBCI or equivalent by
a U.L. listed manufacturer.
2. System shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings, these specifications,
manufacturer's system requirements and final shop drawings for all approved U.L.
assembly.
•
METAL ROOFING 2516 •
07610.4
B. Roof Panels
1. Roofing system shall be factory formed Snap -Seam panels as manufactured by
MBCI; 18" wide with 1 3/4" high x 3/8" wide standing seam.
2. 24-gauge galvanized steel painted with Kynar 500 finish. Color as selected by the
Architect.
3. Provide panels in full length from ridge to eave, where possible.
4. Where single length panels are not practical, provide mated swaged panels for
positive joint end laps, fabricated with overlap in direction of water flow. •
5. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction.
Exposed fasteners in roofing panels will not be permitted.
C. Seams
1. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam without use of field seaming •
machines.
2. Engineer standing seam to lock -up and resist joint disengagement during design
wind uplift conditions.
3. Fabricate female leg with pressure equalized capillary break to prevent water
siphoning through joints.
4. Provide factory sealant on leading edge of female seam leg to aid in resistance of •
leaks and to provide panel -to -panel seal while allowing expansion and contraction
movement.
D. Clips
1. Provide UL listed clip designed to allow panels to thermally expand and contract.
2. Fabricate clips with embossments that raise underside of panels above substrate to •
allow underside ventilation.
3. Fabricate clips with structurally embossed outstanding legs to prevent distortion
due to wind uplift forces.
E. Sheet Panel Fasteners
•
1. Manufacturer's standard system of self -tapping screws, bolts, and nuts, self-
locking rivets, self-locking bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners
designed to withstand design loads. Self -drilling fasteners are not acceptable.
2. Provide metal -backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners bearing on
weather side of panels.
•
3. Use stainless steel, aluminum or aluminum -zinc headed fasteners for exterior
application and galvanized or cadmium plated fasteners or interior applications.
Lock rivets where required shall be aluminum or stainless steel.
4. Locate and space fastenings for true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use
proper the type of fastening tools to obtain controlled uniformed compression for
positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer.
•
F. Tape Sealant: 99% solids, pressure sensitive gray complex polyisobutylene/isoprene
elastomer based sealing compound tape with release paper backing. Not less than
3/4" wide and 1/8" thick, non -sag, nontoxic, nonstaining and permanently elastic.
G. Joint Sealant: Off white single component, solvent release type, non -skimming butyl
based pumpable sealant designed to be used in joints between metals panels and other
parts on roofs where air, dust and water seals are required as recommended by
manufacturer.
0
2516 METAL ROOFING
07610.5
H. Underlayment
1. ASTM D226.81-30 pound asphalt saturated fiberglass felt un-perforated, 36"
wide.
2. Ice and Water shield by W. R. Grace or equal, at valley locations and where
shown or required.
I. Roof Penetration Flashing:
1. Manufacturer: ITW Buildex or approved equal.
• 2. Type - "Dektite", flexible, weather -resistant, E.P.D.M. pipe flashing system.
J. Accessories
1. Accessories shall be furnished in sizes and shapes shown on the Drawings.
2. Location of standard accessories shall be as shown on erection drawings.
' 3. Material used in flashing and transition parts and furnished as standard may or
may not match the roof panel material. Parts shall be compatible and shall not
cause a corrosive condition. Copper and lead materials shall not be used with
zinc or aluminum coated panels.
• PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. All components of the roof paneling system shall be designed in accordance with
• sound engineering methods and practices.
•
B. Roof panels shall be designed in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design
of Light -Gauge Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition".
C. Paneling system shall be designed to support design live loads.
D. All end wall trim and roof transition flashings shall allow the roof panel to move
relative to the walls as the roof expands and contracts with temperature changes.
E. The roof panel shall not be considered a safe work platform until completely secured
to the structural system. Walkboards or other safety equipment as required by safety
standards shall be provided by the erecting contractor to provide worker safety during
panel installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
•
A. Substrate
1. Examine substrate to insure it is properly secured and prepared to receive metal
roofing.
2. Ensure substrate is installed flat, free from objectionable warp, wave, and buckle.
• 3. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C
METAL ROOFING 2516
07610.6
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Felt Underlayment (solid substrate): •
1. Provide one layer of No. 30 felt with horizontal overlaps and end laps staggered
between layers.
2. Lay parallel to ridge line with 2-1/2" horizontal laps and 6" vertical laps.
B. Ice and Water Shield
1. Provide one layer of Ice and Water Shield at valleys over solid substrate.
2. Overlap sides and ends per manufacture's written instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - ROOF SYSTEM
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and erection in •
order to achieve weathertight installation. Install in accordance with approved shop
drawings.
B. Standing Seam System
1. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and •
recommendations.
2. Anchor securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria.
3. Fully seat adjacent panel to achieve continuous engagement of standing seam
joint.
•
C. Dissimilar Metals:
1. Where sheet metal is in contact with dissimilar metals, execute juncture to
facilitate drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action.
2. At point of contact with dissimilar metal, coat metal with protective paint or tape
that can be placed between metals.
D. Field apply sealant to penetrations, transitions, and other locations necessary (not
standing seam) for airtight, waterproof installation.
E. Align transverse joints of roofing panels to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
•
F. Install all roofing and accessories sin accordance with approval with approved shop
drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions.
G. The roof shall provide for thermal expansion/contraction without detrimental effect
on the roof panel when there is a +/-100 degrees F. temperature difference between •
the inside structural framework of the building and the temperature of the roof panels.
H. Completed installation shall be watertight during a blowing rain, smooth and uniform
in color and appearance. Install weather seal (neoprene closures) under ridge
cap/flesh and seal roof panels at eave, valley, and rake conditions to exclude weather.
•
I. Roofing contractor shall protect the completed installation from damage until project
completion and shall arrange for final inspection, approval and guarantee by the
system.
0
• 2516 METAL ROOFING
07610.7
3.05 INSTALLATION - ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING
• A. Cut Dektite to pipe diameter leaving 1/2" straight collar against pipe for maximum
sealing.
•
•
B. Slide flexible flashing over pipe to be flashed (clean pipe and roof first) using water
to aide in sliding over pipe.
C. Apply approved sealant to the underside of the ribbed aluminum base.
D. Press flashing into place following contours of the roof panels. A blunt tool may be
required to press base into place.
E. Using self -drilling fasteners, install as required to prevent gaps between flashing base
and roof panel.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation.
3.08 PROTECTION
• A. Roofing contractor shall protect the completed installation from damage until project
completion and shall arrange for final inspection, approval and warranty by the
system manufacturer.
• 3.09 WARRANTY
A. Twenty Year Warranty
1. Roofing Contractor's Responsibilities
a. Roofing installer shall guarantee the performance of the entire system for a
• minimum of two years after the date of Substantial Completion for the project.
b. Bidders shall make arrangements with the roofing system manufacturer during
the bidding period to jointly provide the required warranty during this two
year period.
c. Any failure of the manufacturer to honor warranty obligations shall not relieve
the roofing contractor of this requirement to provide a full system warranty.
• 2. System Manufacturer's Responsibilities
a. Roofing system manufacturer shall jointly guarantee the performance of the
entire system with the roofing contractor during the first two years after the
date of Substantial Completion for the project.
b. The system manufacturer shall continue to guarantee the performance of the
• roofing system for an additional eighteen (18) years after the initial two (2)
year warranty period.
3. Warranty Requirements
a. Complete system warranty shall provide for the correction of the following
defects: water leaks, complete or partial blow -off in wind velocities at or
below those covered by the manufacturer's written warranty; surface peeling,
•
METAL ROOFING 2516 S
07610.8
cracking, chipping or spalling; discoloration of metal panels or related
accessories; failure of soldered joints; other defects which may be covered in
the manufacturer's written warranty.
b. During the first two year warranty period, repair of such defects, including
material and labor, shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner.
During the remaining eighteen year warranty period, manufacturer's
obligations shall be limited to providing replacement materials.
END OF SECTION •
7
•
•
•
•
•
J
•
SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
• attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Caulking and Sealing work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
• C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
•
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects or is affected by Caulking and Sealing work.
B. Certain items of Caulking and Sealing are to be installed in relation to work of other
• trades; schedule work, and cooperate in such manner that caulking and sealing items
are placed in time to prevent delay of the work to insure proper application; proper
installation of these items is the responsibility of this Contractor.
C. Examine all surfaces prepared by other trades to receive Caulking and Sealing work;
report any conditions considered detrimental to proper installation and performance;
• make report in writing to Architect in ample time to allow correction without
delaying the project. Application of Caulking and Sealing will be construed, as
acceptance of surfaces and corrections of defects or imperfections shall be made by
this Contractor as directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
• 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Caulking and Sealing work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
• Drawings and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Caulking and sealing.
2. Back up materials and primers.
•
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02520 - Sealants for Site Concrete Joints
40
SEALANTS 2516
07900.2
B. Section 04200 -Masonry
C. Section 07150 - Dampproofing and Waterproofing
D. Section 09250 - Acoustic Sealants in Partitions
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE •
A. Applicator Qualifications - A firm which has specialized for not less than five years
in installation of type of sealants and caulking required for this project.
1.06 SUBMITTALS •
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of sealant and caulking work, submit manufacturer's product data,
technical information and installation instructions for each type of material proposed •
for use, and samples of manufacturer's colors.
C. If requested, submit for Architect's approval, sample of each type materials proposed
for use.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver, store and protect materials in accordance with product manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
B. Deliver packaged goods to job in unopened containers or wrappings with
manufacturer's labels thereon.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions - Do not proceed with installation of sealants under unfavorable
weather conditions. Install sealants when temperature is in lower half of sealant's
temperature range and as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protection of Finish Work - Protection of adjacent surfaces and finish work from
damage due to caulking and sealing operations is responsibility of this Contractor.
Remove any spotting, stains, smears and make good any damage resulting from this
work as directed by the Architect at no expense to the Owner.
•
•
•
•
0
2516 SEALANTS
07900.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Sealants and caulking
1. Sealant:
a. Compounds for all exterior joints, all sight exposed joints, and at other
i
locations referred to on the Drawings as "sealant" shall be:
(1) Polysulphide: two component, Type 1, A&B conforming to F.S. TT-2230
or TT-S-227b, bearing Thiokol Corp. seal of approval.
(2) Urethane: one or two part polyurethane polymer, Type II, Class A,
conforming to F.S. TT-S-00230C or TT-S-00227E.
b. Acceptable manufacturers of products meeting the above requirements:
(1) Sonneborn Building Products, Inc.
(2) Tremco Mfg. Co.
(3) Pecora, Inc.
(4) W.R. Grace & Co.
(5) Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Sealants shall cure or polymerize by solvent release, moisture absorption, or
•
catalyst.
d. Primer shall be provided at all joints requiring sealant. Primers shall be as
specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer.
e. Colors (not standard colors) shall be as selected by Architect.
2. Caulking compound:
a. Caulking compound for use at concealed locations, not referred to, as
"sealant" shall be standard caulking compound, watertight, gun consistency,
conforming to FS TT-0598, grade 1, as manufactured by:
(1) L. Sonneborn Sons, Inc.
(2) Tremco Mfg. Co.
(3) Pecora, Inc.
.
B. Joint Backing:
1. Backer rod for dynamically moving joints shall be highly compressible rod stock
of closed -cell polyethylene foam, butyl rubber, or non -bleeding neoprene foam,
compatible with type of sealant provided.
2. Joint backing for fully concealed, non-moving joints, for air and water seal (e.g.
bedding of sills, sealing or interior pipe penetrations thru walls and floors, etc.)
and generally referred to as caulking compound joints shall be untreated oakum,
rope yarn or open cell polyethylene foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation:
1. Before applying caulking or sealant <to new or existing materials, rake out
existing sealants and caulk, backer rods, etc.>; clean all surfaces to receive this
material free of dirt, grease or other foreign matter.
Ll
SEALANTS 2516
07900.4
2. Set back-up material 1/2 joint width from surface (not to exceed 1/2" deep).
Apply primers as recommended by compound manufacturer.
B. Sealant:
1. Seal perimeter of exterior openings, joints between dissimilar materials, control
joints and other locations on exterior and interior where sealant or caulking is
required to produce a weathertight, light -tight neat joint.
2. Manufacturer's directions shall be followed closely in mixing and applying the
base compound and curing agent. Compound shall be applied with air gun to
form flexible sealed joints. Mask off as necessary to provide neat, even
application. Apply primer prior to sealant application where surface conditions
require.
3. Do not disturb compound by touching, washing, or otherwise until it has cured
tack free (24-36 hours).
4. Excess compound shall be removed from surfaces after curing.
5. Properly "tool" all joints and smooth uneven surfaces with soft brush and
appropriate solvent as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Caulking:
1. Apply caulking under thresholds, sills, behind frames, at pipe penetrations thru
floors and walls, and at concealed joints. Provide full bed of caulk or otherwise
as required to insure tight construction.
2. If joint to receive caulking is greater than 2" depth, the joint shall be packed to no
more than 1" in depth with back up material and then caulked.
3. Apply compound with gun of proper nozzle size in accordance with compound
manufacturer's directions. Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints solid.
Do not apply compounds when temperature is below 40 degrees F. Properly
"tool" all joints.
D. Upon completion, joint surfaces shall be smooth, even and watertight. Complete
work before final coat of paint. After surface has cured, remove any and all material
used in dressing joints which would interfere with paint adherence.
3.02 WARRANTY
A. The Sub -Contractor for this Section shall give the Owner a written warranty against
water leaks that may occur through any joints caulked or sealed by this Section. This
warranty shall be for a period of two years from the date of acceptance of the work by
the Owner, and shall provide that this Contractor, at his own expense, will do all work
and provide all materials necessary to correct any such leaks that may occur.
END OF SECTION
r,
L
•
C:
i
n
u
0
E
C:
9
SECTION 08110 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2516
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
. A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
. this Section describe the Metal Doors and Frame work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
i B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close jointing and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
C
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Metal Doors and Frame work as indicated or reasonably inferred from
the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Metal doors.
2. Metal frames.
0 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
B. Section 04430 — Stone Masonry
Is
C. Section 06200 - Installation of doors and hardware.
D. Section 08700 - Finish hardware.
0
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2516
08110.2
E. Section 09900 - Field painting of metal doors and frames.
•
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. ASTM A-366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. '
2. ASTM A-525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process,
General Requirements.
3. ASTM A-569 - Steel, Carbon, Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
4. ASTM A-591 - Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc Coated.
5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM), as applicable to
fire -rated steel doors and frames. •
B. Uniformity - Provide doors and frames as produced by one manufacturer unless
otherwise approved.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: •
1. CeCo Corporation.
2. Pearland Industries.
3. Republic Builders Products Corp.
4. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company.
i
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
•
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Door and frame manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation
instructions.
2. Shop drawings showing or scheduling each door's location, size, thickness, details
of construction, fire -rating (where applicable), location and installation .
requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements. Schedule of doors and
frames shall be prepared using same reference numbers for openings and details
as those used on contract drawings.
C. At time of delivery and as applicable, submit door manufacturer's certification for
oversize fire -rated doors and frames as approved. 0
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and
job storage.
0
2516 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110.3
B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired
provided finished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to
Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover and in manner that will avoid rust
and damage. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create
humidity chamber. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air
circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Doors
1.
Doors shall be of types and sizes shown on approved shop drawings, and shall be
fully welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or
vertical edges. Minimum door thickness shall be 1-3/4" unless specifically noted
or shown differently.
2.
Doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance, free from warpage and
buckle. Corner bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for gauge
of metal used. Fill interior with foamed -in -place urethane.
3.
Faces shall be fabricated of 18 gauge cold rolled, commercial grades steel (ASTM
A-366) joined at vertical edges of door by a continuous weld extending full height
of door. Welds shall be ground, filled and dressed smooth to provide a smooth
flush surface.
4.
Top and bottom edges of doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel
channel not less than 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot welded to
both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional 16 gauge flush closing channel
at top and bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in the bottom closure of
exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture.
5.
Edge profile shall be provided on both vertical edges of single -acting swing doors
- beveled 1/8" in 2". Narrow side of door is in contact with stop of frame.
6.
Hardware reinforcements:
a. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully
templated hardware, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and
templates provided by Section 08700. Where surface -mounted hardware is to
be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates only.
b. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
`
(1) Hinge & pivot reinforcements: 7 gauge.
(2) Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts, concealed holders, concealed or
surface -mounted closers: 12 gauge.
7.
Edge clearances:
a. Between door & frame at head and jambs: 1/8".
f%
b. At door sills with threshold, as required to suit threshold.
0
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2516
08110.4
B. Frames
1. Materials
a.
Frames for exterior openings shall be made of commercial grade, cold rolled
steel conforming to ASTM A-366, not less than 14 gauge, and shall be
galvanized (zinc coated).
b.
Frames for interior openings shall be either commercial grade, cold -rolled
steel conforming to ASTM A-366 or commercial grades hot rolled and
pickled steel conforming to ASTM A-569. Metal thickness shall be not less
M
than 16 gauge for frames at openings 4'-0" or less in width and not less than
14 gauge for frames at openings over 4'-0" in width.
2. Design and Construction
a.
Frames shall be custom made, welded units with integral trim of sizes and
shapes shown on approved shop drawings.
b.
Frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square true and free of
defects, warp and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight and
have uniform profile throughout their length.
c.
Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends shall be as shown on approved shop
drawings.
d.
Corner joints shall have contact edges closed tight, with trim faces mitered
and continuously welded, and stops butted. The use of gussets shall not be
permitted.
e.
Minimum depth of stops shall be 5/8".
f.
Hardware reinforcements:
(1) Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at factory for fully
templated mortised hardware in accordance with approved hardware
schedule and templates provided by Section 08700. Where surface -
mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates
only.
(2) Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows:
(a) Hinge and pivot reinforcements (1-1/4" x 10" minimum size): 7
gauge.
(b) Reinforcements for strike, flush bolts, closers, surface -mounted
hardware and panic devices: 12 gauge.
g.
Floor anchors -shall be securely welded inside each jamb, with holes for floor
anchorage.
h.
Jamb anchors:
(1) Frames for installation in wood stud partitions shall be provided with steel
anchors of suitable approved design, not less than 16 gauge thickness,
+
securely welded inside each jamb as follows:
(a) Frames up to 76" height - 4 anchors.
(b) Frames 7'6" to 8'0" height - 5 anchors.
i.
Dust cover boxes of not less than 26 gauge steel shall be provided at all
mortised hardware items.
j.
Frames shall be provided with steel spreader temporarily attached to bottoms
+*
of both jambs for bracing during shipping and handling.
A
2516 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110.5
k. Loose glazing stops shall be of cold rolled steel, not less than 18 gauge
thickness, butted at corner joints and secured to the frame with countersunk
cadmium or zinc -plated screws.
C. Finish:
1. Shop paint steel (whether galvanized or ungalvanized) and steel accessories as
follows:
a. Clean surfaces free of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign
matter.
b. Chemically treat surfaces to insure maximum paint adhesion and apply one
coat of an approved baked -on rust -inhibitive primer paint to provide a
minimum 0.5 mil dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
• A. Install doors and frames in accordance with details, drawings and approved schedules
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
•
•
•
B. Furnish to Section 06200 for installation.
END OF SECTION
2
v
SECTION 08213 - PLASTIC FACED DOORS
if PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - Special Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Plastic Faced Door work.
. C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
i A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
furnish all Plastic Faced Doors as indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawing
and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Plastic laminate faced doors, non -rated.
2. Plastic laminate faced doors, 1-1/2 hour fire -rated labeled doors where scheduled.
' 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06200 - Installation of Doors
B. Section 08110 - Metal Frames
C. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware
D. Section 08800 - Glazing
4 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. AWI Quality Standard, Guide Specifications for Architectural Flush Doors -
Latest Edition, Section 1300.
6
PLASTIC FACED DOORS 2516
08213.2
B. Uniformity - Provide doors as produced by one manufacturer unless otherwise
specified or approved. S
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Buell Door Company.
2. Ragland Manufacturing Company Inc.
3. Timco Industries, Inc.
4. Weyerhauser Company.
5. VT Industries, Inc.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Door manufacturer's product data, specifications and installation instructions for
each type of door proposed for use.
a. Include details of core and edge construction, trim for glass, louvers and
similar construction.
b. Include certifications as required to show compliance with specifications.
2. Shop drawings showing or scheduling location, size, thickness, elevation, details
of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire rating (where
applicable) and other pertinent data for each plastic faced door required.
3. Samples of plastic laminate colors and patterns for Architect's selection.
4. Written guarantee that any of the following shall be cause for rejection and that
rejected doors will be promptly replaced with new acceptable doors:
a. "Photographing" of core.
b. Imperfections which show in finished door.
c. Warp, bow, cup or twist in excess of NWMA or AWI standards for each type
of door furnished.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protect doors from weather and all other damaging conditions until Final completion
of building by the Owner.
B. Store doors undercover in a dry location. Do not store or install doors in areas that
are not closed in or in areas where masonry, concrete, plaster and cement finishes are
not dry.
C. Doors with scratched faces, chipped corners, dented edges or delaminated faces will
be rejected.
7
r 2516 PLASTIC FACED DOORS
08213.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
V 2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Door Types: (Refer to door schedule for type locations):
1. Solid Core - AWI Type PC-HPDL-5, Section 1300-S-8; 1-3/4" thick, flush, solid
core (particleboard) with decorative laminate covering on both faces.
2. U.L. "B" label: - AWI Type FD-HPDL-5, Section 1300-S-14; 1-3/4" thick, flush,
solid core (mineral) with decorative laminate covering on both faces, (FD 1-1/2).
B. Door Construction
1. Core - Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, grade 1-LD-1.
2. Core for labeled doors - Manufacturer's standard mineral core construction as
required to provide fire -resistance rating indicated.
3. Stiles and rails - Minimum 1-1/4" before trimming, one or two pieces, glue to
core prior to sanding, preservative treated hardwood and sealed.
4. Faces GP-50 (0.050) high pressure decorative plastic laminate complying with FS
L-P-508G, Style D, Type I, Class 1 or NEMA Standard LDI, Type I general
• purpose laminates.
5. Paint or stain edges to match faces of doors.
6. Adhesive - AWI Type I, thermosetting water-resistant adhesive.
7. Make cut outs for door louvers.
0 2.02 FABRICATION
A. Obtain all required job measurements to assure proper manufacture of doors to fit job
conditions. Particularly coordinate work with work of other Sections of the
Specifications that provide door frames or items that will be installed in and on doors.
• B. Schedule door deliveries to the site to meet job schedules for glazing installation,
hanging and locking, sealing and painting of edges.
C. Bevel strike edge of doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches.
• D. Fabricate fire rated doors to UL labeling requirements and ship with labels affixed.
PJ
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish to Section 00200 for installation.
B. Do not install doors until wet trade Work is completed and the areas to receive doors.
C. Condition doors to the average prevailing humidity of the rooms before hanging. Do
not subject doors to abnormal or sudden changes in heat, dryness, or humidity.
D. Field cutting, trimming, and fitting of prefinished doors will not be permitted.
PLASTIC FACED DOORS 2516
08213.4
E. Apply hardware in accordance with approved hardware manufacturer's instructions
and templates provided by Section 08700. Adjust door installation to provide
uniform clearance at head and jambs and to contact stops uniformly. Remove and 411
replace doors which are found to be warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged and
cannot be properly fitted in frames.
F. Protect doors and hardware during construction. Repair marred finishes to perfectly
match door surface to the Architect's satisfaction or replace the door.
END OF SECTION
r*
6
•
0
r
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCE
1/ PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
* attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Aluminum Entrance.
C:
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by Aluminum Entrance.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close joining and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Aluminum Entrance work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Aluminum door and frame.
• 2. Finish hardware, (except lock cylinders), weatherstripping and threshold for
aluminum entrance door.
1.04 RELATED WORK
7 A. Section 07900 - Perimeter Sealants
B. Section 08700 - Cylinders for locks.
C. Section 08800 - Glazing
C
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. ASTM B-209 - Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate.
6
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2516
08410.2
2. ASTM B-221 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
3. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront, and Entrance Guide
Specification Manual.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Thermal movement - Provide for expansion and contraction resulting from
ambient temperature range of 140 degrees (20 degrees F to 160 degrees F).
2. Wind loading - 25 lbs/sf (inward and outward).
3. Air infiltration - Not to exceed 0.06 CFM per square foot, tested in accordance
with ASTM E-283.
4. Water infiltration - No uncontrolled water penetration, tested in accordance with
ASTM E-331.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Kawneer. ,
2. Anaconda Aluminum.
3. PPG Industries.
4. Vistawall Architectural Products.
D. Install products under door and frame manufacturer's supervision.
E. Work of this section shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped
Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b, Vernon's Texas
Civil Statues and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
i
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions.
2. Shop drawings showing elevations, sections, finishes, hardware and installation
details.
3. Samples of:
a. Metal finishes.
b. Accessories, hardware, if requested; samples may be used in the work if •
acceptable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
E
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Kawneer Medium Stile "350" doors.
1. Materials - Door, door frame and trim moldings shall be extruded of 6063 - T5
alloy and temper. Glazing gaskets for doors shall be EPDM elastomeric
extrusions.
2. Fabrication
a. Basic door sections shall be 1-3/4" in depth with nominal 3-1/2" stile width, 3
'fz" top rail, 6" cross rail and 6 'W' bottom rail. Major portions of door stile
and rail extrusions shall be .188" nominal thickness. Door glazing molding
4
2516 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410.3
shall be .050" thick snap -in type with EDPM elastomeric extrusions or
thermoplastic elastomer glazing gaskets. No exposed screws shall be used to
secure glazing stops in place. Exterior stops shall be set with tamper resistant
clips.
b.
Reinforce doors and door frames for hardware. Tap and thread
reinforcements to receive hardware.
c.
Door shall be equipped with an adjustable mechanism located in the top rail
near the lock stile which will provide for minor clearance adjustments after
•
installation.
d.
Door corner construction shall consist of both sigma deep -penetration welds
and mechanical fastening.
e.
Entrance door shall be weatherstripped at jambs, top rails, meeting stiles and
at the threshold.
110
f.
Finish — Permanodic #40 dark bronze or approved equal.
3. Hardware for entrances shall be entrance manufacturer's standard hardware as
follows:
a.
Push/Pull - Kawneer "Style CO-9" push/pull.
b.
Pivots - Pivots shall be tamper proof when door is locked. Manufacturers
standard top, bottom and intermediate offset pivots.
c.
Door closers - LCN 4040
d.
Thresholds - Kawneer extruded aluminum threshold (mill finish) for offset
pivots.
e.
Finish for all hardware items shall dark anodized to match doors and frames.
f.
Furnish hardware templates to aluminum frame fabricator as necessary for
t
proper fabrication and reinforcing of frames to receive hardware.
•
U
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Handling and installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and approved shop drawings.
2. Any items delivered to the job site or installed with warps, bends, improper joints,
or other defects, or with finish marred or scratched will be rejected.
3. Frames in contact with masonry, mortar, plaster or dissimilar metals shall be
given a heavy coating of Pratt & Lambert or Sherwin-Williams asphaltic varnish
on the contact surfaces. Take care not to paint sight exposed surfaces.
4. Frames shall be installed with sufficient anchorage to withstand 25 pounds per
square foot wind load, after glazing, with no apparent movement or tendency to
fail. All installation screws shall be installed carefully to avoid scratching or
gouging of finish.
5. Install all frames and frame members plumb, square, level, and at their proper
elevation and plane.
6. Install threshold by setting in a full bed of mastic.
7. Conceal all fastenings where possible.
8. Install all items of hardware, and adjust for proper operation.
9. After installation, this Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect
the units and finish from damage.
•
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2516 •
08410.4
B. Inspection: Immediately prior to turning over to Owner, inspect all aluminum doors
for proper function and installation of doors and hardware, and make all necessary
repairs and adjustments.
C. Cleaning:
1. Remove all debris caused by this work from the site.
2. Immediately prior to final inspection of the buildings by the Owner, clean finger
marks, etc., from all finished of the work installed by this Section as
recommended by manufacturer. No abrasive agents shall be used.
3.02 WARRANTY
A. Submit four (4) copies of written warranty signed by the Manufacturer, Installer and ,
Contractor, agreeing to replace aluminum doors and/or aluminum frames which fail
in materials or workmanship within one (1) year of the date of acceptance. Failure of
materials or workmanship shall include (but not be limited to) failures in operation of
doors and hardware, excessive leakage or air infiltration, excessive deflections,
deterioration of finish or metal in excess or normal weathering, and defects in
accessories, weatherstripping, and other components of the work.;
END OF SECTION
e
0
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
& PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
40 attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Aluminum Window work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by Aluminum Window work.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close joining and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
w complete all Aluminum Windows work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Aluminum windows, field glazed.
2. All anchors, stiffeners, fasteners, and connectors necessary to anchor trim, etc.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07900 - Perimeter sealants.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer:
1. All fixed glass and project -in windows, mullions, trim, etc. shall be manufactured
! by Alenco, A Division of Reliant Building Products, Inc., Bryan, Texas.
2. Manufacturer's published specifications are hereby made a part of these
specifications.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2516
08520.2
3. Other manufacturers of completely equivalent components will be considered for
approval only after submittals of complete substantiating data.
fa
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions.
2. Shop drawings showing elevations, sections, finishes, hardware and installation
details.
3. Samples of:
a. Metal finishes. ie
b. Accessories, hardware, if requested; samples may be used in the work if
acceptable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. Fixed Glass and Project - in Aluminum Windows:
1. Fixed glass frames - Alenco Series 3700, Inside glazing; no screens required.
B. Miscellaneous trim, jamb closures, etc. as detailed.
C. Finish: All aluminum windows, mullions, trim, stops, etc. shall receive a hardcoat
Dark Bronze finish equal to Designation AA-M10 C22 A44, minimum coating
thickness 0.7 mil, unless otherwise indicated.
A
2.02 GLAZING
A. All exterior aluminum windows shall be left open for field glazing with 5/8"
insulating glass. 19
B. Furnish standard aluminum glazing beads.
C. Contractor's Option:
All exterior aluminum windows shall be factory glazed with 5/8" insulating glass.
Provide Solar Bronze outboard lite with clear inboard lite. Provide tempered glass
where required.
J
2516 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
11 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Installation shall be by this Contractor using only skilled mechanics with
experience in this trade.
r 2. Conceal all fastenings where possible.
3. All joining shall be executed in an inconspicuous manner using coped and mitered
hairline joints. Items delivered to the job site or installed with warps, bends, or
other defects or with finish marred or scratched will be rejected.
4. After installation, Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect finish
from damage.
5. Frames and trim in contact with masonry/mortar, plaster or dissimilar metals shall
be given a heavy coating of Pratt and Lambert or Sherwin-Williams asphaltic
varnish on the contact surfaces. Take care not to paint sight exposed surfaces.
B. Cleaning
S 1. Clean all aluminum sections and leave ready to receive glass. Remove all finger,
pencil, or other marks. Replace any sections scratched or marred. Touch-up
painting is not acceptable. Use no abrasive agents in cleaning operations.
C. Warranty
1. Provide a full one year warranty on all windows, parts, mechanisms, etc., signed
by an officer of the company supplying the windows.
2. Provide a five year prorated limited warranty on all insulated glass. This warranty
shall insure against loss of seal, discoloration, cloudiness, etc. This certificate
shall be executed by an officer of the company supplying the windows and the
General Contractor.
END OF SECTION
•
0
SECTION 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - Special Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
* attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Finish Hardware work.
. C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
4*; A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by Finish Hardware.
0
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close joining and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing Finish Hardware
items as required to complete the work, except for hardware items provided under
other Sections.
B. Work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1.
Butt hinges
2.
Lock sets
3.
Latch sets
a 4.
Cylinders
5.
Door closers
6.
Kick plates
7.
Stops
8.
Silencers
? 9.
Weatherstripping
10.
Thresholds
11.
Cabinet hardware, except cabinet hardware noted on drawings and specifications.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Rough hardware items.
B. Section 06200 - Installation of finish hardware items, unless otherwise required.
C7
FINISH HARDWARE 2516 ip
08700.2
C. Section 07900 - Sealants
D. Section 08110 - Factory preparation of metal doors and frames to receive finish
hardware items.
E. Section 08213 - Plastic Faced Doors.
F. Section 08410 - Aluminum entrance door hardware, except lock cylinders. •
G. Section 10800 - Toilet accessories.
1.05 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Order no hardware prior to Architect's approval of schedule and samples.
C7
B. Work of this section shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped
Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b, Vernon's Texas
Civil Statues and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
C. On receipt of hardware and templates at the job. The General Contractor shall store
and protect hardware from loss, theft, or damage. Cartons shall be code marked by
the supplier for installation in the proper location in accordance with the approved
hardware schedule. When removing hardware to allow for painting and finishing, the
Contractor shall code and store items to insure proper location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. QUALITY: Hardware shall be of uniform color and free from imperfections
affecting the appearance and serviceability. It shall be suitable and adapted for its
required use and shall fit its respective location.
B. FASTENERS: Bolts, screws and appurtenances, for the application of hardware, 0
shall be of the size and type to fit requirements and shall be in harmony with the
hardware as to material and finish. Exposed screws shall have countersunk oval
heads where possible, and bolts shall have cap nuts. The countersunk part of all
screw holes shall form a good seat for the screw heads, with no sharp edges at the
back.
C. KEYING: Grand master key and master key all locks and cylinders - keying alike,
keying differently and master keying will be as directed by Architect and Owner.
Furnish six master keys and three change keys per key set.
•
0 2516 FINISH HARDWARE
08700.3
0
s
>/
6
El
46
0
U
2.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General
1. Contractor shall prepare and submit a detailed schedule of finish hardware for
Architect's approval. Each item listed in hardware schedule shall be assigned
consecutive numbers and shall be identifiable with respect to manufacturer, brand,
catalog numbers, materials, finish, dimensions and operations, as well as location
and use in the building.
2. Architect will check Hardware Schedule for quality types only. The Contractor
shall be solely responsible for the quantities, functions, errors, omissions, and
conformance with this Specification.
3. The schedule below, is intended to indicate the general quality and type of
hardware required for particular opening listed, but such a description or schedule
shall not be construed to denote that no other items of hardware will be required
for this project.
B. Catalog References: Reference numbers listed in the Hardware Schedule that
follows, have been taken from catalogs of the following manufacturers:
Mfgr. Mark Cat. No. Size/Design Finish Description
HINGES
HAGER B-1 BB1279 4 1/2" x 4 l/2" NRPV SP HINGE
B-2 BB1279 4 1/2" x 41/2" 26D HINGE
B-3 1279 4 1/2" x 4 1/2" 26D HINGE
CLOSERS
HAGER C-1 4041 PA AL CLOSER
LOCKS
FALCON L-1
987
I/C x REQ. CAM
26D
CYLINDER
L-2
B511
DL x D x IC ASA
26D
LOCKSET
L-3
B301
DL x D x IC ASA
26D
PRIVACY
L-4
13101
DL x D x IC ASA
26D
PASSAGE
L-5
B581
DL x D x IC ASA
26D
LOCKSET
FLAT GOODS
ROCKWOOD
S-1 608 GRAY SILENCER
S-2 442 ES 26D FLOOR STOP
S-3 26D WALL STOP
K-1 1050 10" x 34" 32D KICK PLATE
THRESHOLD & WEATHERSTRIP
HAGER
T-1
404S
39"
AL
THRESHOLD
W-1
892S
39" x 94"
AL
WTHRSTRIP
W-2
756S
39"
AL
SWEEP
V,
FINISH HARDWARE 2516
08700.4
C. Door Sets
Set No
Description
Door Number(s)_
Quantity
Hdwr. Mark
1
STOREFRONT
1
1 EA.
L-1
BALANCE BY SUPPLIER
2
EXTERIOR SET
24
3 EA.
B-1
1 EA.
C-1
1 EA.
L-2
I EA.
K-1
I EA.
W-1
I EA.
W-2
I EA.
S-2
3
TOILET
2,4
3 EA.
B-2
I EA.
C-1
1 EA.
L-3
3 EA.
S-1
1 EA.
S-3
4
STORAGE
3,13,14,23
3 EA.
B-3
I EA.
L-5
3 EA.
S-1
I EA.
S-3
5
INTERIOR
5,6,20
3 EA.
B-2
1 EA.
C-1
1 EA.
L-2
3 EA.
S-1
1 EA.
S-3
0
r
,b
qb
•
6 OFFICE 7,8,9,10,11
3 EA.
B-3
12,15,16,21,22
1 EA.
L-2
3 EA.
S-1 .
1 EA.
S-3
7 TOILET 17,18
3 EA.
B-3
1 EA.
L-3
3 EA.
S-1
1 EA.
S-3
it
0 2516 FINISH HARDWARE
08700.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
0 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. COORDINATION: Obtain all information required to provide correct hardware for
each application such as size, shape, bevel and thickness of doors and frames, the
swing or doors, and the relationship of hardware to all adjoining work.
B. PROTECTION: Knobs, handles and pulls shall be provided with cloth or cotton
covered paper coverings, of sufficient size to completely cover the items, secured to
remain in place during construction.
C. WEATHERSTRIPPING AND THRESHOLDS: Install weatherstripping, threshold,
and weather seal at exterior doors except as shown. Before setting thresholds, fill
entire underside with mastic. Neatly cope threshold to jamb and bend down ends.
Secure with stainless steel screws and lead shields to make durable and permanent
connection. Attach weatherstrip to stop at head and jambs, and astragals to both
meeting stiles of double doors using stainless steel screws; miter corners. Attach
weather seal to door with stainless steel screws.
D. COMPLETED WORK: Hardware shall be in perfect condition in all respects,
perform its intended function and operate smoothly. Defective hardware shall be
replaced at no cost to the Owner. Upon completion, deliver to Owner two copies of
approved finish hardware schedule and keying schedule, together with one set of
clearly marked installation tools and templates.
END OF SECTION
L
A
4
is
6
•
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
0 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Glass and Glazing work.
r C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
r>
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by Glazing work.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close joining and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
!) complete all Glass and Glazing work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications. Verify all dimensions and conditions at the job.
B. Work Included:
1. Glazing of aluminum entrances.
2. Glazing of hollow metal frames.
3. Glazing of plastic faced doors.
4. Glazing of aluminum windows.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07900 - Sealants.
B. Section 08110 - Metal frames.
C. Section 08410 - Aluminum entrances.
•
D. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows.
4b
GLAZING 2516
08800.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety
Glazing Material Used in Buildings.
2. Federal Specification DD-G-451-Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for
Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses).
3. Federal Specification DD-G-1403-Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and
Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered).
4. Flat Glass Manufacturers Association - Glazing Manual.
B. Definition - The term "glazing" as used herein shall include glass, glass products,
installation of glass and glass products and materials to install glass and glass
products. Glass products is herein defined to include glazing plastics. 41
C. Uniformity - To the maximum degree possible, provide glass and glass products
produced by one manufacturer.
D. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. ASG Industries, Inc. (ASG).
2. Combustion Engineering (C-E).
3. Libby -Owens -Ford (L-O-F).
4. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).
E. WIND LOAD REQUIREMENTS: Exterior glass and glazing shall conform to wind
load requirements of the current City Building Code. In addition to the tempered
glass shown on the Drawings, tempered glass shall be used for exterior glazing
wherever code requirements for wind loads exceed the wind loads permitted for
untempered glass.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Manufacturer's technical data for glazing sealants proposed for use and glass r
and plastic sheet manufacturer's literature pertaining to special handling or special
installation requirements for products proposed for use.
2. Two 12" x 12" samples of each type of glass and sheet plastic proposed for use,
two setting blocks as specified and two 12" samples of glazing tape. Samples
shall be representative of the type, quality and edge finish of materials proposed S
for installation.
3. Shop drawing of fixed glass window work.
1.07 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
a
A. Comply with glass or glass product manufacturer's printed recommendations.
46
f 2516 GLAZING
08800.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
!� 2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Glass
1. Type "A" - 5/8" insulating glass units: Outboard lite - 3/16" bronze tempered plate
glass; Inboard lite - 3/16" clear tempered plate glass.
2. Type "B" - 1/4" clear tempered plate glass.
3. Type "C" - 1/4" clear polished plate glass.
B. Glazing compound for glass - type recommended by manufacturer for each setting,
guaranteed to remain in perfect condition without paint or other protection for two
years. Submit manufacturer's data for approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
it, A. Obtain, at the building, the actual requirements of all glass openings and size the glass
to suit openings actually existing in the field.
B. A watertight and airtight installation of each glass and glass product unit is required.
Each installation shall be installed to withstand normal temperature changes, wind
loading and impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure, including
loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and
airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. During installation,
discard units with significant edge damage or other imperfections.
D. Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary bite on
glass or plastic, minimum edge clearance, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances. Adjustments, if required by job conditions at time of
installation, shall be subject to Architect's approval.
•
E. Comply with recommendations and technical reports by applicable manufacturer of
glass or glazing product and with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing
Association "Glazing Manual," except where more stringent requirements are shown
or specified.
F. All glass shall bear the manufacturer's label as to the kind and grade which shall not
be removed until after the glass is accepted. Glass installations from which stickers
have been removed will not be approved.
G. All materials shall be shipped to the work, packed in its original containers with seals
r1 unbroken.
GLAZING 2516
08800.4
3.02 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING
A. Clean glazing channels, glass, and other framing members to receive glass,
immediately before glazing.
B. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrate. Remove lacquer from
metal surfaces where sealants are used.
C. Apply primer for sealant to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant A
manufacturer.
3.03 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1/4th of glass width from 46
each corner.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than
50 united inches, except where gaskets or preshimmed tapes are used for glazing.
Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant .a
width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
C. If glazing tape is used for any work, install tape to provide full area contact on stop
faces. Install glass and stops against tape with sufficient pressure to reduce tape
thickness 1/16" minimum. Trim extruded tape flush with stops.
D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar
characteristics.
E. Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or
bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
F. Glass shall be set in full beds of glazing compounds, puttied and back -puttied so that
glass does not contact beads, stops or frames. Apply sufficient compound so that it
extrudes slightly from between glass and beads and stops, then trim compound flush
with stops and beads.
G. Secure strips in place by snapping into frames or with screws provided with the stops.
H. Tool exposed surfaces of glazing compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away
from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel, w
so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
I. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from glass, stops and frames promptly after
installation.
7
2516 GLAZING
08800.5
3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by use of crossed
streamers attached to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to
surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in
any way during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism.
C. Reset any glass that is loose in frames.
D. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of
project. Comply with glass or plastic product manufacturer's recommendations for
final cleaning.
END OF SECTION
a
i
•
•
r
!�
11
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Gypsum Wallboard work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
! A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by, Gypsum Wallboard.
•
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades as not to cover up work in progress
and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
` complete all Gypsum Wallboard work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications.
0
B. Work Included:
1. Gypsum Wallboard.
2. Acoustical sealant.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Wood Framing
i B. Section 07200- Thermal Insulation and Sound Insulation
C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings
' D. Section 09900 - Painting
6
GYPSUM WALLBOARD 2516 •
09250.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with local code requirements and the
following:
1. ASTM C-754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -
Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water -Resistant Backing Board.
2. Gypsum Association Publication GA-216: Recommended Specifications for the
Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
B. Fire -Resistance Rating: Where gypsum wallboard systems with fire resistance ratings
are indicated or are required to comply with governing regulations, provide materials
and installations identical with applicable assemblies which have been tested and
listed by UL or other recognized authorities.
C. Manufacture: To the maximum extent possible, obtain gypsum board products and
accessories from one manufacturer or from manufacturers recommended by the
manufacturer of the gypsum board used. Products and materials are designated by
United States Gypsum numbers and brand names except as noted. Other acceptable
manufacturers are:
1. The Celotex Corporation, Tampa, FL.
0
2. Kaiser Gypsum Company, Inc., Oakland, CA.
3. National Gypsum Company, Buffalo, NY.
D. Allowable Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/8" offset between planes of adjacent board
faces nor 1/4" in 8 ft. for plumb, level, warp and bow. 16
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
•
B. Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for gypsum
wallboard systems required, including other data as may be required to show
specification compliance.
C. Submit samples of gypsum wallboard accessories proposed for use, if requested by
Architect. 49
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver, identify, store and protect gypsum wallboard materials to comply with GA
G-216 and material manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Gypsum wallboard products and materials shall be kept covered and protected from
weather and other damaging conditions at all times while in transit and after receipt at
the site. Store materials in dry locations where they will not be subjected to wetting
and moisture absorption.
7
0 2516 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
09250.3
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with GA G-216.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PRODUCTS
A. Gypsum wallboard:
1. Types:
a. Fire -Rated - ASTM C-36, Type X, tapered long edges, 5/8" thick unless
otherwise indicated; use maximum lengths possible to avoid horizontal joints.
f Provide fire -rated (Type X) water-resistant type at toilets and/or other areas
where noted.
b. Backing board (for use at double layer construction) - ASTM C-36, square
edges, Type X at fire -rated construction. Water-resistant type where noted;
5/8" thick unless otherwise noted.
B. Trim and Accessories:
1. Metal Trim
a. External corners - galvanized steel, 100 series, "Dur-A-Bread" corner bead.
b. Discontinuous edges - galvanized steel, 200 series, "L" or "J" trim.
c. Control Joints - No. 093, galvanized flanges.
• 2. Gypsum Board Fasteners: For wood framing - "Type W", bugle head, lengths as
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Joint Treatment - Perforated tape and joint compound supplied by gypsum
wallboard manufacturers.
0 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sealant - Equal to USG "Acoustical Sealant".
% PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum wallboard in accordance with recommendations of GA-216.
B. Install water resistant gypsum wallboard at scheduled walls and ceilings of the
following moist areas.
1. All mechanical equipment rooms.
2. All rooms with plumbing fixtures, floor drains or water source of any type.
3. Both walls of chases adjacent to moist areas, except where floor waterproof
membrane, seamless floor of elastomeric floor waterproofing is turned up the
wall, as part of the base, to separate chase from moist area.
4. All rooms in which gypsum wallboard is installed before the building is closed in.
46
GYPSUM WALLBOARD 2516
09250.4
5. All rooms in which gypsum wallboard is installed, which, in the completed work,
are subject to outside atmosphere or humidity and ceramic wall tile.
6. Install water resistant gypsum board horizontally on walls.
7. Treat all cuts in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Fit board
closely around all items which penetrate board and caulk the space between board
and items. Keep wall face free from caulking compound. Stagger vertical joints.
C. Wallboard
1. Erect single layer standard gypsum wallboard in direction most practical and #
economical, with joints staggered on opposite sides of partitions, ends and edges
occurring over solid bearing.
2. For double layer application, use fire rated gypsum backing wallboard for first
layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members. Place second layer
perpendicular to first layer. Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints
of first layer. +
3. For double layer applications, secure second layer to first with adhesive and
sufficient fasteners to support and hold in place until adhesive sets. Apply
adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Install fiber -reinforced gypsum wallboard in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
5. Use Type W screws when fastening gypsum wallboard to wood furring and wood
framing.
6. Place control joints approximately 20'-0" o.c., and consistent with lines of
building spaces. Break wallboard behind joint using double studs. In corridors,
provide control joints on both sides above door frames and both sides of the
partition and approximately 20'-0" o.c. S
D. Ceiling Board
1. Install ceiling board with end joints staggered in alternate rows.
2. Install a second layer of board where shown. Stagger joints from first layer and
attach board with drywall adhesive and screws.
3. Install second layer after items which penetrate ceilings have been installed. Fit
board closely around all penetrations.
4. Provide control joints at approximately 20'-0" o.c. (400 SF Max) or as shown on
the Drawings.
E. Trim
1. Install control joints to face layer with staples spaced 6" o.c. on both flanges along
entire length of joint.
2. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Place edge
trim at exposed edges, at discontinuous edges, where gypsum wallboard abuts
dissimilar materials and at locations as shown.
F. Metal Frames: Coordinate work with that of Division 08110 - Metal Frames, to
provide proper setting and anchoring of metal frames.
G. Ceramic Tile Substrate: Only bedding and taping is required on walls that receive
ceramic tile.
H. Bedding and Taping
1. Bed and tape all joints throughout the project in compliance with ASTM C-475.
6
♦ 2516
GYPSUM WALLBOARD
09250.5
2. Float joints, screw heads and trim flanges.
3. Provide a thin uniform coat of joint compound, 3" to 6" wide, and feather edged.
♦ Where thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high points. Floating
shall be at least 8" wide each side of joints and at trim. Sand all floated work
smooth.
4. Floating at trim beads shall be flush with bead face and be gradually feathered
back 8" to 10" from beads. Sand all floated work smooth.
♦ I. Completed Work: Leave all surfaces clean, smooth and flat, ready to receive
specified finishes.
•
6
+•
•
0-
19
L
3.02 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES
A. Place acoustical sealant within and at top and bottom of all partitions scheduled to
receive acoustical insulation. Installation in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Place sealant around all penetrations through or in partitions by conduit, pipe,
ductwork, rough -in boxes, and similar items.
3.03 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all excess material and rubbish accumulated from this work and leave area
clean.
END OF SECTION
It
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
,! PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
M attached hereto or not.
0
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Ceramic Tile work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the Ceramic Tile work.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close jointing and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
f
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performing of all operations necessary to
complete all Ceramic Tile work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Glazed ceramic wall tile.
2. Adhesive for wall tile.
3. Grouting for wall tile.
1.04 RELATED WORK
10 A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
B. Section 09680 - Carpeting
C. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories
D. Divisions 15 & 16 Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Work
CERAMIC TILE 2516
09310.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. TCA 137.1 - Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
2. TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
B. Uniformity: Provide each type of tile as produced by one manufacturer unless
otherwise specified or approved.
C. Manufacture:
1. Tile Manufacturing Standard: TCA 137.1. Provide ceramic tile complying with
Standard Grade requirements.
2. Acceptable tile manufacturers:
a. American Olean Tile Co.
b. Dallas Ceramic Tile Co.
c. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
4
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing ceramic tile order, submit:
1. Manufacturer's product data, technical information and installation instructions
for materials required.
2. For initial selection of colors - manufacture's color charts consisting of actual tiles
or sections of tiles showing full range of colors available, for each type of tile
specified. Include samples of grout and accessories requiring color selection.
3. For verification purposes:
a. Samples of each type of tile and color required, not less than 12" square, on
plywood or hardboard backing and grouted.
b. Full size samples for each type of trim, accessory and color.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not store tile products in wet or damp portions of the projects.
C. Materials or items stored in the building shall be located as directed by the General 1P
Contractor and approved by the Architect.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in
accordance with TCA and tile manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2516 CERAMIC TILE
09310.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
! 2.01 TILE
A. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile
1. Type: Commercial glazed ceramic wall tile with modified cushioned edge, as
manufactured by American Olean or equal. Color as selected by Architect from
. price group 1 and 2 tiles.
2. Size: 4 1/4" x 4 1/4" x 5/16"
3. Trim: Provide shapes, fittings, etc. as required or as indicated on the Drawings.
Shapes, etc. must match size of tile.
0 2.02 SETTING BED, ADHESIVE AND GROUT
i
A. Adhesive for wall tile: "Thin -set" Hydroment 7001 over gypsum board back-up.
conforming to ANSI A118.1.
B. Grout for wall tile: Hydroment Dry Tile Grout, Latex Portland Cement (unsanded)
conforming to ANSI A118.6; as manufactured by Bostik, color as selected by
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall check all surfaces that are scheduled for wall tile for proper
preparation to receive specified materials and if surfaces are not suitable, he shall
report the discrepancies to the General Contractor and Architect in writing.
B. Install wall tile on specified grout and/or adhesive in strict accordance with current
accepted installation practices of the Domestic Ceramic Tile Industry as published by
the Tile Council of America, Inc.
i C. Grouting of wall tile shall be accomplished using materials specified above and in
keeping with industry standards as published by the Tile Council of America, Inc.
latest revision.
• 3.02 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Setting ceramic wall tile - Ceramic wall tile shall be installed by thin -set method in
strict accordance with Tile Council of America, Inc. specifications for installation of
ceramic tile over the type of back-up materials indicated using specified adhesive.
,s B. Grouting ceramic wall tile - Ceramic wall tile shall be grouted with specified grout in
strict accordance with Tile Council of America, Inc. specifications for grouting wall
tile.
CERAMIC TILE 2516 •
09310.4
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of placement and grouting: •
1. Remove from the site all cartons, packing, broken tile and other dirt and trash
resulting from this work.
2. Cleaning ceramic wall tile. Clean tile and all adjacent surfaces spotted or stained
with grout with soap or washing power; rinse thoroughly with clean water and
polish with dry rag. Do not use abrasive, acids, or metal tools in cleaning. Excess
grout must be removed before it hardens.
3.04 WARRANTY
A. The tile contractor shall furnish a written warranty to the Owner that this work will be
free from defects of materials and workmanship, that the tile will not buckle nor lose
its bond with setting bed, and that the joints will not leak nor otherwise deteriorate.
B. This warranty shall be for a period of two years from the date of acceptance of the
project by the Owner, and shall provide for the repair of any such defects, or the
replacement of any such work as cannot be satisfactorily repaired, by this Contractor •
at no expense to the Owner.
C. Replacement Material: At completion of work deliver to Owner at least two (2)
square feet of each color of each type of tile installed for future use as replacement
material.
i
END OF SECTION
•
i
•
r�
6
•
SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
40 attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Acoustical Ceiling work.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by, the Acoustical Ceiling work. Coordinate with
mechanical and electrical trades to avoid conflict of ceiling hangers, runners, cross
tees and bracing with installation of mechanical and electrical work.
S B. Verify location of light fixtures and space conditioning outlets in ceiling pattern; final
location of these items in ceiling pattern; final location of these items in ceiling
pattern is responsibility of Acoustical Ceiling Contractor. Refer to reflected ceiling
plans.
C. Cut ceiling boards to fit at pipes, conduit hangers, and other items projecting through
ceiling or bordering acoustical ceiling area.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Acoustical Ceiling work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Acoustic boards.
2. Suspension systems.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09250 - Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings
B. Division 15 - Air diffusers within suspension system.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2516 r
09510.2
C. Division 16 - Lighting Fixtures within suspension system
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with local code requirements and the
following:
1. ASTM C-635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel
Ceilings.
2. ASTM C-636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical
Tile and Lay -In Panels.
3. Unerwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.)
B. Uniformity: To maximum extent possible, provided all work of this Section as
produced by one manufacturer.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Conwed.
2. Armstrong.
3. Donn Products. f
4. Celotex.
5. USG Interiors.
1.06 SUBMITTALS Is
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing acoustical order, submit:
1. Manufacturer's product data, and technical information and installation
instructions for materials required. !
2. Provide two 12" x 12" samples of each type of acoustical unit. Provide two
samples of suspension system and accessories.
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Carefully cover and protect acoustical ceiling materials when in transit and at the job
site.
0
B. Store in dry locations in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. fa
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is
provided, dust generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is
completed, tested and approved.
6
2516 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09510.3
•
It
B. Maintain temperature at minimum 60 degrees F. and humidity of 40% to 50% prior
to, during and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL BOARDS
A. Lay -In Ceiling Board.
1. General
a. Lay -in ceiling materials shall be rated 0-25 flame spread in accordance with
ASTM E-84 and Class A in accordance with FS SS-S-118B.
2. Standard Mineral Board — Ceiling Type 1
a. Material: 24" x 24" x 5/8" mineral board panel.
b. Type: Square edge.
c. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC .50-60
d. Light Reflectance: .85
e. Finish: Factory applied washable white latex.
f. Design: USG "Radar" or equivalent by listed manufacturer.
g. Grid Type: "A".
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Grid Type "A".
1. Standard grid system (including hold-down clips as required) formed from
commercial quality cold rolled steel, electro-zinc coated and pre -painted.
2. Comply with ASTM C-635.
3. Finish: Low sheen satin white.
4. Hanger Wire: 12 ga. drawn steel, galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with acoustical unit manufacturer's
recommendations and ASTM C-636 to produce finished ceilings true to lines and
levels and free from warped, soiled or damaged grid or lay -in panels. Erect in
accordance with reflected ceiling plans.
B. Install ceiling system in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads, with
maximum permissible deflection of 1/360 of span and maximum surface deviation of
1/8" in 10', non -cumulative.
1. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce
the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying members as required to span the
r required distance.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2516
09510.4
C. Hang ceilings independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or
face plane of adjacent members.
D. Center ceiling systems on room axis leaving equal border pieces.
E. Do not support fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of the
fixtures causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability. In such cases,
support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each
corner, or support the fixtures independently.
1. Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentricity
loaded.
2. Where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer
bars. ,
F. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum
lengths, straight, moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes, light fixtures,
ceiling diffusers and grilles as required. Where bullnose concrete block corners
occur, provide performed closers to match edge molding as approved. Use factory
exterior corners for all exterior corners on edge molding.
G. Fit acoustic lay -in panels in place, free from damaged edges and other defects
detrimental to appearance and function. Fit cut units neatly against abutting surfaces.
H. Install hold-down clips on all lay -in panels to hold such panels tight to grid system
where within 20 ft. of exterior doors.
I. Fit units snugly around pipes, hangers, conduit and all other penetrations through
suspended ceilings. Provide metal trim or escutcheon, matching grid color, at
penetrations in exposed locations.
C'
J. Ceiling Heights: Finish ceiling heights are indicated on Drawings.
3.02 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust sags and twists which develop in ceiling systems and replace units and parts
which are damaged or faulty as directed by Architect.
3.03 CLEANING
it
A. At completion, if any units are dirty, discolored, or damaged as a result of work
performed under this Contract or defective or improperly placed, remove such units
and replace as directed by the Architect.
B. At completion of the work, deliver at least 12 pieces of acoustical ceiling tile to
Owner for future replacement use. r
END OF SECTION
n
r
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
* PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
40 attached hereto or not.
41
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Resilient Flooring Work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects or is affected by Resilient Flooring work.
B. Before beginning work, inspect surfaces to receive resilient materials and notify
Of Architect, in writing, of any conditions which will prevent proper installation,
adherence, appearance, or permanency of flooring. Do not begin work until such
conditions have been corrected or an agreement reached regarding later defects which
may develop due to such conditions.
C. Absence of such notification or beginning of work denotes acceptance of surface and
later claims of defects in surfaces will not in any way relieve Contractor from
responsibility under the guarantee.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals, and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Resilient Floor and base work indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications.
B. A maximum of four accent VCT colors will be used in a floor pattern. The Architect
will provide color drawings indicating pattern (approximately 30% accent colors,
70% field color).
C. Work Included:
1. Vinyl composition tile.
41 3. Rubber base.
4. Flooring accessories.
5. Corner guard.
2
RESILIENT FLOORING 2516 r
09650.2
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Patching and repairing defective concrete slabs.
B. Section 09680 - Carpet
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Ll
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. Federal Specification SS-T-31213, TYPE IV, - Tile, Floor: Vinyl.
2. Federal Specification SW-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber.
3. Federal Specification RR.T. 650C - Stair Treads: Rubber.
B. Uniformity: To the maximum extent possible, provide resilient products from one
manufacturer only.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Vinyl Composition Tile
a. Amtico.
b. Armstrong Cork Co.
c. Azrock Floor Products.
d. Tarkett, Inc.
2. Resilient Base
a. Armstrong Cork Co.
b. Burke Industries, Inc.
c. Flexco.
d. Roppe Rubber Corporation.
3. Flooring Accessories (Nosings, Transitions, etc.), and Rubber Stair Treads.
a. American Biltrite, Inc.
b. Burke Industries.
•
c. Flexco.
d. Mercer.
e. Roppe Rubber Corporation.
f. R.C. Musson.
4. Corner Guard
a. Arden Architectural Specialties
b. Balco, Inc.
c. IPC
d. Pawling Corporation
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing material order, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of r
resilient material and accessory proposed for use.
2. Provide two 12"x12" samples of color, pattern and finish for each type of resilient
material indicating full range of color and pattern.
2516 RESILIENT FLOORING
09650.3
C. Prior to final acceptance submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended
maintenance procedures for each type of resilient flooring provided.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
49 A. Maintain minimum temperature of 70 degrees F in spaces to receive resilient flooring
for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48
hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees
F in area where work is completed.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs and environmental
conditions must be within limits recommended by manufacturer of products being
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT)
A. Comply with Federal Specification SS-T-31213, Type IV Comp. 1, asbestos -free.
N B. Size: Minimum 1/8" thick x 12" x 12".
C. Premium Material: Armstrong Standard Excelon or equivalent by one of the listed
manufacturers. Colors and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard line of colors.
~ D. Decorative borders and inlay tile patterns will account for a 30% of the total square
footage of VCT.
E. Edging Strips: 1/8" thick standard vinyl type in color to be selected by the Architect.
M
2.02 RUBBER COVE BASE
A. 1/8" thick x 4" high x 120 ft. coil, of standard coved 100% SBR rubber base.
B. Colors to be selected from manufacturer's standard line of colors.
•
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide 100% SBR rubber accessories as required for a complete installation.
Architect to select colors from manufacturers full color range. Products listed below
as manufactured by Roppe Rubber Corp. Other manufacturers are listed above.
1. Reducer Strip - resilient flooring strip, 1" wide x 1/8", 1/16", or 3/32" thickness as
required tapered or bullnose.
6
RESILIENT FLOORING 2516
09650.4
2. Carpet Edge - No. 38, carpet to concrete slab.
3. Carpet/Tile -No. 50, carpet to resilient tile joiner.
2.04 CORNER GUARD
A. Size: Premolded corner guards, 3" x 3" x 60" unless otherwise shown, In Pro
Corporation with 535 Heavy Duty Adhesive by IPC.
B. Thickness: 0.080 pvc.
C. Color: Match resilient base or as selected by Architect.
2.05 PRIMERS AND ADHESIVES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Non -staining type as recommended by resilient material
manufacturer for substrate conditions encountered.
•
B. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by resilient a
material manufacturer for substrate conditions encountered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE AND SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10 feet.
7
B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 7% moisture content) and exhibit negative
alkalinity, carbonization and/or dusting. •
C. Maintain minimum air temperature at flooring installation as specified in Article 1.07
above.
D. Store flooring materials in area of application. Allow 3 days for material to reach
equal temperature as area before installing. «
3.02 LEVELING
A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other •
slab defects with an approved leveling compound.
B. Trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surfaces as recommended by
flooring manufacturer. Prohibit traffic until leveling compound filler is cured.
0
2516 RESILIENT FLOORING
09650.5
3.03 INSTALLATION, TILE FLOORING
A. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade
variations do not occur within any one area.
B. Clean substrate. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by flooring
manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough
' adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set.
C. Set flooring in place, roll and press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion.
•
D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical
tile pattern.
E. Install with minimum tile width 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter with pattern
grain parallel for all units and parallel to length of room.
F. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door at openings where adjacent floor
• finish is dissimilar.
C
G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.
H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to
produce tight joints.
I. Continue flooring through areas to receive moveable type partitions without
interrupting floor pattern.
• 3.04 INSTALLATION, BASE
A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between
joints.
B. Miter internal corners. Use premolded sections for external corners and exposed
ends.
C. Install base on solid backing. Adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces. Do not
install over vinyl wallcoverings or epoxy paint.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.
0
E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet.
3.05 INSTALLATION, ACCESSORIES
r
A. Install specified accessories at all locations where flooring terminates at higher level
than adjacent floor surfaces and at door openings to rooms having exposed concrete
floors.
0
RESILIENT FLOORING 2516 i
09650.6
3.06 INSTALLATION, CORNER GUARD
A. Fit corner guard to top of base with tight joint.
B. Locate corner guard to all exterior corners in public corridors or as shown on the
drawings.
._j
C. Starting at the bottom, install straight and vertical with no joints in guard.
D. Install guards on solid backing adhering tightly to wall surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION 0
A. Protect flooring from damage due to subsequent construction operations with building
paper, mats, or other approved means, maintain protective covering until completion
of work.
C
B. Repair any damage to floor or base installations resulting from operations under this
project contract at no expense to Owner.
3.08 CLEAN-UP
•
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces.
B. Just prior to final inspection, thoroughly clean floor and base surfaces in accordance
with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Follow with a thorough rinsing of
clean water and leave floor in condition for Owner to apply wax and buff. 0
C. Replacement materials
1. After completion of work, deliver to project site replacement materials from same
manufactured lot as materials installed, as follows:
a. Tile flooring, not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, for
each type, size, and color installed.
b. Rubber base, not less than 5% of lineal feet total installed.
c. Corner guard, not less than 5% of lineal feet total installed.
2. Clearly identify each box and roll.
3. Replacement materials shall not be used for Contractor's warranty work.
M
END OF SECTION
0
40
SECTION 09680 - CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
a Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section, describe the Work of this Section.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperation by Contractor for work of this Section with all other trades is mandatory
so that all phases of the work may be properly coordinated without delays or damage
to any parts of the work.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the installation of all Carpet work in areas as indicated on the Drawings.
Verify all dimensions and conditions at the site.
•
B. Work Included:
1. Installation of all carpet floor covering including decorative borders.
2. All moldings, fasteners, adhesives, tapes, and incidentals as necessary to complete
carpet work.
3. Preparation of surfaces to receive carpet.
4. Manufacturer's acceptance of installer.
1.04 RELATED WORK
0 A. Section 01020 - Allowances
B. Section 03300 - Patching defective concrete slabs.
C. Section 09650 - Resilient flooring and base.
a
4
CARPETING 2516 10
09680.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide written certification from carpet manufacturer establishing acceptability of
applicator, and that applicator is knowledgeable and experienced in installation of
carpet of the specified type.
B. Applicator shall be a firm with at least 5 years experience with a listing of 5
successful installations similar to work required for this project.
a
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing carpeting order, submit:
1. Full range of carpet color samples for Architect's selection. r
2. Carpet manufacturer's literature showing complete specification for carpet,
including description of yarn, backings, recommended adhesives and laying
methods.
3. Fiber manufacturer's letter certifying fiber content.
4. Shop drawings showing location of all seams, method of joining seams, direction
of carpet, type of adhesive to be used and installation procedures.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver carpeting material in protective wrapping, store inside building protected
from weather, moisture and soiling.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not start carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work, have been tested, approved, and completed.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F. for at least 24 hours prior to
installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be
permanently maintained.
C. Provide sufficient lighting for proper installation and review of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPET TYPES
A. Carpet Types: All Carpet shall be direct glue -down type and shall be provided in the
spaces scheduled on the Drawings.
•
B. Decorative boarders or in -lays will account for 20% of the total yardage. Border and
in -lay carpet shall be selected from the same manufacturer as the field carpet.
6
2516 CARPETING
09680.3
C. Carpet Material shall be purchased for this project thru an allowance established for
carpet only; FOB jobsite. All labor and installation materials will be included in the
subcontractors bid.
2.02 CARPET ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Water - resistant type as recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer,
and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet, including
seam sealer.
B. Joint, crack, and depression filler: Epoxy patching compounds:
1. "Epolith Patcher" - Sonneborn Building Products.
• 2. "Thiopory 60" - A.C. Horn Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Clean floors free of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances
detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet.
B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
noncumulative.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality
relative to acidity and alkalinity. Rough spots shall be smoothed where necessary and
all joints, cracks, and small holes filled with approved cementitious filler.
• D. Vacuum, sand and clean substrate.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect's approval.
B. All carpet and materials shall be installed by skilled workmen under proper
supervision using the manufacturer's approved methods, tools and equipment. All
cutting, sewing, seaming and accessories required to properly install carpet shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. The carpet Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for the installation and condition
of all carpet until it has been accepted. It shall be stored in a well ventilated space
and protected from damage, dirt, stains, moisture, and vandalism.
D. The carpet Subcontractor shall inspect the subflooring before starting his work. He
shall notify the Architect in writing, of any condition which will prevent him from
satisfactorily completing his work. He shall not proceed with his work until all
F
CARPETING 2516 40
09680.4
defects are entirely corrected. The application or installation of carpet by the carpet
sub -contractor shall constitute his acceptance of the subfloor.
E. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation
between dye lots.
F. Cut carpet, as required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure
cuts are straight and true and unfrayed. Locate seams in areas of least amount of
traffic in accordance with approved shop drawings. Join seams in recommended
manner so as not to detract from appearance of carpet installation and decrease its life
expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps.
G. Spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer after primer application
to ensure proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only enough adhesive
to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.
H. Lay carpet with the run of the pile in same direction of anticipated traffic. Lay carpet
on stairs with run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid
peeking of backing at nosing. Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one
room to next where continuous through a wall opening.
I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other
vertical surfaces. Fit carpet snugly to borders, inlays, walls and all other vertical
surfaces leaving no gaps.
J. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24
hours or until adhesive is set. Entire carpet installation shall be laid tight and flat to
subfloor, well fastened at edges and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure
monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.
K. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length
pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt
ends tight and flush.
3.03 CLEAN UP
A. After completion of installation, the Carpet Contractor shall clean up all scraps and
debris and shall clean all carpet in strict accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions as approved by the Architect. The Architect shall inspect all carpet
scraps before removal from job, and retain any or all pieces for use in the future for
patching or repairing. M
B. Prior to final acceptance, furnish:
1. Three (3) percent overrun of carpet yardage installed for Owner's replacement
use. This carpet shall be delivered in full rolls packaged for storage. Store in
building in location as directed by Architect.
2. Printed instructions for proper carpet maintenance and recommended cleaning
methods and materials.
E
2516 CARPETING
09680.5
3.04 WARRANTY
A. The Carpet Contractor shall furnish the Owner a written warranty providing for the
relaying or re -stretching of any carpet that does not provide an attractive, wrinkle -free
appearance, and shall correct any such condition due to faulty installation which may
appear for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner.
• B. Provide manufacturers 10 year warranty to replace all carpet that exhibits excessive
wear of pile.
END OF SECTION
•
•
1
•
C
•
a
0
0
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Painting and Finishing work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of
such trades affects, or is affected by Painting and Finishing work.
B. Examination of surfaces:
1. Before beginning work, inspect surfaces to be painted or finished and notify the
General Contractor, and Architect, in writing, of any conditions which will
prevent satisfactory execution, appearance and permanency of work.
2. Verify compatibility of existing finishes with proposed coatings scheduled for
repainting.
3. Priming and sealing of pipe insulation are provided under mechanical sections of
the Specifications. Inspect and accept surface as suitable to receive specified
finish without excessive suction which will prevent full covering and concealment
of insulation casing, or notify the General Contractor, and Architect that priming
and sealing or insulation is defective or insufficient.
4. Do not begin work until any such conditions have been corrected or an agreement
reached regarding later defects which may develop due to such conditions.
5. Absence of any such notification or beginning of work denotes acceptance of
surface and later claims of defects in surfaces will not in any way relieve
• Contractor from responsibility under this guarantee.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete all Painting and Finishing of interior and exterior work as indicated or
reasonably inferred from the Drawings and Specifications.
PAINTING 2516 r
09900.2
B. Painting and finishing work includes, but is not limited to, all items as hereinafter
listed and specified. Perform work required to prepare surfaces to receive paint,
finish, or applied covering. Read all other Sections of the Specifications and properly
determine the extent of the work to be performed under this Section.
C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether
used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
•
D. Color Schedules
1. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting
and finishing surfaces throughout the project.
2. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces
throughout the project and should be based on the following:
a. Exterior Work: A maximum of three different colors will be used, with
miscellaneous work, and metal work.
b. Interior Work: A maximum of three different colors will be used, with
miscellaneous work, and metal work.
c. Dark Tones: A maximum of two dark tones will be used as accent colors for •
interior work.
E. The term "exposed" as used herein and on the drawings shall be interpreted to mean,
"exposed to view in the work at any area" at the time of final inspection as
determined by the Architect. This shall include mechanical rooms, closets, storage 40
room and like areas unless specifically indicated to be left unpainted.
F. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent
similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not indicated, Architect will select
these from standard colors available from materials systems specified.
G. Work Included:
1. Structural Steel and Miscellaneous Metals:
a. Touch up shop coats on all exposed and concealed metals at locations of
welds, abrasions, scratches, and elsewhere that paint film or coating is ,
defective.
b. Paint all metals exposed to view on interior and exterior of building.
2. Paint all exposed metals, galvanized or not. <Including ornamental fence>.
3. Items of mechanical, plumbing and electrical work in exposed locations, interior,
exterior, and on roof.
a. Paint exposed shop coated, galvanized and ungalvanized ferrous metals, and
non-ferrous metals.
b. Paint exposed insulation.
4. Piping and Conduit - Paint exposed piping, insulated and uninsulated piping.
5. Gypsum board: tape and float all gypsum board; texture and paint gypsum board
as indicated on Room Finish Schedule.
6. Interior Plywood: Finish all exposed faces and edges of plywood including walls,
plywood shelving and cabinets; prime all concealed faces and edges.
7. Paint all interior ferrous metals which are not factory finished.
i
• 2516 PAINTING
09900.3
8. Finish all wood trim, handrails, guardrails.
9. Finish all exterior wood and composite panel surfaces.
• 10. Shelving and Cabinets: Finish all shelving and cabinets inside and out. Seal
cabinet drawer interiors.
11. Metal doors and frames: Paint all ferrous metal doors and frames, including
access doors.
L
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Certain coats are provided under other Sections. Before applying additional coats,
examine primed surface carefully and remove any evidence of rust or scaling, touch
up all scars and abrasions.
B. Except for touch-up of shop coats, painting typically will not be required in concealed
spaces above interior ceilings.
0 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-up
1. Before starting project painting, finish approximately 100 sq. ft. of wall surface
for each color scheme required, clearly indicating selected colors, finish texture,
materials and workmanship. Lighting conditions shall approximate those of
permanent lighting system.
2. If approved, sample areas will serve as a quality comparison standard for work of
this Section.
B. Manufacturers
1. Use specified materials of Sherwin-Williams or similar first line material of one
of the following manufacturers and as approved by the Architect.
a. Benjamin Moore
b. Devoe Paint
c. Pratt & Lambert
d. Glidden Coatings and Resins
e. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co.
f. Cook Paint Co.
g. Olympic Stain
2. Colors - Manufacturer's standard colors that closely match colors selected by
Architect from Sherwin-Williams color system will be acceptable; subject
however to Architect's approval of color match proposed.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
:1
PAINTING 2516
09900.4
B. Five weeks prior to start of painting work, submit:
1. Complete schedule of painting materials proposed for use on this project in form
similar to form of Article 2.03 hereinafter. Include sufficient technical data to
enable Architect to properly evaluate paint products being proposed for use.
2. Color samples: Submit color samples for Architect's review as follows:
(a) On 12" x 12" gypsum board, provide two samples of each color and material,
with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by
Architect until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.
(b) On actual wood surfaces, provide two 12" x 12" samples of natural and
stained wood finish. Label and identify each as to locations and application.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Fed. Spec. Number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Color name and number.
B. Painting materials and equipment shall be stored in one approved place in building.
Damage done at this location shall be corrected, and special care shall be taken to
prevent fire due to spontaneous ignition of oily rags or mishandling of inflammable
materials.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist. Do not apply paint when relative
humidity exceeds 85%. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces.
D. Painting may be continued during inclement whether if areas and surfaces to be
painted are enclosed conditioned within temperature limits specified by paint
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
u
•
46
u
r
r-,
2516 PAINTING
09900.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
0 2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES
•
A. Prior to start of painting work, Architect will furnish color chips for various surfaces
to be painted. Responsibility for obtaining proper colors for all items requiring
painting shall rest solely with the Contractor.
B. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.
2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL
•
A. Mentioned in these specifications of brand name or painting material product of a
particular manufacturer is not intended to limit Contractor to use of that material
exclusively unless so stated, but to serve as a standard of comparison. It is
understood that the Architect shall approve materials proposed for use in any
instance.
B. In instances where no brand or trade name is mentioned, material used shall be the
best grade of that particular kind for the particular use, as recommended by the paint
manufacturer and as approved by Architect.
C. Provide best quality grade (top or first line) of various types of paint coatings as
regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers approved by
Architect. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -
grade (top line) product will not be acceptable.
D. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only
thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
E. Basic painting materials such as Linseed Oil, Shellac, Turpentine, Thinners, Driers,
Putty, Tinting, Color, etc., of highest quality with identifying labels on containers.
F. Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided
to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request
from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed
for use, to ensure compatible primers or remove and re -prime as required. Prior to
start of work of this Section, notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems
using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
2.03 PAINTING AND FINISHING QUALITY STANDARDS
•
A. General: Apply the following paint systems to the various substrates as specified
hereinafter.
6
PAINTING 2516
09900.6
B. Exposed Steel (galvanized):
1. At locations where galvanized coating is damaged or destroyed by welding,
cutting, abrasion, etc. touch up bare metal with DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish
(B66W I ).
2. Apply one coat DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (B66W1).
3. Exterior surfaces, apply two coats DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating (1366 Series).
4. Interior surfaces, apply two coats DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating (1366 Series).
C. Exposed Steel (not galvanized, where primed or unprimed):
1. Touch-up shop coat and field welds: Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer (1350
W1).
2. Exterior surfaces, two coats DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating (1366 Series).
3. Interior surfaces, two coats DTM Acrylic Semi -Gloss Coating (B66 Series).
•
D. Exterior wood and composite building panel trim, siding, soffits, etc. to be painted.
1. Apply one prime coat using A-100 Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer (Y24 Series).
2. Apply two coats A-100 Satin Latex House Paint (A82 Series).
E. Metal Doors and Frames: •
1. Apply one coat Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer (B50W1).
2. Exterior surfaces, apply two coats Industrial Enamel (1354 Series).
3. Interior surfaces, apply two coats Pro Mar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel
(B34W200 Series).
F. Gypsum Wallboard
1. For areas scheduled as painted gypsum board:
a. Apply texture material to finish by rolling on a sufficient quantity to obtain a
"light and stipple" texture for walls (and acoustic texture for ceiling) in the
finished work.
b. Apply one coat Pro Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer (B28W200).
c. Apply two coats Pro Mar 200 Latex Eg-Shel Enamel (B20W200 Series).
2. For areas scheduled epoxy painted gypsum board.
a. Apply texture material to finish by rolling on a sufficient quantity to obtain a
"light and stipple" texture for walls (and acoustic texture for ceiling) in the
finished work.
b. Apply one coat Pro Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer (B28W200).
c. Apply two coats of Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy semi -gloss (B70W200
Series).
G. All wood and plywood scheduled to receive "Natural" finish: •
1. Apply one coat Sherwin-Williams Interior Oil Stain (1348 Series).
2. Apply one coat Pro Mar Hi Build Lacquer Sanding Sealer (1344 Series).
3. Apply one coat Pro Mar Hi Build Lacquer (B44 Series, Satin, Semi -Gloss or
Gloss Finish).
•
H. All wood and plywood scheduled to receive painted finish (except drawer interiors):
1. Apply one coat PrepRite 200 Interior Latex Wall Primers (1328 Series).
2. Apply two coats Pro Mar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel (1334 Series).
6
2516 PAINTING
09900.7
I. All wood and hardboard drawer interiors:
1. Apply two coats Pro Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer (B26V3).
r NOTE: DO NOT paint or apply any finish material to drawer guides!
PART 3 - EXECUTION
• 3.01 INSPECTION
•
A. Applicator shall examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be
applied and notify Architect and Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to
proper and timely completion of work.
B. Starting of painting work will be construed as acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within any particular area.
C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, oil, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General:
rA 1. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate
condition.
2. Remove door and cabinet hardware, hardware accessories, cover plates, lighting
fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish -painted, or provide
* surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations.
Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove
oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so
that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted
• surfaces.
B. Cementitious Materials
1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of composite building panels to be painted by
removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as
required to remove any glaze. Remove ridge on bullnose concrete masonry units
before applying block filler.
2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause
blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of
• paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted
in paint manufacturer's printed directions.
•
PAINTING 2516
09900.8
C. Wood:
1. Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with
scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those +
finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry,
seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot
sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood -filler. Sandpaper
smooth when dried.
2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted at the earliest possible i
moment. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood,
including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling.
3. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.
D. Ferrous Metals:
1. Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop -coated, of oil, grease,
dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical
cleaning.
2. Touch-up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by
other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop
primer.
E. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Surfaces shown to be galvanized finish shall be cleaned free of oil and surface
contaminants with non -petroleum based solvent.
2. Surfaces shown to be galvanized "paint grip" shall be treated to prevent peeling of
coatings over galvanized metal.
3.03 APPLICATION
•
A. General:
1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. All
woodwork and gypsum board surfaces scheduled to be painted will be painted
with a brush and/or roller only.
2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through
final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
3. Painting or lacquering must be done under conditions, weather or temperature,
suitable for executing a first class job. Atmosphere must be free from dust and
dirt preventing lodgement of foreign matter in fresh paint or lacquer. Floors must
be broom clean before painting is started.
4. Woodwork to be painted: Knots, pitch streaks and bad sap spots shellacked •
before priming coat is applied.
5. Woodwork to be stained must be in perfect condition, dry and free from surface
blemishes, stains, soil or other defects.
0
2516 PAINTING
09900.9
6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently -fixed equipment or furniture with
r prime coat only before final installation of equipment.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, non-specular black paint.
8. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
• 9. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces,
unless otherwise indicated.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
11. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
a. Do not apply additional coats of paint until completed coat has been inspected
and approved.
b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in
determining the number of coats applied.
12. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and
touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
•
B. Scheduling Painting:
1. Apply first -coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do
not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint
does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if
not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Prime Coats:
1. Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and
• which has not been prime coated by others.
2. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn -through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
E. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave
no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other
surfaces imperfections.
F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will
not be acceptable.
n
PAINTING 2516
09900.10
G. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass -smooth surface
film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs,
brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage.
Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with project requirements.
3.04 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Clean-up:
1. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish,
cans and rags at end of each work day.
2. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint -spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping,
using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
B. Protection:
1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by
painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or
replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
2. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finished. Remove
temporary protective wrappings and coverings after completion of painting
operations.
3. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
C. Maintenance Materials: Prior to final acceptance, provide one gallon of each color
and type of finish coat material for Owner's use as touch-up after final acceptance of
the work.
END OF SECTION
•
!7
:A
•
0
SECTION 10100 - MARKERBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
41 and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Markerboards work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
0
•
A. Coordinate and cooperate with other trades involved in this project where the work of
such trades affects or is affected by the work under this Section.
B. Schedule and coordinate work with other trades to provide close jointing and fitting
with adjoining materials and to prevent conflicts and delays.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete Markerboards work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and
Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Markerboards.
A. Section 06200 - Millwork
B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall
0 C. Section 09900 - Painting
0
MARKERBOARDS 2516 •
10100.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All laminating shall be done in the factory by one of the listed manufacturers. 0
B. All profiles of accessories shall be as illustrated in the current publications of one of
the listed manufacturers.
C. All boards and accessories shall be individually labeled with the seal of one of the 49
listed manufacturers.
D. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Best -Rite Chalkboard Co.
2. Carolina Chalkboard Company,
3. Claridge Products and Equipment, Incorporated.
4. Nelson -Adams Co.
5. Greensteel, Inc.
6. Eberhard Faber, Inc.
7. Weber Costello.
8. Tac Rite, Inc.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to placing wall covering order, submit:
1. Manufacturer's product data, technical information and installation instructions
for materials required.
2. For selection of patterns and colors - manufacturer's color charts consisting of •
actual sections of markerboards and tackboard showing full range colors
available, for each specified.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Do not store or install items in wet or damp portions of the project.
•
B. Carefully cover and protect tackable wall surfaces materials and items when in transit
and at job site.
•
C. Materials or items stored in the building shall be located as directed by the General
Contractor and approved by the Architect.
•
0
• 2516 MARKERBOARDS
10100.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.01 GENERAL
ON
A. Markerboards and miscellaneous accessories specified herein and indicated on the
drawings are model numbers and trade names of Claridge Products and Equipment,
Incorporated.
B. Adhesive: No.16-A or type recommended by the markerboards manufacturer.
2.02 MARKERBOARDS
•
A. Porcelain enamel on minimum 24 gauge steel on 7/16" hardboard or 3/8" particle
board with aluminum foil backing 4'-0" high x length shown in the drawings.
1. "LCS" markerboard skin or equivalent by listed manufacturer for computer room
typical for spaces as shown on the drawings.
2. Model No. 210A, 4' x 6' conference room markerboard with perimeter trim and
chalk trough, oak finish.
•
B. Colors: Manufacturer shall submit full range of standard colors to Architect for color
selections. Architect may choose several colors for the project; ie., there may be
more than one color selected for various surfaces for the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - MARKERBOARDS
A. Install markerboards items in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
Where adhesive is required, use 2" round spots of tackboard adhesive spaced 16" on
center each way.
• B. Attach chalk rail clips at studs where markerboards occur at drywall.
C. Refer to Drawings for mounting heights
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prior to final acceptance of markerboard, tackable wall surfaces, tack strips, and
aluminum surfaces, surfaces shall be cleaned and left free from any defects.
•
0
MARKERBOARDS 2516
10100.4
mullion 11911
A. General: Contractor's one year warranty shall guarantee against deterioration of
writing surfaces, warping or delaminating of boards and trim and accessories
installation.
B. Manufacturer's written warranty shall be submitted with shop drawings indicating a
50 year warranty against deterioration of writing surfaces. 40
END OF SECTION
•
I
46
0
•
•
0
0
0
SECTION 10200 - METAL LOWERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Metal Louver work. Verify all dimensions and conditions at
the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Items furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless specifically
stated otherwise; furnish installation directions, setting drawings, templates,
specifications, and other information required for clear understanding of setting and
operation requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
• A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete Metal Louver work indicted or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and
Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1. Fixed metal louvers.
2. Door louvers.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200 — Masonry
B. Section 04430 — Stone Masonry
0 C. Section 08213 — Plastic Faced Doors
D. Division 15 - Mechanical
L
METAL LOUVERS 2516 •
10200.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturer: •
1. Airolite Company.
2. Construction Specialties, Inc.
3. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
4. Airline Products.
1.06 SUBMITTALS •
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions. •
2. Shop drawings showing sizes, locations, and installation details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
12
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Louver Type - Equal to Airolite Model 638-C-100, galvanized steel 4" deep, 45
degrees sloped, 16 gauge blades and frame, 12 x 12 for outside air.
0
B. Features required:
1. All welded construction.
2. Louvers shall be fitted with 1/2" mesh 16 gauge galvanized bird screen in folded
frames.
3. Finish - "Duranar" Kynar 500 Custom Color, color as scheduled in approved
Color Schedule.
C. Door Louvers - Equal to A. J. Manufacturing Company, Model No. 700 RX, 18
gauge steel frame, 20 gauge steel blades, fits a 1-3/4" door thickness.
•
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
by experienced factory trained crews acceptable to manufacturer and Architect.
B. Install louvers in accordance with details and approved shop drawings to provide a
complete operating watertight installation.
•
END OF SECTION
0
•
SECTION 10400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND GRAPHICS 2516
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Identifying Devices and Graphic items of work. Verify all
dimensions and conditions at the site.
•
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
0 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Items furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless specifically
stated otherwise; furnish installation directions, setting drawings, templates,
specifications, and other information required for clear understanding of setting and
• operation requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the Identifying Devices and Graphics work indicated or reasonably inferred
from the Drawings and Specifications.
• B. Work Included:
1. Exterior sign letters.
2. Interior plaque.
3. Room identification signs.
0 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work of this section shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped
Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b, Vernon's Texas
Civil Statues and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
•
0
IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND GRAPHICS 2516 •
10400.2
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
•
B. Within 30 days after receipt of the purchase order from the General Contractor, the
Graphics Supplier shall submit samples, cut sheets and shop drawings to the
Architect, through the General Contractor, for approval. Actual fabrication shall
commence only after receipt of written approval of samples and shop drawings.
to
C. Shop drawings shall provide a complete listing of the signs required, color of each
sign, and a package reference system. Verification of the general requirements as to
the type of plastic, size and style of lettering, locations of mounting hardware, etc.,
shall also be included in the shop drawings.
•
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. The Graphics Supplier shall be responsible for the delivery of all signs and mounting
accessories to the General Contractor at the job -site. The Supplier shall also be •
responsible for the off-loading of these materials and the placement of them in the
Contractor's storage area at the location directed by the General Contractor.
B. Any signs damaged in any way during delivery or handling shall be replaced with
new signs of identical design at no additional cost. 41
C. The Graphics Supplier shall package all signs as necessary to fully protect them
against damage during shipping, handling and storage. Screws shall be packaged
separately from signs to prevent damage to signs.
•
D. All packages shall be properly identified and referenced to the approved shop
drawings for ease of identification by the General Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGN TYPES
•
A. Exterior Sign Letters: Aluminum letters fabricated to size and style as shown on the
drawings, minimum 3/8" thick, baked enamel finish, concealed mounting.
•
B. Dedicatory Plaque: Cast bronze, approx. 24" x 33", with approx. 400 letters,
concealed mounting, to be field located.
C. Room Identification and Graphic Symbols: Room numbers, room names, etc.; Braille
II; 3 ply plastic laminate, mount with double sided foam tape.
1. Provide one sign for all four toilets and the Constable Clerk only.
2. Provide the International symbol of accessibility at all toilets.
17,
2516 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND GRAPHICS
10400.3
•
D. Colors shall be selected by Architect from full range of physical samples.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
• A. Furnish to Section 06200 for installation.
3.02 CLEANING
40 A. At completion, if any units are dirty, discolored, or damaged as a result of work
performed under this Contract or defective or improperly placed; remove such units
and replace as directed by the Architect.
B. Remove all debris, scraps, paper, boxes and all other trash, etc. attendant to this work
from the project and leave all areas neat and clean. Clean all glass on which graphics
have been installed.
END OF SECTION
S
•
•
•
•
0
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 2516
AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
•
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
. A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Fire Extinguishers work.
Verify all dimensions and conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Items furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless specifically
stated otherwise; furnish installation directions, setting drawings, templates,
specifications, and other information required for clear understanding of setting and
operation requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Fire Extinguishers work indicated or
reasonably inferred from the Drawings and Specifications.
• B. Work Included:
1. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
2. Fire extinguishers.
0 1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals.
B. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories.
0
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 2516 •
AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10522.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work of this section shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped •
Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b, Vernon's Texas
Civil Statues and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
B. Anchorage Devices:
1. Furnish anchoring devices and inserts which must be installed in other work to
secure work of this Section. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
2. Coordinate locations of fire extinguisher cabinets and fire extinguishers with
locations of other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and
servicing of these items.
•
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Norris Industries, Fire & Safety Equipment Division.
2. J.L. Industries.
3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
4. Standard Fire Hose Co.
5. Elkhart Fire Equipment.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300. •
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each specialty item
proposed for use.
2. Setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of •
anchorage devices in concrete and masonry and for wood blocking in wood or
metal stud partitions.
3. Samples of accessory items, if requested. Submitted items may be used in the
work if acceptable.
•
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver fire extinguisher cabinets and fire extinguishers to site until areas in
which they are to be installed are ready to receive them. •
B. Pack items individually in a manner to protect materials and finishes.
1.08 PROTECTION
A. During installation of work of this Section, protect adjacent finished work from •
damage.
►l
•
2516 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10522.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Furnish the following Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Fire Extinguishers. Refer to
drawings for quantity and locations.
•
B. F.E.C. - Fire Extinguisher Cabinets shall be semi -recessed type, No. 2409-R4, 3 1/2"
rolled edge trim, 18 ga. Stainless steel finish, contemporary style door, manufactured
by Larsen's. Cabinets are located on the Drawings.
1. Furnish one (1) 10 lb., Cosmic 10E, Dry Chemical (ABC) fire extinguisher, UL
4A-60-BC, FM approved for each Fire Extinguisher Cabinet as shown on the
drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
• 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire extinguisher cabinets and wall brackets in locations shown on drawings.
B. Install cabinets in openings prepared by others in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions.
C. Verify prior to shipment that wall thickness is appropriate for installation of specified
cabinets.
is D. Mounting heights:
1. FEC: 4' - 8" AFF to top of cabinet
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
0
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Toilet Accessories work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Toilet Accessories furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless
specifically stated otherwise; furnish installation directions, setting drawings,
templates, specifications, and other information required for clear understanding of
setting and operation requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete Toilet Accessories work indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings
and Specifications.
B. Work Included:
1.
Grab Bar
2.
Paper Towel Dispensers
3.
Soap Dispensers
4.
Toilet Tissue Dispenser
5.
Mop Holder
6.
Framed Mirrors
7.
Napkin Disposal
:7
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Wood Blocking
B. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Fire Extinguishers
TOILET ACCESSORIES 2516
10800.2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As a minimum and as applicable, comply with the following:
1. ASTM A-167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip.
2. ASTM A-366 - Cold -Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality.
3. ANSI-117.1 -Handicap Requirements.
B. Attachment Devices:
1. Furnish anchoring devices and inserts which must be installed in other work to
secure work of this Section. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
2. Coordinate accessory locations of other work to avoid interference and to assure
proper operation and servicing of accessory units.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
American Specialties, Inc.
2.
Bobrick Washroom Equip. Inc.
3.
Bradley Corporation.
4.
Charles Parker Company.
5.
Phillip Carey Mfg. Company.
D. Work of this Section shall comply with applicable requirements of the Handicapped
Accessibility Act of Texas, as identified in Article 7, Article 601b, Vernon's Texas
Civil Statutes and with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Prior to start of fabrication, submit:
1. Accessory manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each
toilet accessory proposed for use.
2. Setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorage devices in concrete and masonry and for wood blocking in wood or
metal stud partitions.
3. Samples of each type of toilet accessory, if requested. Submitted items may be
used in the work if acceptable.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver accessories to site until areas in which they are to be installed are
ready to receive them.
•
•
7
2516 TOILET ACCESSORIES
10800.3
•
•
B. Pack accessories individually in manner to protect accessory and its finish.
1.08 PROTECTION
A. During installation of work of this Section, protect adjacent finished work from
damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Grab Bars (GB):
1. Bobrick B-5837 Series, 1-1/4" diameter stainless steel L-shaped grab bars.
2. Provide manufacturer's concealed anchor devices for conditions encountered.
3. Locations: As shown on the Drawings.
B. Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (TDR):
1. Bobrick B-3942, Semi -recessed.
2. Locations: One per toilet and as shown on drawings.
D. Soap Dispensers (SD):
1. Bobrick B-2111 (liquid) surface mounted soap dispenser.
2. Locations: One unit per lavatory.
E. Toilet Tissue Dispensers (TTD):
1. Bobrick B2730 at all handicap locations.
2. Locations: One unit at each water closet location.
•
F. Mop Holders (MOP):
1. Bobrick B-223, 22 gauge satin finish stainless steel.
2. 36" long unless otherwise shown.
3. Locations: One unit at each mop sink.
•
G. Mirror (MIR):
1. Bobrick Series B-290, 1/4" mirror glazing polished plate glass, electro-copper
plated, stainless steel channel frame, galvanized steel back and theft -proof locking
device
2. Sizes and mounting heights as shown.
3. 24" x 36"
4. Locations: As shown on the drawings. Mount at 40" A.F.F. to bottom of
reflective surface.
H. Feminine Napkin Receptacle (FNR):
1. Bobrick B-270 surface mounted.
2. Locations: One unit per water closet in Women's toilets only.
0
TOILET ACCESSORIES 2516 •
10800.4
I. Coat Hook (CH):
1. Bobrick B-682
2. Location: One unit per toilet room. Mount 54" A.F.F on the back of the door. •
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION •
A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building -in.
Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required.
B. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with detail, manufacturer's •
printed instructions and approved layout drawings.
B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate and wood
blocking provided.
C. Use approved theft -resistant type fasteners.
END OF SECTION
•
Is
•
•
F_]
•
SECTION 12502 - HORIZONTAL BLINDS
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GOVERNING PROVISIONS
2516
A. Applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
• and Division 1 - General Requirements, govern work under this Section whether
attached hereto or not.
•
B. Read all other Sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and
this Section describe the Horizontal Blinds work. Verify all dimensions and
conditions at the site.
C. Reference to the term "Contractor" shall be construed as the Contractor for this
Section of the work except as herein specifically stated otherwise.
• 1.02 RELATIONS WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Items furnished under this Section will be installed by other trades unless specifically
stated otherwise; furnish installation directions, setting drawings, templates,
specifications, and other information required for clear understanding of setting and
• operation requirements.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to
complete the Horizontal Blind work indicated or reasonably inferred from the
Drawings and Specifications.
• B. Work Included:
1. Horizontal slat blinds.
2. Blind accessories.
• 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Levolor Corporation.
2. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
•
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01300.
0
HORIZONTAL BLINDS 2516 •
12502.2
B. Prior to placing material order, submit:
1. Product manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for type of
blind proposed for use.
2. Shop drawings showing field measured dimensions of openings scheduled to
receive blinds. Include details of any special components required that are not in
manufacturer's product data and details of head, sill and edge or corner
conditions.
3. Samples of colors available for Architect's selection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. All blinds shall be "Riveria" Blinds as manufactured by Levolor Corporation in
accordance with the following:
1. Slats
a. Material: 1" wide aluminum, nominal 0.008" thick.
b. Finish: Plastic type finish coat applied under high pressure and baked at high
temperature.
c. Color: Selected by Architect.
2. Braided Ladders
a. Material: Polyester yarn.
1). Vertical Component: Not less than .045" diameter not greater than .066"
diameter.
2). Horizontal Component: Not less than four threads.
b. Rungs: 15 per foot, equally spaced.
3. Operating Hardware
a. Location: Enclosed in .025" thick corrosion resistant steel head channel.
b. Provide Following Components: Drums and cradles, standard rails, bottoms,
brackets, cord locks tilter and tilt control, tilt rod and lift cords. Provide long
lilt rod as required to reach from top of rail to 4'-0" A.F.F.
4. Slat Valance: Do not install slat valance.
5. The overall width of any one blind shall not exceed 8"-0".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for inspecting existing conditions prior to
the installation and notifying the Architect, in writing of any condition which could
prevent satisfactory installation.
B. Furnish and install horizontal slat blinds at all openings, fixed glass, etc. where "MB"
is indicated on the Drawings. Blinds shall cover the entire opening, i.e., fixed glass,
operable window, etc.
•
•
r-n
n
•
•
r�
0
2516 HORIZONTAL BLINDS
12502.3
C. Install blinds in manner shown on shop drawings and to comply with manufacturer's
• instructions. Position units level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative
to adjoining units and related work. Securely anchor units with proper clips, brackets,
anchorages, suited to type of mounting indicated.
D. Divisions between blinds will be permitted only at mullions at continuous windows or
• openings where more than one blind for one opening occurs, unless otherwise
directed.
E. Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage,
blemishes, or indication of use at completion of project. Repair or replace damaged
• units as directed by Architect.
3.02 CLEAN-UP
• A. Remove all empty cartons, containers, discarded blinds, rags, and other trash resulting
from these operations.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
C
•
0
U
SECTION 15072
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Inertia bases.
. B. Vibration isolators.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate inertia bases and locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic
load on each.
•
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting
dimensions.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Isolation Technology, Inc: www.isolationtech.com.
B.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc: www.kineticsnoise.com.
C.
Mason Industries: www.mason-ind.com.
D.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
•
2.02 INERTIA BASES
A.
Structural Bases:
1. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets, to support equipment and
motor, with motor slide rails.
2. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to
transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.
B.
Concrete Inertia Bases:
1. Construction: Structural steel channel perimeter frame, with gusseted brackets and anchor
bolts, reinforcing; concrete filled.
2. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.
4. Concrete: Minimum 3000 psi concrete.
2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Restrained Open Spring Isolators:
1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying
capacity.
2. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound
pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware.
3. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene
pad isolators.
4. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops.
5. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated
springs.
JP Court
10/4/2005
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15072 - 1
0
B. Closed Spring Isolators:
1.
Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber
stabilizers.
2.
Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying
capacity.
3.
Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad
isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance.
4.
For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated
springs.
C. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators:
1.
Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber
stabilizers.
2.
Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working
deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying
capacity.
3.
Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad
isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops.
4.
For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated
springs.
D. Neoprene Pad Isolators:
1.
Rubber or neoprene waffle pads.
a. Hardness: 30 durometer.
b. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch.
c. Maximum Loading: 50 psi.
d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width.
2.
Configuration: Single layer.
3.
Configuration: 1/2 inch thick waffle pads bonded each side of 1/4 inch thick steel plate.
E. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.4 inch deflection with threaded insert.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
f
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bases:
1. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 2 inches clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
3. Adjust equipment level.
C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.
D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different
from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load
is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
E. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient
hangers as follows:
1. Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support.
2. 5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support.
3. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or
static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch r♦
static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
JP Court VIBRATION ISOLATION
10/4/2005 15072 -2
0
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15072 - 3
SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
1.02
REFERENCES
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.
C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
2.02
NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.
•
3. Background Color: Black.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices
with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in -line pumps, may be identified with tags.
L
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075 - 1
SECTION 15082
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping insulation.
•
B.
Jackets and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004.
B.
ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2004.
i
C.
ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2004.
D.
ASTM C 534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2003.
E.
ASTM C 547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2003.
F.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2005.
G.
ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
H.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
National Fire Protection Association; 2000.
I.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2003.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
•
A.
Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and
thickness.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B.
Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
•
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
JP Court
10/4/2005
PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 1
A. Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Fiber Glass: www.knauffiberglass.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 40
B. Insulation: ASTM C 547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yam, bonded to aluminized film;
moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 of 0.02 perm -inches.
D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Manufacturer:
1. Armstrong World Industries; www.armaflex.com.
2. Armacell International: www.armacell.com.
B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534
Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.
3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
a
C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 40
2.04 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 96.
d. Thickness: 10 mil.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
3. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
a. Compatible with insulation.
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth. 10
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
JP Court PIPING INSULATION
10/4/2005 15082 -2
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C.
Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including
fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
D.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
0
E.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at
equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
F.
For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
G.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied.
Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
• H.
Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.
I.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at
supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
J.
Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above
finished floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
K.
Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with
insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced
vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of
horizontal piping.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: up to and including 1.5 inches
(a) Thickness: 1 inch.
2) Pipe Size Range: over 1.5 inches
(a) Thickness: 2 inch.
b
2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: all
JP Court
10/4/2005
PIPING INSULATION
15082 - 3
17,
(a) Thickness: 1 inch.
B. Cooling Systems:
1. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils:
a. Cellular Foam Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: all.
2) Thickness: 3/4 inch.
2. Refrigerant Suction:
a. Cellular Foam Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: less than or equal to 1 1/2".
2) Thickness: 1 inch.
3) Pipe Size Range: over 1 1 /2".
4) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
JP Court PIPING INSULATION
10/4/2005 15082 - 4
11
u
L
a
•
•
17,
u
•
0
SECTION 15083
PIPING SAFETY COVERS
'
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping Safety Covers.
. B.
Lavatory Piping Enclosure.
C.
Basin/Sink Piping Enclosure.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus; 2004.
.
B.
ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2003.
C.
ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2004.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in this section.
B.
Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation; maintain
storage conditions for products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Truebro, Inc; 7 Main Street, P.O. Box 440, Ellington, CT 06029.
ASD. Tel: (800) 340-5969 (outside CT), (860) 875-2868 (inside CT). Fax: (860) 872-0300.
Email: info@truebro.com. www.truebro.com.
B.
Substitutions: Permitted.
2.02 PIPING INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA), Article 4.19.4.
2. BOCA Basic Building Code.
3. Requirements of International Building Code and Texas Accessibility Standards.
B.
Piping Safety Covers: Truebro Lav-Guard.
1. Characteristics: Three-piece molded assembly, minimum 1/8 inch wall thickness, with
internal ribs to provide air space between piping and piping insulation jacket, molded to
receive manufacturer's snap -clip fasteners.
2. Vinyl Material: Impact -resistant and stain -resistant molded closed -cell anti -microbial vinyl
compound, UV -stable, non -fading, non yellowing; having the following performance
characteristics:
a. Burning Characteristics: 0 seconds Average Time of Burning (ATB), 0 mm Area of
Burning (AEB), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635.
b. Thermal Conductivity: K-value 1.17, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177.
c. Indentation Hardness: 60, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240,
JP Court
10/4/2005
PIPING SAFETY COVERS
15083 - 1
•
using Type A durometer.
3. Trap Assembly Cover: Three-piece assembly, with removable clean -out nut enclosure.
4. Angle Stop Covers: Formed with hinged cap for access to valve without requiring cover
removal. •
5. Configurations: In accordance with manufacturer's product data for project piping
configurations indicated on drawings.
6. Color: China White, gloss finish; paintable.
7. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard re -usable snap -clip fasteners; wire -tie fasteners not
permitted.
C. Lavatory Piping Enclosure: Truebro Lav-Shield.
1. Characteristics: One-piece rigid molded vinyl enclosure, minimum 1/8 inch wall thickness,
factory -punched for manufacturer's wall fasteners.
2. Vinyl Material: Impact -resistant and stain -resistant molded closed -cell vinyl, having the
following performance characteristics:
a. Burning Characteristics: 0 seconds Average Time of Burning (ATB), 0 mm Area of
Burning (AEB), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635.
b. Indentation Hardness: 69, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240,
using Type A durometer.
3. Vinyl Color: China White, fine -textured finish; paintable.
4. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel wall fasteners with tamper -resistant
heads. •
D. Basin/Sink Piping Enclosure: Truebro Basin Guard.
1. Characteristics: One-piece rigid molded vinyl enclosure, minimum 0.093 inch wall
thickness, factory -molded flanges for fasteners.
2. Vinyl Material: Impact -resistant and stain -resistant molded closed -cell vinyl, having the
following performance characteristics:
a. Burning characteristics, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635: 0 seconds
Average Time of Burning (ATB), 0 mm Area of Burning (AEB).
b. Indentation Hardness: 69, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240,
using Type A durometer.
3. Width: 36 inches.
4. Color: White, fine -textured finish; paintable. •
5. Fasteners: Supply non -corroding fasteners with tamper -resistant heads; type
recommended by manufacturer for indicated project conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping configurations are correct type for piping cover component configurations •
specified.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products of this section in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
3.03 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Do not allow damage to installed products by subsequent construction activities; protect
products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
JP Court
10/4/2005
PIPING SAFETY COVERS
15083 -2
C7
•
0
11
SECTION 15086
• DUCT INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Duct insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
C. Insulation jackets.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004.
B. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2004.
C. ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2004.
D. ASTM C 553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2002.
E. ASTM C 1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material); 2000.
F. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2005.
• G. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
H. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,
including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping.
r 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics,
and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
JP Court
10/4/2005
DUCT INSULATION
15086 -1
i
0
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Manufacturer:
1. Knauf Fiber Glass: www.knauffiberglass.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value: 0.27 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 3.0 percent by weight.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D. Vapor Barrier Tape: As approved by manufacturer
2.03 JACKETS
A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a. Compatible with insulation.
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
•
2.04 DUCT LINER
A. Manufacturers:
1. Knauf Fiber Glass; Model Duct Liner E-M: www.knauffiberglass.com.
2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3. Owens Coming Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted. •
B. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible blanket, rigid board,
and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate
polymer, or acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by testing to ASTM G 21.
1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.
3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum.
4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70.
C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire -retardant type.
D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.
PART 3 EXECUTION
JP Court DUCT INSULATION
10/4/2005 15086 -2
0
0
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
• C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature (first 5 ft from air handler ONLY:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,
and expansion joints.
D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces - Return Air: Use internal
duct liner.
F. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier
adhesive or tape to match jacket.
i 2. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where
necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
3. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
4. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation
without disturbing wrapping.
0
G. Duct Liner Application: Return air plenums
1. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing.
2. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
3. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Supply Ducts: (first 5 feet ONLY)
1. Minimum installed R-value of 5 for ducts located inside the building.
B. Return Ducts:
1. Minimum installed R-value of 5 for ducts located within the building.
2. All single wall metal duct shall be lined with 2" thick liner.
END OF SECTION
JP Court DUCT INSULATION
10/4/2005 15086 -3
9
s
SECTION 15145
PLUMBING PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices
for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999 (addendum A&B).
B. ASME B16.18 -Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2001(R 2002) (ANSI B16.18).
C. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001.
D. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1996
(ANSI/ASME B31.9).
E. ASME (BPV IV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of
Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.
F. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.
G. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.
H. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.
I. ASTM B 88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2003.
J. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2004.
K. ASTM D 2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2004a.
L. ASTM D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
of
(PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2002).
M. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings; 2004a.
N. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 1999
(ANSI/AWWA C651).
Ilf O. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1997.
P. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2003.
Q. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2002.
R. MSS SP-110 -Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
JP Court
10/4/2005
PLUMBING PIPING
15145 - 1
46
A
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 1996.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide 40
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Municipality of Bellville, TX, standards.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable state labor
regulations.
D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,
potable water certification, water pressure rating.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to 2003 International Plumbing code for installation of backflow prevention devices. •
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections
of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 SANITARYSEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.02 SANITARYSEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement.
2.03 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
JP Court PLUMBING PIPING
10/4/2005 15145 -2
4
2.04 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME 616.18, cast copper alloy or ASME 616.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder.
2.05 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
1.
Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Flanges
for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1.
Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,
water impervious isolation barrier.
2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1.
Conform to ASME 1331.9.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
6.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
7.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete
pier or steel support.
9.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
B. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1.
Conform to ASME 1331.9.
2.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
3.
Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
5.
Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll,
double hanger.
6.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger
rods.
7.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with
welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
8.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
9.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
10.
Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.
11.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
12.
Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange,
and concrete pier or steel support.
13.
Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut,
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
14.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.07 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
JP Court PLUMBING PIPING
10/4/2005 15145 -3
6
LA
1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com.
2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Construction, 4 inches and smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece
body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof
stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union.
2.08 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.
2. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.
3. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Up to 2 Inches:
1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder
or threaded ends.
C. Over 2 Inches:
1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat,
flanged ends.
2.09 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (if required)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Amtrol Inc: www.amtrol.com.
2. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com.
3. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Up to 2 Inches:
1. MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced
diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.
C. Over 2 Inches:
1. MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.
2.10 RELIEF VALVES
A. Pressure Relief:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com.
b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.
c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
d. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct
pressure actuated.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cla-Val Co: www.cla-val.com.
b. Henry Technologies: www.henrytech.com.
c. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
d. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,
automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity
JP Court PLUMBING PIPING
10/4/2005 15145 -4
a
F'
Il
4a
0
0
C11
0
a
6
ASME (BPV IV) certified and labelled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
• B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
r E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected
equipment.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15082.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 1 ft of cover.
J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
N. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
P. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.
Q. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
R. PVC Pipe: Make solvent -welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
S. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
T. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent
i work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
JP Court
10/4/2005
PLUMBING PIPING
15145 - 5
0
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
10. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to ,
Section 15072.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
D. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and
slope to drain at minimum of 1 /4 inch per foot slope. a
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
ash) or acid (hydrochloric). Q
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain
50 to 80 mg/L residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch.
JP Court PLUMBING PIPING
10/4/2005 15145 - 6
M
d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch.
,10 2. Plastic Piping:
a. All Sizes:
1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft.
2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.
0
r�
Ll
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
PLUMBING PIPING
15145 - 7
0
SECTION 15146
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Floor drains.
B.
Cleanouts.
C.
Hydrants.
D.
Water hammer arrestors.
E.
Thermostatic mixing valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
ASME Al 12.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2001.
B.
ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type;
American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly
and support requirements.
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, ceanouts, backflow
preventers, water hammer arrestors and other plumbing items.
E.
Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
F.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Supply for Owner's use in maintenance of project:
1. Two loose keys for outside hose bibbs.
2. Two hose end vacuum breakers for hose bibbs.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 DRAINS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Josam Company: www.josam.com.
2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
3. Zum Industries, Inc: www.zum.com.
4. Wade
!
5. Mifab
6. Substitutions: Not permitted.
JP Court
10/4/2005
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15146 - 1
B. Floor Drain (FD-1):
1. ASME Al12.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable stainless steel strainer.
C. Floor Sink (FS-1):
1. Round lacquered cast iron body with integral seepage pan, epoxy coated interior, aluminum
dome strainer, clamp collar, full grate.
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2. Josam Company: www.josam.com.
3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zum.com.
4. Wade
5. Mifab
6. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1):
1. Round cast stainless steel access frame and non-skid cover.
C. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (CO-2):
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3):
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top
assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed
depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
E. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4):
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round
stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
F. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Caulked or threaded type. Provide
bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
2.03 HYDRANTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Arrowhead Brass Company: www.arrowheadbrass.com.
2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
3. Zum Industries, Inc: www.zum.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Wall Hydrants:
1. ASSE 1019; freeze resistant, self -draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread
spout, lockshield and removable key, and integral vacuum breaker.
2.04 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX
A. Box Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray Manufacturing.
2. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
3. Oatey: www.oatey.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Valve Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray Manufacturing.
2. IPS Corporation/Water-Tite: www.ipscorp.com.
3. Zum Industries, Inc: www.zum.com.
JP Court PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
10/4/2005 15146 -2
'40
�_]
4L
r
Cl
r
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Description: Plastic preformed rough -in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip in finishing
it, cover.
2.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Conbraco Industries: www.conbraco.com.
2. Valve Solutions, Inc.
3. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
1. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two
independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure
. relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back
pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate
valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.
2. Watts Regulator Company: www.wattsregulator.com.
3. Zum Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.
4. Mifab
5. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 2O1,
precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and
maximum 250 psi working pressure.
2.07 MIXING VALVES
A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. ESBE: www.esbe.se.
b. Leonard Valve Company: www.leonardvalve.com.
c. Symmons Valve Company
d. Substitutions: Not permitted.
to 2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows, integral
temperature adjustment.
3. Accessories:
a. Check valve on inlets.
b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.
c. Stem thermometer on outlet.
B. Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Delta Faucet Company: www.deltafaucet.com.
b. H.G. Specialties: www.hgspec.com.
c. Symmons Valve Company.
d. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel cylinder, integral temperature
adjustment.
3. Accessories:
JP Court PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
10/4/2005 15146 -3
a. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.
b. Stem thermometer on outlet.
c. Strainer stop checks on inlets.
d. Cabinet: 16 gage prime coated steel, for recessed mounting with keyed lock.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of
domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems,
premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.
F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water
supply piping to lavatories sinks flush valve water closets or group of water closets. G
END OF SECTION
0
0
0
0
JP Court PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
10/4/2005 15146 - 4
4
SECTION 15415
RESTROOM PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Toilets, and flush valves.
`
B.
Lavatories and faucets.
C.
Fittings and trim.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
ASME Al 12.19.1 M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures; The American Society of
.
Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004).
B.
ASME Al 12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic Requirements for Water
Closets and Urinals; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2003.
C.
ASME Al 12.19AM - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1994 (R2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data on fixtures, including dimensions, rough -in dimensions, pipe
connection sizes, trim, and finishes.
B.
Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
`
C.
Operation and maintenance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
E+
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer - Toilets, Urinals, Lavatories, and Faucets:
1. American Standard, Inc; Tel: (800) 217-1929; Fax: (800) 233-1896.
2. Kohler
3. Toto
B.
Acceptable Manufacturer - Flush Valves: .
1. Sloan Royal
2. Toto
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 TOILETS - GENERAL
A.
Toilets: Vitreous china; comply with ASME Al 12.19.2M for hydraulic performance, water
surface area, trap seal depth, ballpass diameter, and dimensions; color white unless otherwise
indicated; complete with flush valve and water control devices.
B.
Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated provide the following for each toilet as applicable:
1. Seat: Manufacturer's standard or recommended open front seat, without cover; white.
2. External flush valve type toilets: Chrome -plated supply and flush valve of type
recommended by toilet manufacturer.
3. Wall -mounted toilets: Carrier fittings.
4. Bolt covers.
JP Court RESTROOM PLUMBING FIXTURES
10/4/2005 15415 - 1
t
2.03 EXTERNAL FLUSH VALVE TOILETS
A. Toilet WC-1: Toto CT705L 10" Rough; external flush valve, floor -mounted, bottom -outlet,
top -inlet, elongated siphon jet bowl, 1.6 gpf, 14 inch rim height, 10 inch roughing -in.
1. Color: White.
B. Toilet WC-2: Toto CST704L; external flush valve, floor -mounted, bottom -outlet, top -inlet,
elongated siphon jet bowl, 1.6 gpf, 16-1/8 inch rim height, 10 inch roughing -in.
1. Color: White.
2.04 LAVATORIES- GENERAL
A. Lavatories: Comply with ASME Al 12.19.1 M, ASME All 12.19.2M, ASME Al 12.19AM as
applicable for dimensions; color white unless otherwise indicated; complete with faucet, water
supplies, and drain.
B. Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated provide the following for each lavatory as applicable:
1. Faucet, hot and cold supply.
2. Chrome -plated supply pipes; shut-off valves.
3. Lavatories with overflow: Chrome -plated pop-up drain.
4. Lavatories without overflow: Stainless steel grid drain.
2.05 SINKS
,o
A. SK-1: Single Bowl, 20 gauge seamless, Type 304 stainless steel. Die -drawn construction with �r
polished interior finish, fully coated underside, and radiused inside comers.
2.06 COUNTERTOP LAVATORIES
A. Lavatory LV-1: Toto; vitreous china, self -rimming, front overflow, faucet ledge; ADA compliant.
1. Size: 21 inches wide by 18-1/4 inches front to back, nominal. 46
2. Faucet holes on 4 inch centers.
3. Color: White.
B. LAVATORY FAUCETS
C. Lavatory Faucets: widespread, solid brass, washerless ceramic disc valve cartridge, 2.5 gpm
flow restrictor, polished chrome -plated; ADA compliant. 3
1. Connections: 8 inch rigid copper.
2. Spout: Gooseneck.
3. Handles: Wristblade.
4. Vandal resistant aerator and handles.
5. Grid drain.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping and wiring are installed and in the right location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Install carriers and hangers for wall -mounted fixtures in walls before wall surface is completed.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install fixtures plumb and level.
C. Install fixtures and fittings at heights required by TAS and applicable plumbing code.
D. Anchor water closets to floor with screws or bolts.
JP Court RESTROOM PLUMBING FIXTURES
10/4/2005 15415 -2
0
E. Install piping connections as specified in Section 15145.
F. Seal fixtures to walls and floors with sealant.
0 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust water flow rates to comply with manufacturer's rating of the fixture.
B. Clean fixtures of labels, dirt, and construction debris.
U,
r]
0
•
4b
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
RESTROOM PLUMBING FIXTURES
15415 - 3
0
0
SECTION 15430
is
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water Heaters.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. UL 174 - Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; 2004.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to
other equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.
3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and
system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data,
replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity
identified by permanently attached label.
B. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25
percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
1.05 CERTIFICATIONS
A. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174 or UL 1453.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS
A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co: www.hotwater.com.
B. Rheem Manufacturing Company: www.rheem.com.
C. Bradford -White.
JP Court
10/4/2005
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
15430 - 1
D. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.
B. Performance: See Drawings
1. Maximum working pressure: 150 psig.
C. Electrical Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings
D. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber; encased in
corrosion -resistant steel jacket; baked -on enamel finish.
E. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 120 to
170 degrees F, flanged or screw -in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction
box and operating light. Wire double element units so elements do not operate simultaneously.
F. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME
temperature and pressure relief valve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code,
and complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system.
3.02 SCHEDULES -See Drawings
END OF SECTION
JP Court PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
10/4/2005 15430 - 2
is
•
0
0
rA
sM
SECTION 15737
UNITARYAIR CONDITIONERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Unitary air conditioners.
B. Controls.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National
Fire Protection Association; 2002.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for manufactured products and assemblies. Indicate water, drain,
thermostatic valves, and electrical rough -in connections with electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements, and
include start-up instructions.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
4 A. Provide one set of filters for each unit.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The Carrier Corporation: www.carrier.com.
B. The Trane Company: www.trane.com.
C. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Description: Packaged air handler, self-contained, factory assembled, single point prewired unit,
consisting of cabinet, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, discharge plenum, outside air connection,
heating coil, air filters, and controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil. Packaged
condensing unit, self-contained, factory wired and assembled, consisting of enclosure,
condenser, condenser fan, compressor, and controls.
B. Assembly: Up flow air delivery, in draw -through configuration as indicated.
2.03 CABINET
A. Frame and Panels: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed access doors or
JP Court
10/4/2005
a
UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS
15737 -1
4
panels with quick fasteners.
B. Insulation: Minimum 1/2 inch thick acoustic duct liner for lining cabinet interior.
C. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion -resistant coating.
2.04 EVAPORATOR FAN
A. Fan: V-Belt driven, with permanently lubricated bearings, double width, double inlet, forward
curved centrifugal fan, statically and dynamically balanced, resiliently mounted.
B. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. l�
Variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves
set at mid -position as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of
the motor.
2.05 COMPRESSOR
A. Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and (i
internal motor protection.
2.06 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Direct expansion coiling coil of seamless copper or aluminum tubes expanded into aluminum
fins.
B. Refrigeration circuit with externally equalized thermal expansion valve, filter -drier, and charging
valves.
2.07 CONDENSER
A. Co -Axial, copper tube in copper tube or shell and tube with finned copper tubes in steel shell
with water temperature actuated water regulating valve.
B. Terminate suction and liquid refrigerant piping with service valves within unit.
C. Fan: Double width, double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fan, statically and dynamically
balanced, with permanently lubricated bearings.
D. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed.
Variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves
set at mid -position as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of
the motor.
2.08 HEATING COIL
A. Helical nickel -chrome resistance wire coil heating elements with refractory ceramic support 16
bushings, with automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in magnetic contactors, manual reset
thermal cut-out, airflow proving device, load fuses.
2.09 AIR FILTERS
A. Easily removed 2 inch thick disposable glass fiber panel filters.
2.10 CONTROLS
A. Factory wired controls shall include contactor, high and low pressure cutouts, internal winding
thermostat for compressor, control circuit transformer, non -cycling reset relay.
B. Provide thermostat to cycle cooling, mounted within unit with 'fan -off -cool' switch allowing
continuous fan operation, or cycling fan on call for cooling.
C. Provide room thermostat to control cooling with 'cool -off selector switch and 'auto -on' fan control
switch.
JP Court UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS
10/4/2005 15737 - 2
if
0
6
D. Provide low voltage, adjustable room thermostat to control heater stages in sequence with delay
between stages, compressor, condenser, and supply fan to maintain temperature setting.
_ Include system selector switch (heat -off -cool), and fan control switch (auto -on).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 90A.
C. Provide shut-off valves in condenser water inlet and outlet piping.
D. Pipe refrigerant from unit to condenser; refer to section 15186.
E. Pipe condensate from drain pan to nearest floor drain.
3.02 SCHEDULES -See Drawings
END OF SECTION
•
dk
Ab
JP Court
10/4/2005
•
UNITARYAIR CONDITIONERS
15737 - 3
0
SECTION 15765
AIR COILS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electric coils.
., 1.02 REFERENCES
A. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide coil and frame configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections,
and rough -in dimensions.
B. Certificates: Certify that coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures meet or
exceed specified requirements.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect coil fins from crushing and bending by leaving in shipping cases until installation, and by
storing indoors.
B. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe caps or plugs.
PART2 PRODUCTS
4 2.01 ELECTRIC COILS
a
A. Manufacturers:
1. Environmental Technologies, Inc: www.enviro-tec.com.
2. INDEECO (Industrial Engineering and Equipment Company): www.indeeco.com.
3. Warren Technology: www.warrenhvac.com.
4. Raywall.
B. Assembly: UL listed and labelled, with terminal control box and hinged cover, splice box, coil,
casing, and controls.
C. Coil: Exposed helical coil of nickel -chrome resistance wire with refractory ceramic support
bushings.
D. Casing: Die formed channel frame of 16 gage galvanized steel with 3/8 inch mounting holes on
3 inch centers. Provide tube supports for coils longer than 36 inches.
E. Controls: Automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in magnetic contactors, control circuit
transformer and fuse, manual reset thermal cut-out, air flow proving device, fused disconnect,
load fuses.
F. Electrical Characteristics: See Plans
PART 3 EXECUTION
JP Court
S 10/4/2005
AIR COILS
15765 - 1
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
B. Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible.
1. Support coil sections independent of piping on steel channel or double angle frames and
secure to casings.
2. Provide frames for maximum three coil sections.
3. Arrange supports to avoid piercing drain pans.
4. Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.
C. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges. Comb out bent fins.
END OF SECTION
JP Court AIR COILS
10/4/2005 15765 - 2
U1
•
J
D
As
r,
u
0
SECTION 15810
. DUCTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal ductwork.
B. Casing and plenums.
C. Duct cleaning.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005.
B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2004a.
C. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.
D. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National
l Fire Protection Association; 2002.
E. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 1985, First Edition.
F. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round
ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration
prior to start of work for low pressure class and higher systems.
C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure,
and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fiber ducts.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes
in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
i manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants.
JP Court DUCTS
10/4/2005 15810 - 1
a
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B,
with G90/Z275 coating.
B. Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by
helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. 10
b. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
c. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F.
C. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuously threaded. It
2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for
operating pressures indicated.
1
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil
turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal
with glass fiber insulation.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages
indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or
electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree
conical tee connections may be used.
F. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame,
provide blank -out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted
black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.
L
2.03 DUCT MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal -Fab, Inc: www.metal-fabinc.com.
B. SEMCOIncorporated: www.semcoinc.com.
C. United McGill Corporation: www.unitedmcgill.com.
D. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.04 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
r
A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating
pressures indicated. a
B. Double Wall Insulated Round Ducts: Round spiral lockseam duct with galvanized steel outer
JP Court DUCTS
10/4/2005 15810 - 2
r_M
wall, 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation, perforated galvanized steel inner wall; fitting with solid
inner wall.
2.05 CASINGS
A.
Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and construct for operating pressures indicated.
B.
Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch
centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gage galvanized
0
expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet
metal shields.
C.
Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles.
Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning
and inspection.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
• C.
Install and seal metal and flexible ducts along all longitudinal seams on rigid ducts and
transverse seams on all ducts using UL 181A or 181 B tapes and mastics in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
D.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with
•
spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated
ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
E.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
F.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
G.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct.
Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
H.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum
length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
I.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
J.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork
to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
K.
At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed
by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Ductwork Material:
1. Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): Steel
2. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): Steel.
JP Court DUCTS
10/4/2005 15810 - 3
r
3.
Return and Relief: Steel, Aluminum.
4.
General Exhaust: Steel, Aluminum.
5.
Outside Air Intake: Steel.
6.
Combustion Air: Steel.
B. Ductwork Pressure Class:
1.
Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch
2.
Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1 inch.
3.
Return and Relief: 1/2 inch.
4.
General Exhaust: 1/2 inch.
5.
Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch.
6.
Combustion Air: 1/2 inch.
END OF SECTION
JP Court DUCTS
10/4/2005 15810 -4
r
LC
r]
L
0
a
r�
u
0
SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air turning devices/extractors.
B. Backdraft dampers.
C. Duct test holes.
D. Flexible duct connections.
E. Volume control dampers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National
Fire Protection Association; 2002.
B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No. 1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers.
1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each size and type of fusible link.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.
2. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
3. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
16 B. Multi -blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, aluminum
construction, with worm drive mechanism with removable key operator.
JP Court DUCT ACCESSORIES
10/4/2005 15820 -1
0
2.02 BACKDRAFTDAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. r
2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
4. Manufacturer of equipment when backdraft device is integral to the equipment.
5. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,
threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps.
2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
and as indicated.
B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum density 30 oz per sq yd.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide.
2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.
2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.
3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.
4. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,
and as indicated.
C.
Splitter Dampers:
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier
for sizes over 24 inches.
2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with
continuous hinge or rod.
3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged
bushing with set screw.
D.
Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
E.
End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings.
F.
Quadrants:
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers.
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or
adapters.
3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
JP Court DUCT ACCESSORIES
10/4/2005 15820 -2
48
Ll
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for
duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
D. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections
immediately adjacent to the equipment.
E. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment; see Section 15072.
F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from
duct take -off.
G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
H. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated.
I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
0
a
16
14
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820 - 3
0
SECTION 15835
POWER VENTILATORS
.
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Cabinet exhaust fans.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 2004.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified
41
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts
7♦
list, and wiring diagrams.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Kitchen Range Hood Exhaust Fans: Comply with requirements of NFPA 96.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
•
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings have
been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
i
A.
Supply two sets of belts for each fan.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.
•
B.
Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.
C.
PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.
D.
Broan Manufacturing
E.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
.
2.02 CABINETAND CEILING EXHAUST FANS
A.
Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with acoustic
insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge.
B.
Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall
>�
mounted switch.
PART 3
EXECUTION
JP Court
10/4/2005
POWER VENTILATORS
15835 - 1
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Hung Cabinet Fans: a
1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 15072.
2. Install flexible connections specified in Section 15820 between fan and ductwork. Ensure
metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and
fan while running.
C. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.
3.02 SCHEDULES -See Drawings
END OF SECTION
JP Court POWER VENTILATORS
10/4/2005 15835 - 2
1
a
•
•
7
i
r
SECTION 15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
!
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Diffusers.
B.
Registers/grilles.
C.
Louvers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
ADC 1062: GRD - Test Code for Grilles, Registers & Diffusers; Air Diffusion Council; 1984.
B.
AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 1999.
C.
ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1991.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as
to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets
showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
B.
Samples: Submit one of each required air outlet and inlet type.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
B.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
a
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
Provide mock-up of typical interior ceiling module with supply and return air outlets.
B.
Locate where directed.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Carnes Company HVAC: www.carnes.com.
B.
Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.
i
C.
Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.
D.
Metal -Aire.
E.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Type: Square, stamped, multi -core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with
sectorizing baffles where indicated.
JP Court
10/4/2005
0
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15850 - 1
•
B. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.
C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish.
2.03 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Type: Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face.
B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.
C. Fabrication: Steel with steel frame and baked enamel off-white finish.
2.04 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille,
two-way deflection.
B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish. i
2.05 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set
at 45 degrees, vertical face.
B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. t
C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and
aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel
finish, color to be selected.
2.06 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
B. Fabrication: Aluminum with factory clear lacquer finish.
C. Frame: Channel lay -in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
2.07 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades with 90 degree one-way deflection, 1/8 x 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers.
B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and
aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel
finish, color to be selected.
2.08 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille
with two-way deflection.
B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting and gasket.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish.
2.09 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or
other device to set blades, vertical face. r
B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting.
JP Court AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
10/4/2005 15850 - 2
f
C.
Fabrication: Steel frames and blades, with factory off-white enamel finish, color to be selected.
2.10 WALL GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
M
A.
Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
B.
Fabrication: Aluminum with factory clear lacquer finish.
C.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
2.11 LINEAR WALL REGISTERS/GRILLES
+
A.
Type: Streamlined blades with 15 degree deflection, 1/8 x 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers.
B.
Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting and gasket.
C.
Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel finish.
2.12 LOUVERS
A.
Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh
screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake.
B.
Fabrication: 16 gage thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory baked enamel finish,
color to be selected.
C.
Mounting: Furnish with interior angle flange for installation.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D.
Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite
i
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E.
Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
3.02 SCHEDULES - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
i
1
C�
JP Court AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
• 10/4/2005 15850 - 3
SECTION 15950
. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AABC MN-1 - AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance
Council; 2002.
B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1988.
C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems;
National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 1998, Sixth Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval
within 30 days after award of Contract.
B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing approach for
each system and component.
1. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency
measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,
parameters, formulas to be used.
b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to
be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
416 c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping
drawings during the process.
d. Final test report forms to be used.
e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.
C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing,
and equipment data required.
3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page
and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced
drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and
indicating thermostat locations.
5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
6. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms prior to commencing system
balance.
7. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE Std
111, or NEBB forms.
JP Court TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
10/4/2005 15950 -1
8. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f. Project Architect.
g. Project Engineer.
h. Project Contractor.
i. Project altitude.
j. Report date.
D.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing
valves and rough setting.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC MN-1, ASHRAE Std 111, or NEBB
Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
B.
TAB Agency Qualifications: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by
AABC.
C.
Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB Certified
Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor, or registered Professional Engineer experienced in
performance of this Work and licensed in the state of Texas.
1.05 SEQUENCING
AND SCHEDULING
A.
Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work
before Substantial Completion of Project.
B.
Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety system with Fire
Authority.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Furnish AABC National Performance Guaranty for this project.
PART 2
PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final
filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
JP Court TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
10/4/2005 15950 -2
U
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services
which prevent system balance.
• C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments
available to Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems
and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to
r space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.04 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings
to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
•
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or
areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
41 A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of
duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts
and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
' such as dampers and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
JP Court
10/4/2005
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950 - 3
0
L7
conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme
conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at
minimum air flow rate, full heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide
required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static
pressure near the building entries.
3.06 SCOPE
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: All equipment listed on the mechanical
equipment schedules.
END OF SECTION
JP Court TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
10/4/2005 15950 - 4
to
Is
a
•
•
0
0
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Grounding and bonding components.
B.
Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of:
1. Metal frame of the building.
2. Concrete -encased electrode.
3. Rod electrodes.
1.02
REFERENCES
M
A.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.
C.
Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
!
specified and indicated.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cooper Power Systems: www.cooperpower.com.
B.
Framatome Connectors International: www.fciconnect.com.
C.
Lightning Master Corporation: www.lightningmaster.com.
D.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02
ELECTRODES
A.
Rod Electrodes: Copper.
1. Diameter: 3/4 inch.
2. Length: 8 feet.
B.
Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG.
2.03
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
B.
Exothermic Connections:
JP Court
10/4/2005
GROUNDING AND BONDING
16060 - 1
r
C. Wire: Stranded copper.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to
achieve specified resistance to ground.
B. Install #2 AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing.
C. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing
where indicated. Bond steel together.
D. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.
E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
F. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in fountain structures.
G. Provide isolated grounding conductor for circuits supplying electronic cash registers, personal
computers, and at other locations that may be indicated.
H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and
branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
7
I. Interface with lightning protection system installed under Section 13100.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION
JP Court GROUNDING AND BONDING
10/4/2005 16060 - 2
•
E
1:
0
0
SECTION 16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
.
B.
Anchors and fasteners.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2000.
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
M
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
•
preparation, and installation of product.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
B.
Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion -resistant materials of size and
type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
B.
Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized.
C.
Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Do not use powder -actuated anchors or spring clips.
2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts or expansion anchors.
3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps or welded fasteners.
4. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall
fasteners.
6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
D.
Formed Steel Channel:
1. Product: Unistrut or equal
PART 3
EXECUTION
JP Court
10/4/2005
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
16070 - 1
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system
components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
2. Do not drill or cut structural members.
B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with
adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
C. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
D. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch
off wall.
E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed
in hollow partitions.
A
END OF SECTION
JP Court HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
10/4/2005 16070 - 2
n
u
•
r:
0
u
r1
u
U
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Nameplates and labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.
B.
Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
C.
HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com.
i
D.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 NAMEPLATESAND LABELS
A.
Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
B.
Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2. Communication cabinets.
C.
Letter Size:
1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
2.03 WIRE
MARKERS
A.
Description: Cloth type wire markers.
B.
Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes
each load connection.
•
C.
Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings.
JP Court
10/4/2005
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075 -1
4
2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning legend
describing buried electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplates to equipment front using screws.
C. Secure nameplates to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
D. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3
inches below finished grade.
END OF SECTION
•
r.
0
•
JP Court ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
10/4/2005 16075 - 2
SECTION 16123
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
•
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Wire and cable for 600 volts and less.
•
B.
Wiring connectors and connections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2000.
B.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
•
stipulated by product testing agency.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable
for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
B.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway.
C.
Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway.
D.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway.
E.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN insulation in raceway.
F.
Underground Installations: Use only THWN insulation in raceway or service -entrance cable or
service -entrance cable.
G.
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
H.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
I.
Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
J.
Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
K.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
i
L.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
2.02 WIRE MANUFACTURERS
JP Court
10/4/2005
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16123 - 1
A. Cerro Wire & Cable Company: www.cerrowire.com.
B. Industrial Wire & Cable, Inc: www.industwire.com.
C. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.
D. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.03
BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN.
2.04
SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type SE.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation: Type RH.
2.05
METAL CLAD CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 60 degrees C.
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
F. Armor Material: Steel.
G. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.
2.06
WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Split Bolt Connectors:
B. Solderless Pressure Connectors:
C. Spring Wire Connectors:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
«
B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
•
3.03
INSTALLATION
JP Court BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
10/4/2005 16123 - 2
A. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact
routing and lengths required.
3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of
location shown.
C. Use wiring methods indicated.
D. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
E. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
F. Protect exposed cable from damage.
G. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support
cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
H. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
I. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
• J. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
K. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
L. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of
Ob conductor.
M. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
N. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10
AWG and smaller.
O. Trench and backfill for direct burial cable installation as specified in Sections 02315 and 02316.
Install warning tape along entire length of direct burial cable, within 3 inches of grade, as
specified in Section 16075.
P. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16075. Identify each
conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.
END OF SECTION
•
JP Court
10/4/2005
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
16123 -3
0
I]
SECTION 16131
CONDUIT
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit — Zinc Coated;
1994.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Zinc
Coated; 1994.
C.
ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard Specification for Rigid Aluminum Conduit; 1994.
D.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2000.
E.
NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2001.
F.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
G.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1998.
•
H.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2003.
I.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2004.
J.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, nonmetallic conduit,
fittings, and conduit bodies.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
• PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
JP Court
10/4/2005
CONDUIT
16131 -1
•
u
A. Conduit Size: Comply with NFPA 70.
1. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations:
1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or thickwall non-metallic
conduit.
2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or thickwall nonmetallic
conduit.
3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, plastic coated conduit, or thickwall
non-metallic conduit.
4. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.
C. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit.
D. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit.
2. Maximum conduit size in slab: 3/4 inch.
E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, or thickwall
nonmetallic conduit.
F. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or thickwall
nonmetallic conduit.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, rigid aluminum conduit, or intermediate metal conduit.
2.02 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com.
2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatiand.com/wtchp.htm.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com.
2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.
3. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com.
B. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match
conduit.
2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.
3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
JP Court
10/4/2005
CONDUIT
16131 -2
r-,
n
u
B.
Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com.
2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.
3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com/wtchp.htm.
B.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.
2.06 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A.
Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com.
2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electdflex.com.
3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com.
B.
Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
•
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
B.
Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B.
Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101.
C.
Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
E.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
F.
Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide
space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
G.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16070.
H.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports.
I.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
J.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
K.
Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L.
Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
M.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
JP Court
10/4/2005
CONDUIT
16131 -3
N. Do not cross conduits in slab.
O. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
P. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104
degrees F.
Q. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends.
R. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
S. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
T. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations, and to cast boxes.
U. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to w
make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate
bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
V. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
•
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16060.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16075.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where
separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing
installation.
END OF SECTION
JP Court CONDUIT
10/4/2005 16131 - 4
•
0
•
•
•
9
SECTION 16138
BOXES
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
•
B.
Floor boxes.
C.
Pull and junction boxes.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2000.
•
B.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
C.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
D.
NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
E.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2003.
F.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
•
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and
junction boxes on project record documents.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable
for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com.
B.
Arc-Co./Division of Arcade Technology: www.arc-co.com.
C.
Unity Manufacturing: www.unitymfg.com.
D.
Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 OUTLET BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported;
include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
•
B.
Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
JP Court
10/4/2005
BOXES
16138 -1
0
C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box
manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.
2.03 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable, 1-1/2 inches deep.
B. Material: Plastic.
C. Shape: Rectangular.
D. Service Fittings: As specified in Section 16140.
2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16139.
C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction
box:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
D. In -Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush
mounting:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.
3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC'.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough -in.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70.
C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 16155.
D. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for
outlet device.
E. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
F. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
G. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
H. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
I. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
J. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
K. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and
JP Court BOXES
10/4/2005 16138 -2
0
•
backsplashes.
L.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
M.
Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
N.
Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
O.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
P.
Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.
Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
Q.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
R.
Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
S.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
T.
Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
U.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
.
V.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
W.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
X.
Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Y.
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
Z.
Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for
other installations.
AA.
Set floor boxes level.
AB.
Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal
box in other locations.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material.
B.
Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
•
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
BOXES
16138 - 3
f
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall switches.
B.
Receptacles.
C.
Device plates and decorative box covers.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2000.
.
B.
NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1999.
C.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2002.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable
for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.05
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
B.
Provide two protective rings.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com.
B.
GE Industrial: www.geindustdal.com.
C.
Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com.
D.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general -use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and
WD 1.
1. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.
2. Indicator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red handle.
JP Court
10/4/2005
WIRING DEVICES
16140 -1
r
3. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics.
B.
Switch Types: Single pole, double pole, and 3-way.
2.03
RECEPTACLES
A.
Receptacles: Heavy duty, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.
1. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
B.
Convenience Receptacles: Type 5 - 20.
C.
Single Convenience Receptacles.
D.
Duplex Convenience Receptacles.
E.
GFCI Receptacles: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet
regulatory requirements.
i
F.
Isolated Ground Receptacles.
2.04
WALL PLATES
A.
Decorative Cover Plates: Smooth stainless steel.
B.
Jumbo Cover Plates: Smooth stainless steel.
C.
Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B.
Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C.
Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.
Clean debris from outlet boxes.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.
B.
Install devices plumb and level.
C.
Install switches with OFF position down.
D.
Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as
instructed by manufacturer.
E.
Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
F.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
G.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
I.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
JP Court WIRING DEVICES
10/4/2005 16140 - 2
•
J.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
K.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 to obtain mounting heights
specified and indicated on drawings.
B.
Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
C.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter.
E.
Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
F.
Install telephone jack for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches
above finished floor.
G.
Install telephone jack for forward -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches
above finished floor.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01400.
B.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C.
Operate each wall switch and dimmer with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
D.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
•
E.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
G.
Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational.
+
3.06 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
•
JP Court
10/4/2005
WIRING DEVICES
16140 - 3
SECTION 16412
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Fusible switches.
B.
Nonfusible switches.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002.
B.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001.
.
C.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
•
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
GE Industrial: www.geindustdal.com.
B.
Square D: www.squared.com.
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 COMPONENTS
•
A.
Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.
B.
Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.
1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position.
2. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C.
Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
JP Court
10/4/2005
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16412 -1
0
7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size
installed.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5.
END OF SECTION
JP Court
10/4/2005
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
16412 - 2
C7
•
E
SECTION 16426
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
•
PART1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
General purpose contactors.
B.
Lighting contactors.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays,
Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2000.
B.
NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 1993 (R2001).
C.
NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2001.
D.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
.
and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.
•
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
•
PART
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation: www.ab.com.
B.
Square D: www.squared.com.
C.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A.
Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.
B.
Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
C.
Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.
D.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
JP Court
10/4/2005
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
16426 -1
0
•
E.
Accessories:
1. Pushbutton: ON/OFF.
2. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open.
•
2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A.
Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.
B.
Configuration: Electrically held.
C.
Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
D.
Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.
E.
Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous
loads.
F.
Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
•
G.
Accessories:
1. Pushbutton: ON/OFF.
2. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 1 normally open contacts in addition to seal -in contact.
B.
Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
2.05 DISCONNECTS
A.
Combination Contactors: Combine contactor with disconnect in common enclosure.
B.
Disconnects: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker with integral thermal and instantaneous
•
magnetic trip in each pole; UL listed.
C.
Disconnects: Fusible switch assembly; NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally
operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
PART 3
EXECUTION
•
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install enclosed contactors plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070.
C.
Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
D.
Provide fuses for fusible switches.
E.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates; refer to Section 16075 for product requirements and
location.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400.
B.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
C.
Perform applicable inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.16.1.
END OF SECTION
JP Court ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
10/4/2005 16426 -2
•
7
SECTION 16443
PANELBOARDS
•
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Lighting and appliance panelboards.
1.02 REFERENCES
A.
NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2000.
B.
NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000.
C.
NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
•
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002.
D.
NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2003.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
•
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
•
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
C.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting
arrangements.
D.
Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts
and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
•
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish two of each panelboard key.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
•
A.
Cutler -Hammer: www.cutier-hammer.eaton.com.
B.
GE Industrial: www.geindustrial.com.
C.
Square D: www.squared.com.
D.
Seimens.
E.
Substitutions: Not Permitted.
JP Court
10/4/2005
PANELBOARDS
16443 -1
L
2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.
B. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard;
provide insulated ground bus where scheduled.
C. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated.
D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt -on type, with
common trip handle for all poles; UL listed.
1. Type SWD for lighting circuits.
2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits.
3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled.
4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type as indicated.
F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide
for 480 volt panelboards.
G. Cabinet Front: cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame,
and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3
EXECUTION
r!
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1.
B.
Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
C.
Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more
than 4 inches above floor.
D.
Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E.
Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect
circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
F.
Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075.
G.
Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4.
•
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6
for circuit breakers.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper
phasing for multi -wire branch circuits.
END OF SECTION
•
JP Court PANELBOARDS
10/4/2005 16443 - 2
•
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
•
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Interior luminaires and accessories.
B.
Emergency lighting units.
C.
Exit signs.
D.
Ballasts.
E.
Fluorescent dimming ballasts and controls.
F.
Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply.
G.
Lamps.
H.
Luminaire accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
•
A.
ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High -Intensity -Discharge and Low
Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type); 2002.
B.
NECA/IESNA 500 - Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems;
National Electrical Contractors Association; 1998.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
•
D.
NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire
Protection Association; 2003.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard
•
product of the manufacturer.
B.
Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
•
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
•
specified and indicated.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish one replacement lamp for each lamp type.
PART2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cooper Lighting
JP Court
10/4/2005
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 - 1
E
7
B. Lithonia Lighting: www.lithonia.com.
C. As indicated on the drawings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings.
2.03 BALLASTS AND CONTROL UNITS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts: electronic, suitable for lamps specified.
1. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. •
2. Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.
3. Substitutions: Not permitted.
B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast, suitable for
lamp specified.
1. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
C. Emergency Lighting Units: Remote incandescent emergency lighting unit.
1. Battery: 12 volt, nickel -cadmium type, with 1.5 hour capacity.
2. Remote Fixtures:
a. Housing: White plastic
b. Lamps: 50 watt minimum, sealed beam type
3. Indicators: Lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.
4. TEST switch: Transfers unit from external power supply to integral battery supply.
5. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection.
2.04 LAMPS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com.
3. Osram/Sylvania.
4. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B.
Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500
(commercial lighting).
B.
Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers.
•
Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
C.
Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D.
Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
•
E.
Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires in grid ceiling directly from building
structure.
F.
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
G.
Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating.
•
H.
Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place.
JP Court
10/4/2005
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 -2
9
•
I. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as scheduled.
J. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
K. Connect luminaires and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16138 using
flexible conduit.
L. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
M. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
N. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
O. Interface with air handling accessories furnished and installed under Section 15840.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
• B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours.
3.06 PROTECTION
• A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULE -See Drawings
•
•
•
JP Court
10/4/2005
END OF SECTION
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 - 3
0
•
SECTION 16520
EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
n
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High -Intensity -Discharge and Low
Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple -Supply Type); 2002.
B. NECA/IESNA 501 - Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2000.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
B. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
D. Maintenance Data: For each luminaire.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
the purpose specified and indicated.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one of each type and wattage lamp installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish products as indicated in Schedule included on the Drawings.
2.02 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts: electronic, suitable for lamps specified.
1. Provide low -temperature ballast suitable for lamps specified.
2. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
3. Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc.
B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballasts: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast, suitable for
lamp specified.
1. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.03 LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.
JP Court
10/4/2005
EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16520 - 1
E
•
2. Philips Lighting Co of NA: www.lighting.philips.com.
3. Obtain lamps from luminaire manufacturer.
4. Osram/Sylvania
•
B. Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire.
C. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps:
1. Product: Pulse Start
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
•
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install fixtures securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 501.
B. Install lamps in each luminaire.
C. Bond luminaires and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
•
3.02
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and
operation.
3.03
ADJUSTING
•
A. Aim and adjust luminaires to provide illumination levels and distribution as directed.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.05
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
3.06
SCHEDULE- See Drawings
END OF SECTION
•
L
JP Court EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
10/4/2005 16520 -2
SECTION 16760 —SOUND SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE
2516
A. Description of Work:
1. The Audio System shall contain a four plus one input mixer and a four input amplifier
with graphic equalizer. Controls shall be adjustable by the user.
2. There will be two speaker zones: Courtroom and Lobby. Lobby shall be
independently switchable by the judge.
3. There will be a basic control system to allow operator to control playback devices,
mute microphones, and mute speaker zones.
B. Related Work:
1. All conduits with pull strings, all electrical pull boxes, and all outlet boxes shall be
furnished and installed by the electrical subcontractor. Coordinate as required.
2. All 120VAC power conductors and conduit associated with power circuits to all
equipment locations are as shown on the electrical drawings..
3. Section 15010: Mechanical and Electrical- General Provisions.
4. Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
0 2.01 GENERAL
A. All equipment shall be new and unused.
B. The following sections specifically list the acceptable equipment types and items for this
project.
C. Substitutions - Where the phrase "or approved equal" appears, the item specified shall set
a standard of quality and performance, based on the published specifications of the
manufacturer and on the actual performance as known to the architect.
D. System shall be complete with all required accessories, whether specifically described
herein or not, necessary to perform all functions described by, or inferred from, these
specifications.
2.02 Wire and Cable:
•
A. All wire and cables shall be new and unused. Acceptable cable manufacturers include but
are not limited to Belden, Horizon and Alpha.
B. In all cases, provide plenum rated cable.
C. Wire not installed in equipment racks, not portable, or not installed in conduit shall be
fire -rated and meet all applicable codes.
D. Speaker cable shall be Belden 5300UE, 18 AWG twisted pair or approved equal.
0
SOUND SYSTEM 2228 •
16760.2
E. Microphone level audio cable and line level inter -rack wire shall be Belden 6500FE, 2-22
AWG with foil shield or approved equal.
•
F. Wire and cable for all other devices shall be supplied in accordance with the device
manufacturer and the National Electrical Code.
2.03 Jacks, Connectors, and Wall Plates:
•
A. All plate -mounted connectors shall be ground -insulated from the plates on which they are
mounted. Acceptable connector manufacturers are limited to Switchcraft and Neutrik.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all jacks and connectors for the Audio Systems shall be as
follows:
1. Microphone and line -level input jacks: Switchcraft QGP-series 3-pin female XLR •
connectors, or approved equal.
2. Audio output jacks: Switchcraft QGP-series 3-pin male XLR connectors, or approved
equal.
3. Cable -end audio connectors: Switchcraft QGP-series 3-pin XLR connectors, or
approved equal. •
2.04 Microphones Wired:
A. Furnish and install one cardiod pattern gooseneck microphone for the witness stand.
Microphone to be of a slimline design with interchangeable condenser cartridge, high •
sensitivity, and balanced, transformerless output for maximum immunity to
electromagnetic hum and RF interference. Microphone shall have a frequency response of
50-17000hz. Microphone to be mounted with shock mount.
1. Shure MX418 or approved equal.
•
B. Furnish and install one cardiod pattern gooseneck microphone for Judges bench area.
Microphone to be of a slimline design with interchangeable condenser cartridge, high
sensitivity, and balanced, transformerless output for maximum immunity to
electromagnetic hum and RF interference. Microphone shall have user -programmable
on/off switch with LED on/off indicator for temporary muting at the microphone location.
Microphone shall have a frequency response of 50-17000hz. •
1. Shure MX 418D/C or approved equal.
C. Furnish and install three (3) super cardiod pattern condenser microphones. Two (2) to be
hung in front of the attorney's tables and one (1) in front of the jury box. Microphone
shall have a frequency response of 30-20,OOOhz. Extreme low frequencies shall be filtered •
out to reduce pickup of room rumble. Microphone output shall be balanced, low
impedance with RFI and static protection. A built-in removable hanger shall allow
position adjustment.
1. Audio-Technica #ES933/C or approved equal.
2.05 Amplifier: •
A. Furnish and install four XLR input, single output mixer/amplifier with integral 10 band
graphic equalizer. Amplified shall be rated at 35 watts RMS with Aphex Aural Exciter
circuit, variable loudness control, dual function equalizer for feedback control or wave
9
• 2228 SOUND SYSTEM
16760.3
sloping, auto level control, and auto muting. Output shall be for 4 ohm, 8 ohm, 25V,
25VCT, and 70V speaker systems. Unit shall have 48 volt phantom power on all
• microphone inputs.
1. Bogen #GS-35 or approved equal.
2.06 Digital Automatic Mixer:
A. Furnish and install a mixer with 4 input channels of digitally controlled audio processing
• with priority logic. Unit shall have switchable priority selection for each channel,
individual gain control, and master gain control. Priority attention shall be adjustable
between 6db and 40 db. Rack mount kit.
1. Audio-Technica #AT-MX351 or approved equal.
• 2.08 Speakers:
•
A. Furnish and install 8 ea. ceiling speakers containing a dual cone, 16 watt, 8" speaker.
Speakers shall have a 60 Hz to 16 kHz frequency range and 10 oz. ceramic magnet.
Speakers to be installed using steel baffle, backcan, tile bridge, and grille.
1. Quam #C10X/BU/WS +ERD8+SSB2 or approved equal.
2.08 Microphone Combiner:
A. Furnish and install a microphone combiner for the two attorney microphones. Locate near
mixer and amp. Combines 2 XLR microphone inputs to a single XLR output.
• 1. RAPCO # SC-100i or approved equal
•
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Run cables in conduit.
B. Install all equipment complete and ready for use.
• C. Provide additional support for ceiling mounted fixtures so as not to distort suspended
acoustic ceiling system.
END OF SECTION
•
•
9